Large-Scale Shift To Organic Farming To Increase World Food Supply Essay Essay Help

Table of Contents Introduction

A Case for Organic Farming

Non Organic Farming as the Solution

Discussion

Conclusion

References

Introduction Of the three basic human needs, food is the most vital taking primacy over shelter and clothing. All governments have therefore made it a priority to protect their citizens against hunger and ensure food security. As a result of modern advances, there has been a huge population increase combined with lower mortality rates.

This has resulted in high demands for food to feed the large human population. While most of the industrialized nations are able to guarantee food security, many developing nations have been plagued by hunger and starvation. In order to offset the food deficit and feed the world, non-organic farming has been taken up in place of the traditional organic method. This non-organic farming has been hailed as the solution to the food insecurity problem that many developing nations face.

However, the acceptance of non-organic farming as the solution to the world’s food problem is not unanimous and there has emerged a vocal group advocating for the use of organic farming. This advocates assert that large-scale shift to organic farming is indeed the best way to increase world food supplies and hence deal with hunger. This paper shall argue that non-organic farming is the only way to produce enough food to feed today’s population.

A Case for Organic Farming Organic farming ensures that food is cultivated in a sustainable manner therefore ensuring the food security of mankind for generations to come. The Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations defines organic agriculture as “a holistic production management system that avoids use of synthetic fertilizers, pesticides and genetically modified organisms”.

Halweil (2006) records that adverse effects or organic farming to the environment such as: erosion, chemical pollution to drinking water, and death of wildlife are just one-third those of non-organic farming.

A major issue when dealing with all resources is their sustainability. With regard to farming, the best method should be sustainable for an indefinite period of time. Halweil (2006) asserts that organic farming is a potentially sustainable approach especially in areas with low yields due to poor access to inputs. Interestingly, the poor access to input areas are mostly developing countries which are the worst hit by hunger.

Since organic farming involves lower economic risk than non-organic farming which are mostly capital intensive, people in poor areas can grow and harvest food therefore increasing food security. Organic farming also promises to shift the balance towards smaller farmers who are currently overshadowed by large scale non-organic farmers who can afford the expensive inputs.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Opponents of organic farming advance that organic farming would reduce food output therefore plunging even more people into hunger. This view is faulty since it assumes that people go hungry due to a universal lack of availability of food. The real cause of hunger in the world is in most cases the lack of money to purchase the food than the lack of food in itself (Hollander, 2004).

Dealing with the socio-economic situation is therefore the primary means by which hunger can be avoided. Halweil (2006) points out that organic farming is not as easy as non-organic farming as it is very labor intensive. These high labor requirements mean that organic farming helps in the redistribution of resources in areas where unemployment rates are high. By giving people a source of livelihood, they are able to purchase food and therefore avoid hunger.

Non Organic Farming as the Solution Non-organic farming involves the use of Genetically Modified Organisms (GMOs) which gives the farmer a higher advantage over traditional crops. Some of the important properties of GMOs are increased resistance of crops to insect and disease vectors.

Considering the fact that one problem that has continually plagued man’s agricultural efforts is the problem of pests and diseases, this is a very significant contribution. All over the world, communities have been known to suffer from hunger as a result of their crops being attacked by pests and/or diseases (Miller, 2004).

While efforts in the form of using pesticides have been extensively used to deal with this problem, this solution has proved to be short term since pests have been known to become immune to chemicals over time. GM on the other had can be used to create special strains of crops which have immunity over pests and diseases therefore reducing the need for pesticides. This has the double advantage of saving the farmer the money he would have used investing in chemicals as well as safeguarding the environment.

Food safety concerns are some of the most common fears for consumers when dealing with non-organic foods. This concerned are heightened even more as a result of the common perception that non-organic foods are relatively unsafe as compared to organic foods. Miller (2004) demonstrates that non-organic farm products are safer than organic foods.

Despite this, people continue to assume that organic foods are healthier since they are grown in a chemical free setting. Corroborating the safety of non-organic foods, Nelson (2001) shows that genetically modified foods have been under thorough scrutiny for years and the safety of genetically modified food products has been examined by governments and scientists for decades.

We will write a custom Essay on Large-Scale Shift to Organic Farming to Increase World Food Supply specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Even with these many years of research and tests, there has been no specific risk or harm identified from the non-organic foods. Miller (2004) reveals that even the USDA which certifies foods as organic makes no claim that organic farming produces safer or more nutritious foods than non-organic farming.

The most desirable farming method is that which yields the highest produce in the shortest period of time. This is because the world population is constantly increasing and if food production capacity does not increase significantly, many people stand the risk of starvation.

Even advocates of organic foods such as Halweil (2006) acknowledge that organic production often encounter lower yields in the first few years. The biggest motivation for farming today is therefore coming up with products in the shortest time possible so as to feed the bulging population.

Doyle and Lipman (2008) rightly noted that “most commercially available meats are factory farmed because it is fast, convenient and more economical”. It can therefore be seen that while non-organic livestock may not be as healthy to the human body as organic livestock, they give the nation the ability to feed its population

A problem which has plagued farmers since pre historic times is pests and diseases. This problem has resulted in the loss of numerous crops and at times the starvation of entire populations. All over the world, communities have been known to suffer from hunger as a result of their crops being attacked by pests and/or diseases.

Non-organic farming provides the best means with which to deal with this age-old problem since it makes use of special strains of crops which have immunity over pests and diseases therefore reducing the need for pesticides. In American, One thirds of corn crop is genetically modified therefore decreasing the need for pesticides (Miller, 2004). This has the double advantage of saving the farmer the money he would have used investing in chemicals as well as safeguarding the environment.

The rapid population increase has been earmarked as the major cause of hunger in the world. This is because resources such as land have been diverted from farming to house the human population. In addition to this, man’s industrialization efforts have caused adverse effects such as global warming which has made land that was previously arable useless for agricultural purposes.

Non organic farming presents a means for overcoming these problems through a number of ways. Miller (2004) notes that modern farming techniques have enabled the limited supply of land to yield increasing quantities of food.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Large-Scale Shift to Organic Farming to Increase World Food Supply by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Genetic engineering has led to the production of crops which have increased tolerances to stresses such as drought, cold, heat, or high soil salinities (Nelson, 2001). Land that could not be used for cultivation can therefore be used for producing food which is needed to feed the population. By making use of land that could previously not be used for cultivation, non organic farming results in more food production therefore increasing the likelihood of eliminating hunger in the world.

Discussion Demand for food is on a rise and higher food production is the only means through which hunger in the world can be eliminated. Coleman (2005) asserts that the war on hunger is a “grave and universal need”. Coleman (2004) point out how dire the situation is by stating that as of 2004, 10 million people died as a result of starvation. These bleak realities demonstrate that time is of essence in coming up with a solution to the world food problem.

At best, a shift to large scale organic farming would bring result in a significant decrease in food production. In addition to this, the shift has inherent risks. Halweil (2006) notes that a global shift to organic farming could take decades and farmers would have to learn from experience as they eliminate fungicides and look for more fungus-resistant crop varieties.

These are risks that the world cannot afford to take. From the arguments advanced in this paper, it is clear that organic farming cannot fulfill the food needs of the current population let alone the even great population expected in the coming years. The increase in food production that is necessary to meet the food demands of the world can only be achieved through non-organic farming.

Conclusion Food demand is increasing all around the world and measures to step up food production are necessary. This paper set out to argue that a large scale shift to organic farming is not the best way to increase world food supply.

To reinforce this claim, this paper has demonstrated that a large scale shift to organic farming will invariably lead to decreased food production and will not bring about any major benefits to food production. The paper has proposed non-organic farming as the only feasible solution to increasing world food supplies and therefore solving the world hunger issues.

References Coleman, G. D. (2005). Is Genetic Engineering the Answer to Hunger? Retrieved from: https://www.americamagazine.org/issue/519/article/genetic-engineering-answer-hunger

Doyle, M.

[supanova_question]

Financial Revolution in Australia in the 2004 Essay cheap essay help: cheap essay help

Fiscal Scenario in Australia Three different examinations have already been instated by the Government this year. These studies are expected to bring significant changes to the financial structure of Australia after a very long time. The last financial revolution in the country is dated back to the Financial Services Reform Act in 2004.

Ripoll Review Different views are coming in from different sections of the financial industry. The PJC chairman has summarized the precedence for the investigational inquiry. Ripoll thinks that the financial services licensing sector needs immense attention to draw out some conclusive results. Although the industry stakeholders agree that some kinds of reforms are important, they fear that the reforms might just make the system complex and imposes more constraints.

Ripoll is confident; he says they’re planning to not only introduce reforms in the system, but to make it simpler and clearer. There are numerous issues prevailing in the industry that the PJC is concerned about. Some of these include understanding of PI and financial advice and tax deductions. Many people are hoping that these issues will be addressed in PJC’s report on November 23rd (Papandrea, n.d).

Henry Review The Henry Review conducted under the Secretary of Treasury is also on its way. Superannuation guarantees and the superannuation preservation of age caught a lot of attention of stakeholders.

The Henry Report was released on 2nd May entitled “Australia’s Future Tax System”, includes 138 suggestions for long term reforms in tax and transfer system. At present, 125 taxes are obligatory by all levels of government in Australia. 90% of tax proceeds are attained from only 10 of these taxes. This has led to a conclusion in the taxation circles to bring in any reforms in taxation the best thing would be to increase these 10 taxes and eliminate all the 115 other taxes.

A number of recommendations have been given in the report. Let’s take an overview of the major highlights of the report;

Business taxation suggestions An overall reduction in company tax rate to 25%, reduction of compliance cost for small businesses, enhancement of capital allowance allowed for write off of income producing assets, updating of taxation rules regarding trusts, revision of small business capital gains tax rules and increase lifetime limit of retirement exemption.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Consumption taxes

The report excludes consideration of GST but provides a few points which if implemented could be effective for the operation of GST.

Land

[supanova_question]

The Last Moments of Saint Mary Magdalene Critical Essay college essay help near me

Table of Contents Introduction

Scene description

Experience to the original audience

Narrative context of the image

Stylistic group of the artist

Formal properties and meaning

Conclusion

Works Cited

Introduction A closer examination of a piece of art work may depict an artist’s mind. The way form, and other literary studies are used by the artist indicates his/ her art world. An artist uses his work therefore to communicate some message to people; otherwise called his audience.

A painting tells an audience to the artist a certain social group to which he/ she belong: religious, political education. Before the introduction of cameras, the real world could only be captured using the hand of an artist who devoted himself or herself to his work such that the end piece of work was a masterpiece to be admired.

Today, we can learn of the works of great painters from their collected works in the museums. An artist does not just paint for the sake of having colors and brushes around him/her to do the work. He must present some aspects of that paint with a high degree of professionalism that the work is admired by many.

The choice of a setting of a scene in a painting for instance may relate perfectly to inner expressions that are not available to be described by the use of words. For this reason we are to examine the artists mind by observing works done by him/ like the last Moments of Saint Mary Magdalene.

Scene description The painter presents his piece of art work in a religious context. There are two scenes in which there are four characters. The scene to the right of the painting has presented us with three earthlings, in a kind of priesthood dressing. On the left hand side scene, there is representation of four earthlings (human beings) and two winged creatures.

The assumption can be drawn that the two creatures with wings are angels, since angels have traditionally been presented to have wings. As we can also draw from the two scenes in the same frame the fourth figure, which can presumably be Saint Mary Magdalene neither takes the body of neither a human Mary nor an angel. In my opinion, the artist’s target audience was a Christian world. This can be supported by the presence of the two angels.

The scene to the left presents a priest flanked by two people, seemingly his aids. The setting of the first scene in the frame is a place of worship, probably a whole church or a section in a church. The three people aside from the blurred figure of Mary Magdalene seem to be performing a ritual of some kind.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Mary or the being representing her in that scene poses as penitently as if she is accepting a wish from the priest. In her bowing posture, before the priest, she is presented as having a solid upper body while her lower body seems to have many tentacle-like limps.

Her figure is also presented without defined clothing like the other figures presented in the frame. She has one golden color which does not present any distinction to her gender. Piece architecture separates the two scenes in the frame.

Despite the separation of the two scenes by this architectural work there is solid unity between the two scenes .this unity is enhanced by the well balance in the colors used. The figures to the left are represented Mary Magdalene, a man who is depicted as ordinary believer of some religion; perhaps the religion of Mary.

The two angels, like the priest and his aides, are flanking her from her right and left. Something more comes from this left scene. The angels look like they are lifting Mary skywards, with Mary in a prayer posture. There exist some contrasts in the messages depicted from the scenes, both to the right and left.

On the right, Mary is posing before a priest and bowing down. In the left hand scene the man is kneeling but not bowing. In his kneeling stance, his face is fixed at Mary who is firmly gazing upwards. Besides, there is a wall of rocks which seems to camouflage Mary in her colors. In her left hand scene, she depicts ascension.

Experience to the original audience The experience to the original audience may have been a sense of ascension from the earthly service to some supreme being, in this case God to his service in the heavens. The artist is presenting in fact not only two scenes but in my opinion three.

The third scene, which is not clearly indicated in the panel, is a scene of transition represented by man, that is, the man in the left scene. From this, the artist aroused a feeling to the audience that Mary like them and any other saints that may have come before them have an earthly task in church, working as priests.

We will write a custom Essay on The Last Moments of Saint Mary Magdalene specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Then from the priesthood, there is a connection between mankind and the heavens. This is emphasized by the representation of the kneeling man in the left scene. There has been a widely held idea that, when you are transformed from an earthly mortal body to the heavenly immortal body, you are given a reference to a rock. The rock which is symbolically used in the Christian religion represents everlastingness.

To the audience, this does not just stand out as a normal rock, but a rock which brings permanent transformation. This is justified by the mix in colors of Mary Magdalene and the rocks in the background. Also, the kneeling man has an extended arm towards Mary and the angels. This gives a message to the audience that, the saints not only create a connection between themselves and their supreme being that they worship but also acts as a link between man and the heavens.

This could explain the emergence of churches that still mention the names of same early saints in their prayer. In particular, the prayers they make particularly requests the saint to pray on their behalf to God. In addition the bluish color making the background of the left hand side scene is a clear representation of the deep heavens.

The transformed body of Mary here is gazing directly at it, in deep prayer while being lifted by the angels towards it. To the original audience, this may have represented that for you to reach the promised heavens you must be pure and prayerful.

Narrative context of the image There is great evidence of the existence narrative context in the image. To begin with, the scenes depict a church setting in which there is a priest(s). The subject facing the priests is someone who has done her last on earth and therefore needs to be released to ascend. The flow of the events is from the right of the Panel to the left.

The scenes and the characters are interconnected through creation of sub-settings within the main setting depicted by special choice of colors and symmetry in the frame. Just like a story being told by a narrator, this artist is telling his story by use of stylistic devices such as symbolism (Braembussche 310).

From a fully transformed human body to another body, the priest releases Mary to the angels to be lifted. This release occurs inside the church building. Outside the church, although not touching, a worshipper gives her his last pleas as if requesting her not to leave him. From that point, another role comes to play; the beings performing this role are the angels.

Mary therefore has played a dual role of linking the heavenly mission to her earthly missions. These events occur as a flow from the church indoors and out to the deep heavens. Like a story, the image creates a narrative context which is very reach in symbolism (Clancy 153-155).

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Last Moments of Saint Mary Magdalene by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Stylistic group of the artist This artist came from an impressionist movement. This is seen by his ability to attract the audience through the use of thin paintings of the angels and Mary, his ability to relax the background and the subject’s boundary and his ability to use light at its different tonal values (Kronegger 223).

Formal properties and meaning Light has been particularly used in this case to bring home a clearer relationship to the subject. An example is the use of low saturation in colors makes Mary’s image get diminished in the background colors of the rocks. With respect to the meaning, the painting depicts Mary as someone ascending to heaven.

The low saturation of colors indicates that she is leaving to where she shall not be seen again in the near future. Also, there is the use of color and space enhances the narrative idea of movement from the earth’s solid architecture to abstract formlessness.

There is evidence to this in the presentation of priests in the church. The flow of color saturation decreases from the real to very low saturation towards the solid rocks, then to lowest color saturations in the background forming a deep space (Carrol 539). This deep space can be said to represent the deep heavens. Transcendence is depicted in the painting is enhanced by the use of ethereal colors of deep space that clearly contrasts the earth’s tones which rule the painting.

Conclusion In conclusion the painting has been used by the artist to express his religious would of his time. The specific message to the audience during his time must have evoked feelings of fear mixed with hope, in the context of religious fulfillment of human mortal form and transformations to immortality.

Works Cited Braembussche, Antoon. Thinking art. Brussels. Springer: Brussels, 2009. 3 June 2011.

Carroll, Noel. Art in Three Dimensions. New York: Oxford University Press, 2010. 3 June 2011

Clancy, John. Impressionism: historical overview and biography. New York: Nova Science Publishers .Inc, 2003. 3 June 2011.

Kronegger, Maria. Literary impressionism. New Haven: United printing Services, 1973. 3 June 2011.

[supanova_question]

The Problem of Environmental Degradation in Modern World Report scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Waste Disposal Strategies

Solving Environmental Problems

Conclusion

References

Introduction Environmental degradation is on the increase, and it is likely to affect the human race in the future. In light of this challenge, many environmental scientists have made several recommendations on how we can prevent destruction of our environment. In this case, several mechanisms can be used to keep the environment clean and safe from destruction.

Poor waste disposal is regarded as one of the key causes of environmental degradation. Waste disposal is not only limited to the disposal of industrial waste materials, but it also involves the items we use and discard daily. There are three basic strategies that can be used to reduce waste disposal and they include the following.

Waste Disposal Strategies Reduce it, is the first strategy for reducing waste disposal, and it is the most important of the three strategies. This is because if people can decrease the rate at which they use various products, the amount of things to be recycled or reused will also go down considerably. Moreover, reduction of consumption will also make people to cut back on their expenditure on various products, and this can help in mitigating environmental pollution.

In addition, we should try to decrease the toxicity of waste products that are dumped in landfills. “Source reduction involves reducing waste at the source by designing, producing, and using items that are less toxic for the waste system” (Scott, 2007). This method of reduction can assist in conservation of resources, and decrease pollution. For example, goods can be produced and used in away that they do not affect the environment.

Reuse of materials is the second method of minimizing waste products. Apart from reducing consumption, we can also find alternative uses for the things that we have used. Besides this, we can also turn used items to other things, rather than recycling or discarding them. Reuse has the following benefits. First, it makes waste management easier since it reduces waste production.

“Secondly, the environment benefits because reusing items leads to less production, which reduces emission of pollutants, and resource harvesting” (Woods, 2010). People should try to be more creative in order to reduce waste materials. For example, a person can use old garments for cleaning or even mending other garments instead of discarding them. One shopping bag can also be used on many shopping occasions.

Recycling is the third strategy, and involves making of new products from the used ones. Unlike reusing, recycling requires many procedures. For example, the items to be recycled are collected and then taken for reprocessing. Recycling also demands energy, money, and other materials.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This makes it to be the least preferable method of waste reduction. Nonetheless, recycling decreases the use of landfills, and it also minimizes pollution. “R’s” will not eliminate environmental degradation, utilizing them will lead to a healthier environment” (Scott, 2007).

Solving Environmental Problems Solving environmental problems has not been simple because of these factors. First, many individuals are ignorant about how to manage the environment. Secondly, poverty also makes environmental management complicated. This is because some people destroy resources such as vegetation, and trees in order to get income. The third impediment in this process is the high cost of implementing environmentally-friendly strategies.

Conclusion Environmental degradation can be minimized through the three strategies, reduce, reuse, and recycle. “The solutions to all our environmental problems do not lie in the capitalistic mindset, the Judeo-Christian value system, or the male-dominated, white cultures of modern man” (McConnell

[supanova_question]

People helping one another Essay college essay help near me

Table of Contents Introduction

Relationship

To repay good deeds

The need to be helped later

Temperament

Conclusion

References

Introduction The mind of the human being is the organ that drives all other organs into motion. Behind every act that a human being does there is a reason. One of the natures of human beings is helping those who are in need. This is based on various reasons. This paper analyses the reasons that lead to persons helping others. Among the items discussed in this paper are; the relationship between persons, the need to be helped later, to repay a good deed and the temperamental basis.

Relationship One of the basic reasons that lead to people helping one another is the relationship between the helper and the person in need. This more so happens when the two person are related by blood. A need of a blood relative is seen as a personal need to all other blood relatives and thus they would offer a hand in helping the needy come out of problem (Cash, 2002). The responsibility that one bears for a blood relative is usually not meant to be repaid.

Similarly, it is common for persons who are related by marriage to help one another. The need of a husband, wife or a fiancé is also taken by the helper as a personal need. The degree of closeness may differ from that of blood relationship. However, the weight that is carried in both cases is relatively similar. In most instances, persons offer to help their life partners in priority to blood relatives.

In this group also lie the persons who help because they have been requested to help. This group of people rarely helps willingly. They either perceive themselves incapable of offering the help or find they help as unfit or not necessary. Also there are persons who are mean in nature. Such persons can only offer help when they have been requested to do so (Cash, 2002).

To repay good deeds Every person has been helped to reach where he or she is at one point or the other. A child is helped by her parents to grow, the neighbors, teachers, and relatives also give a hand in life. There is also help that has been received from friends and strangers. All this help is repaid in different ways. For the help received from parents, the child may repay it by helping the parents at their point of need or by helping his or her own children.

For the help that is received from all other persons, it is repaid almost in the same manner. A person may offer help directly to the persons who helped him or her or may offer help to others in remembrance of the good deeds that he or she has received form other people (Cash, 2002).

A person who has been treated well from childhood has a great likelihood of treating others well than a person who was brought up in harsh and un-conducive environment.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The need to be helped later There is also a group of people who help anticipating that the persons whom they have helped will rise to the occasion should they have a need. This group of people will always be the first to contribute to others when they have a need and will always like to be recognized that they have offered their help.

The help that comes from this kind of people is at times seen as an act of dystopia. Such persons always imagine of bad things happening like death, accidents, injuries, attacks and other misfortunes. Lack of recognition of help from such persons can lead to quarrels between the helper and the persons helped (Mattern, 2007). To this people, helping others is bait or a bribe of being helped in future.

Temperament The human race is divided into different temperaments. The behavior of a person is thus attributable to the temperament that he or she belongs to. The likelihood to change a person from his or her temperament is very hard. The persons that belong to temperaments that are outgoing and extroverts are usually ready to help other people irregardless of the relationship or the amount of help that they might receive form the persons that they have helped.

The persons who fall under this category are usually public figures who do not have any relationship with the persons that they help. This group of people takes the need of every other individual as their own needs (Mattern, 2007).

Conclusion As we have seen through the paper, man has different reason for helping fellow human beings. Though the reasons for help may differ, the ability to help also matters. There are those people who have the will of helping but lack the ability to help.

However, helping others is humane and the reasons for giving help not withstanding, there is no man who can make it without the help of others; whether materially, politically, psychologically or even socially. The persons receiving help have to be aware of the above reasons so as to know what actions are expected of him after receiving help.

References Cash, A., (2002). Psychology for dummies. New York: Dummies

We will write a custom Essay on People helping one another specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Mattern, J., (2007). Do You Help Others? New Jersey: Gareth Stevens, Inc

[supanova_question]

How can Peace be Achieved Essay writing essay help

Social conflicts generally arise when people pursue their self-interests with less regard to other people’s interests or values. As a result, one party perceives the goals or actions of the other as incompatible with its own leading to a conflict. Although conflict may affect relations between the parties involved, if well understood, it offers an opportunity for ending oppression and promoting better human relations.

In addition, conflict forces people to engage in resolving a common problem. If a conflict is effectively managed, peace is achieved as the concerned parties reconcile their differences and reach a mutual agreement (Giroux, 1993, p.137). In achieving peace, it is important that parties involved in a conflict develop a deeper understanding of their culture and the cultures of the others, which can facilitate dialogue between parties involved in a dispute.

To achieve peace and tranquility in conflict situations, there is nothing better than personal interactions and communication through dialogue. Dialogue is one way of achieving peace and solving interpersonal, national, and international disputes. Additionally, increasing cross-cultural interactions is important in peace-building initiatives as it promotes understanding, which results to peace and prosperity (Giroux, 1993, p.141).

To promote interactions between parties involved in a conflict, dialogue is essential. The major impediment to peace is failure of the conflicting parties to understand and appreciate each other’s perspectives to an issue. To achieve peace, therefore, it is important that the parties involved learn to understand and appreciate one another’s values and interests through dialogue and interactions.

Conflicts primarily arise when various parties pursue self-interests while neglecting the other people’s needs. The pursuit of individual interests creates a social dilemma, which may turn out to be detrimental to all people. However, through and communication, the social dilemmas can be resolved. Dialogue promotes group identity, which consequently promotes concern for collective welfare (Giroux, 1993, p.142).

Conflicts also arise when groups or people compete for scarce resources leading to group identity and polarization. Due to competition, one group perceives the other as the ‘outside group’ and develops negative perceptions towards the ‘outside group’ members. Meanwhile, the in-group members become more cohesive and at the same time proud. Nevertheless, through dialogue, the two groups can reconcile and find a way of resolving their differences.

Perceived injustices can also lead to a conflict especially if one party feels that he/she is unfairly treated. If resources are not distributed equitably, the party that feels exploited can turn aggressive and harass the one perceived to have over benefitted or plan for revenge.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More However, through collective dialogue, the group perceived to have over benefitted unfairly can offer an apology or compensation to the other group. This would also prevent future retaliation by the exploited group. Misperceptions of each other’s goals or actions may also cause a situation to degenerate into a conflict.

Misperceptions arise when an individual interprets information or a situation in a biased or self-serving way. As a result, negative stereotypes of the out-group are developed, as each group perceives the other’s goals as incompatible with its own. Dialogue allows the conflicting parties to understand each other’s perspectives in a particular conflict and dispels negative stereotypes and misperceptions.

The strategies that mitigate the causes of conflicts provide effective ways of preventing a situation deteriorating into a conflict. To solve conflicts and attain peace, dialogue is integral to any peace building initiatives. Dialogue encompasses contact or interactions, communication, cooperation, and conciliation, which are the main strategies of achieving peace (Myers, 2010, p.483-501).

By encouraging communication between the conflicting parties, people are able to resolve their interpersonal differences. Communication can occur through bargaining, where the parties seek an agreement by engaging in direct negotiations. Mediation is also another way of achieving peace through communication.

In mediation, a third party, who should be bipartisan, facilitates communication between the two groups and suggests recommendations to both parties (Potegal, 1997, p.309). Communication can also be facilitated through arbitration, where a neutral third party imposes a settlement that each party must adhere.

In a case where communication may not be possible like during tense international relations, conciliation is the most appropriate strategy. Under conciliation, each party is required to reciprocate positive initiatives from the rival party, which helps to reduce retaliation that prevents the conflict from escalating. One effective conciliatory strategy is GRIT (Graduated and reciprocated initiatives in tension reduction); the most effective strategy in resolving international conflicts (Myers, 2010, p.503).

Peace can be achieved through cooperation, which is particularly important in reducing hostility between groups. By promoting cooperation in various activities, competition, which is one of the causes of conflicts, is avoided. Contact is another strategy of achieving peace in that, contact through frequent interactions enables both groups to understand each other’s cultures and viewpoints, which in turn promotes dialogue to attain peace.

We will write a custom Essay on How can Peace be Achieved specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In order to achieve peace, it requires all the involved parties to engage in a collective effort towards achieving peace. Prior to engaging in conflict resolution, information about the causes of the conflict and the context of the conflict is important. Given that conflicts generally arise due to pursuit of individual interests, dialogue through cooperation, communication, interaction, and conciliation ensures that the diverse interests of each individual are addressed for a common good.

References Giroux, H. (1993). Living dangerously: Multiculturalism and the Politics of Difference. New York: Peter Lang.

Myers, D. G. (2010) Social Psychology (9th Ed.). New York: McGraw Hill.

Potegal, M. (1997). Appeasement and Reconciliation. Aggressive Behavior, 23, 309-314.

[supanova_question]

Middle East civilization Research Paper college essay help online: college essay help online

Table of Contents Introduction

Clash of civilizations in my opinion

Post Cold War global Politics

Technological conflicts

Conflict of interest

Conclusion

References

Introduction Human history is a history of civilizations. It has been very difficult to ascertain the right kind if civilization that appeals to all people. Ideas and philosophies held by one culture as right may be held differently in another culture. The question of who therefore holds the right kind of civilization has eluded scholar for many centuries. If one says that his or her civilization is good, another one may view it differently. Does this therefore lead to an assertion that civilization clashes shall be the major course of conflicts?

In the struggle to look deeper into the questions asked above, debates emerge due to the presentation of one scholar, Samuel P. Huntington, suggesting that the clash of civilizations is and shall be the major cause of conflicts in communities. If one civilization feels that it is the most superior, does it mean that the value it cherishes is welcome by other nations. If this is the way of conflict resolution, what course does it take and what are the effects in the long term to the subjects that receives it?

In this case, culture may not only be the source clashes that lead to conflicts. This is what comes out when we closely examine the works of Samuel P. Huntington, who presents a thesis that civilization clashes are likely to be the source of conflicts in future. With regard to the September 11 attacks in the USA, were the attacks justified? Did the attack have an implication that those who carried out the attacks were Muslims, therefore painting Islam as an Extremist Religion?

Samuel Huntington presents “the clash of civilizations “by drawing examples from the fall of the Soviet union and generation of the world between 1932 to 1992, which marked the end of the Cold War era. He argues that the end of the Cold war witnessed significant changes in the identities and symbols of identities. This brought what he termed as “configuration “of world politics along cultural lines. He presents his thesis by making a reference to the period A.D 1500 as the era that gave birth to a dual nature of global conflicts (Huntington, S. 1996).

He also argues that ideological and economic factors are not the primary course of clashes in civilizations but global conflicts will occur between nations and groups comprising differences in civilizations (Fiedler, 2009).

He presents a world of global politics dividing the world into Western culture and the none-Western culture. He asserts that the Western world, which is characterized by a Western culture, with democratic and stable governments as opposed to the non- Western cultures which were characterized by undemocratic societies involving poorer Third world Nations.

In addition, he says in his argument that there will a movement away from Westernization by non-western countries due to what he termed as indigenization. The reference to the lack of influence of the twenty-first century Islamic world to the western world is presented in his view as a possible course of an emergent conflict.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More He further counters this through his idea that the strategic location, large populations and/ or endowment of most Middle East countries with oil recourses has become a significant influence in future world affairs. He predicted a new world characterized a movement away from the politics of ethnicity to a new one whose politics are the politics of civilization.

The world that is posed by Samuel is presented as a world whose most dangerous and pervasive conflicts are not the result of differed between social classes but between people belonging to different cultural entities. There is also the mention of lack of escalation of tribal wars to broader interstate wars or to groups with a common and characteristic civilization.

He asserts that the barbaric clashes for instance that occurred in Rwanda and other nations with internal ethnic conflicts are not likely to cause as escalation of this wars to broader wars. He points out the existence of differences in civilizations as a result of philosophical assumptions, important underlying values of a certain civilization, social relations and outlooks in the general to life.

He clearly puts across an existence of changes, which are inevitable, whose impact on global politics having a varying trend from periods to period. He counters this on the basis of his argument that changes in the economics and politics of a civilization are anchored in the diverse culture of the concerned civilization.

On one hand Huntington asserts that culture is not an all unifying or divisive source in conflicts, but it exists as both. He draws an example based on religion that Christianity, which is characteristic of Western world has a great rift with the Muslim and orthodox civilizations. In conclusion, Huntington’s thesis is anchored on differences in civilizations that are more likely to cause inevitable conflicts than economic and ideological differences.

Clash of civilizations in my opinion The idea of clash of civilizations as a likely cause to the conflicts due to culture does not clearly state whether there are other factors that are likely to replace this differences. It is largely agreed by both scholars and students that the history of humanity is a history of civilizations (Huntington, 1996).

The question that we need to address is that should these civilizations, as presented by Huntington, draw world politics to a point of peaceful existence of they should draw them apart.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Middle East civilization specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Huntington implies that there is little interaction between the western culture, characterizing the Western World and the Middle East predominant Islam, characterizing the Middle East culture. In presentation of my thesis about the clash of civilizations, I will give it the following discussion lines: post cold war global politics, technological conflicts and conflict of interest.

Post Cold War global Politics After the collapse of the Soviet Union in 1992, many states which were under the Soviet Union gained independence to form federations (Huntington P S. 1996). This war was never fought by the United States and Russia (formally under USSR). However, there were smaller groups of fighters which were supplied with the weapons to fight against some target governments with promises of independence from their weapon suppliers.

Then came the collapse of the USSR, leading to the expectations from both sides the group being used to fight another state. This was for supremacy of the then two world powers: the US and the USSR. Therefore the people who are currently referred to as terrorists are the people created by these name givers. The point here is the definition of civilization (Perry et al. 2009).

The opposite word to it is barbaric. Therefore, is there are civilization which is barbaric? Uncivilization is characterized by the word “bad.” As a result, is there a civilization that can term as bad when civilization refers to some literacy? If these answers are true, then civilization is bad.

This is the view of Huntington. Just as the Soviet Union Was collapsing, it was struggling to hold on to its power by imparting its ideas through force to its subjects or to where it felt that it should still have a grip. Huntington in his thesis confirms that there is a decline in the power and influence of the western civilization. Realizing this, both the worlds are having a scramble to hold onto or gain power.

Technological conflicts Technological conflicts here shall entirely refer to the use of sensitive technology like atomic energy either for military purposes of industrial growth. To begin with, are some countries, specifically Iran, “an axis of evil” as they are called? Nuclear technology which is used restrictively causes a state that I would call “technological clash “than civilization clash. It is through these lines of thought that the use some technology restrictively shall cause conflicts.

The conflicts in this manner have a broader potential of escalating to large wars as experienced during the recent attack on Iraq with the allegation that it had weapons of mass destruction. It has been along, the search is still continuing, occupation of this Middle East countries is still on but there are Weapons of mass destruction as alleged.

The result to this shall be retaliation from sympathizers sharing the same cultural commonalities and civilization levels. To them that retaliate, they have a justification. If superpower countries join hands to attack a nation for instance Afghanistan, then a group from Afghanistan or Iraq or Iran will definitely retaliate. Some other non-Middle East Islamic Countries have harnessed technology which has long been thought to be sensitive in a very peaceful way.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Middle East civilization by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The difference posed here is that, one nation is using technology by developing weapons of mass destruction while restricting another to do the same. This has a future implication that conflicts in future shall not be due differences in civilization but differences in technological use and harnessing. This will shape the course of global politics in the Middle East region.

As technology grows, states in this region will form alliances against the “oppression”. They will go to the extent of trading skills in technology. This shall result to attacks from superpowers and the allied blocs. The consequence will be that each side shall not have an upper hand in world or global conflicts shall seek an equal proportion.

Lack of agreements shall result to states of tension between the West and its allies, and the Muslim Middle East and its allies as well. The acts of “terrorism” are Just experienced in the Middle East predominated by Muslims is simply a message of “leave us alone”.

Conflict of interest The conflict of interest will dominate the occurrence and solution of conflicts. This will actually have a potential to escalate to wars of greater damage than it has been ever experienced in history. It is evident that there is even today a conflict of interest in the Middle East region involving Western powers and emerging powers like Iran.

Taking the case say the solution of the Israel-Palestine conflict, a country like Iran wants its influence to be felt (Mansbach.

[supanova_question]

Why Developed Countries Should Not Produce Nuclear Power Research Paper cheap essay help

Introduction Nuclear power is often developed from the fission of nuclear elements to generate heat (Howtopowertheworld, 2010, p. 1). Over the years, developed countries have been at the forefront in the development of this source of energy, with current world statistics estimating that, there are about 31 countries which generate nuclear power.

Though nuclear power generation is slowly gaining prominence in the world, especially since the world is seeking more sources of green energy, nuclear energy is a unique source of energy because it bears unique characteristics which distinguish it from other sources of energy. For instance, nuclear energy has been identified to be a dangerous source of energy, especially if an accident happens (Howtopowertheworld, 2010, p. 1). This is the reason why several countries are opposed to its use.

For instance, developed countries such as Australia and Austria are firmly opposed to the development of nuclear energy (Breeze, 2005). The year 2011 saw the worst nuclear disaster in recent time, with radiation fears ripe, at Japan’s Fukushima plant, when the country was hit by a tsunami and earthquake, which affected the nuclear plant. In light of these concerns, several countries are slowly reviewing their nuclear power generation strategies.

This study points out that, developed countries, which have been at the forefront in the generation of nuclear energy, should stop doing so, because the disadvantages of nuclear power generation greatly outweigh their advantages. This fact is supported by research studies suggesting that: nuclear energy has the potential of being used for terrorism; nuclear energy produces dangerous radioactive waste and nuclear energy is highly costly, and in case of a nuclear disaster, the consequences may be very severe.

Radioactivity Radioactivity is the major concern associated with nuclear power generation. In fact, in the recent Fukushima nuclear power generation disaster, residents were advised to vacate surrounding regions (around the nuclear power plant) to reduce the chances of being affected by radioactivity. The danger of radioactivity is severe because it may take tens of thousands of years to reduce radioactive rays to safe levels (Howtopowertheworld, 2010, p. 1).

This fact means that, if a nuclear disaster ever happens, generations of human lives may live with its consequences and this will obviously have an adverse impact on humanity. The effects on humanity can therefore not be underestimated because studies have shown that, nuclear power radioactivity may have severe effects on the human’s reproductive system, and it also has the potential of causing burns, diarrhea, vomiting and other severe health effects.

This is part of the problem associated with nuclear power generation because with radioactivity, it may be very difficult to detect radioactive waves, even after several years (Furry Elephant, 2011). Though radioactive waves produced from nuclear power generation may not be directly absorbed through the human skin, it is highly likely that, human beings may ingest certain radioactive nucleus, in items such as foods, which are contaminated with the substance.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The manner in which radioactivity affects people are numerous and this is why most countries banned the important of food from Japan when it experienced its nuclear disaster. When these radioactive elements are ingested into the human system, it becomes very difficult to control them, let alone get rid of them, because they can possibly affect the human DNA, due to their high ability to ionize.

This may therefore cause cancer, among other detrimental health effects, which also have the ability of causing death. Considering radioactivity has a high potential of affecting all aspects of life, it beats sense, tolerating activities which may possibly lead to the occurrence of such a disaster. If such a disaster strikes, humanity will possibly not be the same and from this understanding, it does not make sense for developed nations to expose humanity to such sort of fatal effects.

Potential Terrorist Applications The immense power nuclear power generation has; makes it a prime tool of terrorism. Nuclear power generation can be used to create nuclear bombs, which are very lethal and can be used to wage terror on a given nation. For instance, there is enough evidence advanced by scientists to suggest that, nuclear power can be used to flatten an entire city, killing millions of people at a go (TMIA, 2011).

Recent times have seen the US claim that, several countries across the globe, such as Iran and Iraq are making nuclear bombs, which may have an effect on world peace. Whether these allegations are true or not is not the subject of this study, but the situation exposes how nuclear power can be used to cause a lot of unrest, and possibly destabilize world peace.

However, recent studies expose a more devastating threat to a country’s peace after it was affirmed that, an attack on a nuclear power plant by terrorists, is also another strategy to wage a nuclear war against a nation (TMIA, 2011). Obviously, the truth behind this assertion stems from the fact that, an attack on a nuclear power plant would amount to an emission of radioactive rays which would affect a nation’s population.

This terrorist strategy is easier than assembling a nuclear bomb or having to deliver a nuclear bomb to a terrorist target. Moreover, this kind of attack is very deadly and its effects on human lives are unimaginable. From this analysis therefore, we see that, if developed nations continue producing nuclear energy and building more nuclear plants, they increase their vulnerability as a target of terrorism, and obviously exposing their citizens to the adverse effects of nuclear power generation.

High Cost of Building Nuclear Facilities and the Small Possibility of Accidents The cost of building new nuclear power plants to generate electricity, or provide alternative sources of energy is staggering and out of reach for many countries.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Why Developed Countries Should Not Produce Nuclear Power specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More With a poorly performing world economy and with increased debt burdens for some major world economies such as America, it makes no sense for developed nations to continue developing nuclear power – channeling a lot of resources to such projects, while other sectors of the socioeconomic aspects of the economy such as health, education and such like factors remain underfunded.

In the US, it is estimated that, the cost of power, generated from nuclear plants is triple that of the normal rates paid for electricity made from other alternative sources of energy such as hydroelectricity (Yanak, 2009, p. 1). It is further estimated that, the cost of paying for nuclear energy is ten times the cost of efficiency derived from such an energy cost.

The high rates to be paid for nuclear energy obviously emanates from the high costs associated with nuclear power generation, and investors or governments need to pass this cost down to the consumers to recover such high costs. This kind of scenario only exposes citizens in developed nations to high costs of energy.

When compared to other alternative energy production methods, nuclear energy stands out as the most expensive energy source ever invented by mankind. The production of nuclear energy therefore not only stands as a matter of critical economic importance, but also a matter of ethical concern, considering a diversion of immense financial resources to energy production, amounts to a deprivation of other socioeconomic duties which governments in developed countries ought to provide.

Conclusion Nuclear power generation in developed countries, though a good idea at face value, is marred with a lot of controversy regarding its safety and impact on human lives.

Though its immense financial costs can be shouldered by several governments in developed countries, it should be understood that, there needs to be a cost-benefit analysis to quantify the cost and possible benefits that come from nuclear power generation. With several more important duties that governments have to perform, it is not ethical to divert a lot of state resources to produce nuclear energy, at the expense of other state priorities.

Regardless of these concerns, nuclear energy has been turned to a political issue, with countries trading accusations and counter-accusations regarding the production of nuclear weapons, because it is known that, nuclear energy can be used to promote acts of terrorism, thereby destabilizing world peace.

The effect of a nuclear terror act is enormous and unimaginable. Radioactivity is also another reason why developed countries should stop producing nuclear energy since they expose their citizens to the risks of radioactivity if a nuclear accident happens.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Why Developed Countries Should Not Produce Nuclear Power by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Collectively, the elements identified in this study expose sever negative effects of nuclear power generation and from the entire analysis, it is impossible for any government to exist if such calamities ever happen to their citizens. To protect citizens from such adverse effects, it is important for developed countries to stop nuclear power generation.

References Breeze, P. (2005). Power Generation Technologies. New York: Newnes.

Furry Elephant. (2011). Why Study Radioactivity? Web.

Howtopowertheworld. (2010). Disadvantages of Nuclear Power. Web.

TMIA. (2011). Nuclear Terrorism. Web.

Yanak, J. (2009). The Staggering Cost of New Nuclear Power. Web.

[supanova_question]

Atlantic Slave Trade: Catalyst of the Industrial Revolution? Research Paper essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu

Table of Contents Introduction

Understanding the Moral Justification behind the Slave Trade

Understanding the British Slave Trade Triangle

British Colonies, Plantations and the Economics of Slave Labor

Who Benefited From the British Slave Trade?

Did the Atlantic Slave Trade Cause the Industrial Revolution?

Conclusion

References

Introduction British involvement in the Atlantic slave trade came as a result of three distinct factors: the expansion of the British Empire into new territories, the need for man power in order to operate newly established colonies and the economics of free labor that came with owning a slave. Basically, the Atlantic slave trade was merely the result of economics at work wherein the demand for labor was supplied with slaves captured from Africa.

If the rapid expansion of the British empire as well as various other continental powers had not occurred during the 16th to the 19th century it is highly plausible to assume that the Atlantic slave trade would not have occurred at all or if it did it would not have reached any considerable size due to lack of demand. What must be understood is that at this particular point in history colonialism and the demand for sugar, tobacco and other agriculturally based products was growing both within the U.K. and the European mainland.

This demand facilitated the need for creating a means of supplying consumers with their desired products at an affordable price. Unfortunately, the only method of feasibly doing so was the expansion of the work force of agriculturally based colonies which could supply the needed agricultural products. In order to resolve this dilemma the British, French and Dutch resorted to utilizing African slave labor in their colonies as an effective means of growing crops without the need for supplying wages.

The end result was a cheap and effective means of growing crops which greatly benefitted both European businesses and their consumers. It must be noted though that as of late there has been a growing assumption that the Atlantic Slave Trade and the various agriculturally based products it provided to Britain and other countries within Europe was one of the primary reasons behind a greatly enriched Britain during the 16th to 19th century (Richardson, 1977).

It is assumed that due to cheaper prices and the amount of economic wealth brought into the country that that slave trade itself was one of the primary catalysts of the industrial revolution since it provided not only cheaper agricultural goods but substantial wealth as well (Richardson, 1977).

This paper posits that while the slave trade and the agricultural production it provided did help enrich Britain during the 16th to 19th century it was not the primary reason behind the start of the British Industrial Revolution but rather was nothing more than a minor part of a greater British economy.

Understanding the Moral Justification behind the Slave Trade While today the concept of slavery is considered to be distinctly immoral the fact remains that many individuals who specifically dealt in the slave trade namely those who captured Africans, shipped them to buying centers, sold them and those who eventually bought them did so under the concept of humanocentric speciesism and as such they saw little moral ambiguity to enslaving another human being for their own purposes.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Humanocentric speciesism is based off two distinct concepts, the first being Humanocentrism which is described as a tendency for human beings to view the natural environment and other species from the standpoint of a distinctly human majority.

Its premise is that anything that is outside the traditional concept of being human is immediately classified as non-human or in extreme cases “alien”. Speciesism on the other hand is based on the belief that the species a particular individual or group belongs to is inherently superior to all other species (Singer, 2009).

One notable historical example of such a belief was the concept of the Übermensch developed by the German philosopher Nietzche in 1883 and taken to its extremes by the Nazi regime. This particular brand of speciesism consisted of considering all other races inferior to Germans as the Übermensch or master race of humanity, a philosophy that helped to contribute to genocide of the Jewish population in Europe.

In the case of the Atlantic slave trade the distinctly white Europeans who primarily dealt with the slaves did not see them as human beings but rather as beings inferior to humans due to the color of their skin as such they were categorized under the same classification as farm animals and treated in the same manner.

In fact the humanocentric speciesism view of humanity has evolved over the years into present day racism wherein anyone not part of a particular group’s race was considered a “non-entity” or someone from “outside” the defined norms of the group (Brennan, 2003). As a result of this particular distinction, native Africans were not afforded the same amount of human dignity given to other ethnicities which made their treatment as slaves justifiable in the eyes of slave traders and colonists.

Understanding the British Slave Trade Triangle The British trade triangle primarily refers to the flow of the trade of goods between Great Britain, Africa, and the slave depots in the New World. Contrary to popular belief slaves themselves were not primarily captured by the British shipping magnates themselves but were actually traded for goods from various African tribes or European slave capturing establishments that had set up shop in Africa (Gray, 1981).

Manufactured goods from Britain such as copper, guns, ammunition and cloth were sent via ships to the ports of the Gulf of Guinea such as Congo, Angola and the African Gold coast whereby they were traded for captured African slaves (McGill, 2009).

We will write a custom Research Paper on Atlantic Slave Trade: Catalyst of the Industrial Revolution? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Theses salves were Africans that were captured in the western and central parts of the African continent and were transported to the various slave ports located along the Gulf of Guinea. It must be noted that this mass exodus of people did not go unnoticed and various tribes did try to rebel however the fact remains that their disorganized nature coupled with the fact that the slave traders were armed with the latest munitions at the time meant that there was little that such a disorganized and technologically inferior resistance could do.

It is estimated that by the end of the slave trade well over 9.4 to 12 million African slaves had been taken from Africa however the problem with these numbers lies with the fact that a large percentage of the slaves did not actually survive the journey and were subsequently thrown overboard in order to prevent the spread of disease (McGill, 2009).

The British were actually not the first civilization to exploit Africa for slaves, as early as the 1400’s and the beginning of the spice trade, various nations such as the Portuguese, Dutch, Spanish and French had actually explored the African continent and set up various ports and colonies in order to exploit the availability of slaves and various African resources (McGill, 2009).

It must be noted though that a system of slavery did exist in the African continent before the start of European exploration however such a system did not primarily rely on the concepts of slaves as a method of forced labor rather such individuals were put in such a capacity in order to pay off debts and were subsequently given their freedom afterward.

Going back to the topic at hand, British involvement in the slave trade actually began in 1562 with the actions of Captain John Hawkins who helped to set the ground work for the British incursion into the slave trade.

Initially the British supplied slaves to various Spanish and Portuguese colonies scattered throughout the American continent however as the British empire expanded and grew more aggressive various areas in the Caribbean and North America were either colonized by the British or fell to the strength of the British army during the numerous wars it fought against the Spanish, Dutch and French (M’Baye, 2006).

As a result of the subsequent British expansion this increased the demand for slave labor as a means of supplying British colonies with the manpower needed in order to continue agricultural operations.

It was this demand that established the second arm of the slave triangle, as manufactured goods in Britain were sent via ships to the Gulf of Guinea the cargo holds of the ships themselves were subsequently loaded with captured slaves to be shipped to slave ports located in either the Caribbean islands, Cuba or ports located in the Americas (M’Baye, 2006).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Atlantic Slave Trade: Catalyst of the Industrial Revolution? by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More It must be noted that these slave ports acted as staging grounds where slaves were bought en masse depending on their perceived quality with strong African males often commanding higher prices than boys, girls or women. After purchase, slaves were then subsequently loaded once more into ships to be offloaded into other ports for distribution into the various colonies.

One of the reasons that slave ports were created in the first place instead of shipping slaves directly to colonies was more due to aesthetics and perception than anything else. Seeing males, females and children brought from the ships chained and shackled to each other and sold on an open block was often viewed negatively by various colonial residents as such slave ports needed to be located in areas where the processes behind slavery were not immediately seen.

It is rather ironic that such practices were abhorred when seen in a colony yet many of those individuals owned slaves themselves. The third side of the slave triangle involved the trade of products such as cotton, sugar, molasses, rum, tobacco, basically any manner of agricultural product for slaves that were brought from Africa (M’Baye, 2006).

These products were then subsequently shipped back to Great Britain completing the trade triangle. The reason why such products are being grown in colonies outside of Europe instead of within Europe itself is based on the fact that it is simply cheaper and easier to grow such crops in colonies rather than in Europe. This is based on the land being much more fertile, having a more constant temperature and the fact that slaves can be easily brought in to grow crops.

British Colonies, Plantations and the Economics of Slave Labor As it was mentioned earlier, as the British Empire expanded so did the number of its colonies which produced primarily agricultural goods to be shipped back to Great Britain. The inherent problem with this scenario lies with the fact that agricultural operations require extensive amounts of manpower in order to properly grow crops which unfortunately the various colonies lacked.

It must be noted that the colonies themselves were often times funded through private investors who expected a return on their investments via produced crops, with a distinct lack of manpower these colonies needed to utilize an immediate source of labor otherwise they would be unable to meet the expectations of investors and would lose their sources of funding and resources (Sweet, 2009).

While initial attempts to use the natives of various areas succeeded the practice eventually wiped out the native populations as a result of both overwork and European diseases that the immune system of native population could not properly handle. This created a demand for a more robust form of slave that would not tire or get sick easily, Africa proved itself as a viable source of slave labor for these colonies and as a result the practice of slave labor began.

The various plantations in North and South America primarily relied on slave labor as a form of manpower in order to produce products such as sugar, tobacco, and coffee which were then subsequently shipped of to Great Britain (Sweet, 2009). McGil notes, in his examination of the Atlantic Slave Trade, that “of all the products produced sugar, which was the most labor intensive crop, was also the most heavily consumed by the British population” (McGil, 2009).

McGil further states that “it was actually estimated that one out of every twenty pounds that was circulating in the British economy during the 1700’s was a direct result of the slave trade and West Indian plantations that produced the much desired West Indian sugar” (McGil, 2009). It is due to this that it can be assumed that one of the driving factors behind the continued use of the slave trade was the overwhelming demand of the British for cheap sugar exports.

The economics of the slave trade focuses around the perceived cost of production without slaves and the actual cost of production with slaves. The fact is most forms of labor have an equivalent cost in the salaries and benefits accorded to the people working at a particular form of business, for the agricultural industry the perceived cost of operations without slaves would increase exponentially if they were to hire their own fellow citizens to work in the fields thus increasing the overall cost of the finished product.

On the other hand the actual cost of a product with slaves is exponentially lower since slaves are not paid wages and the cost required for keeping them sheltered and fed is much lower as compared to hiring the same amount of people to do the same type of work (Sweet, 2009).

Plantations that did not use slaves could not compete with the prices of those that did, as a result of basic economics plantations simply chose to employ slave labor because of their inherent cost saving measures. This in turn benefits British consumers since prices of product that is in demand continues to remain low. If the various British colonial plantations had stopped using slave labor British consumers would merely turn to other producers that are able to provide cheap sugar using slave labor such as the French.

Who Benefited From the British Slave Trade? In terms of profitability the slave trade resulted in considerable profits for various sectors in the British economy which contributed immensely towards its continued use for up to four centuries. British slave ship owners often reached profit margins exceeding 20 to 50% on most trips due to the amounts made from the sale of goods traded for slaves (Soodalter, 2011).

Plantation owners, as a result of the free labor from slaves, were able to make vast sums of money from their plantation operations and often times reinvested the money towards establishing businesses in London’s growing industrial revolution (Sweet, 2009).

The various colonies that relied on slave labor became markets for factory owners in Great Britain with various textiles and manufactured goods being sold to not only slave colonies in the New World but also to various African ports due to their subsequent relations with slave traders.

The banks in London were able to gain large profits through fees and interest rates added on to loans merchants used to finance slave ship enterprises, often times such loans were considered safe for banks due to the sheer profitability that the slave industry provided.

Overall the sale of agricultural goods in Britain that came as a result of free labor in colonies through the purchase of slaves actually made the price of basic commodities far cheaper than what they should have been. This of course directly benefited the consumers in Great Britain and contributed to the expansion of their consumerist society.

Did the Atlantic Slave Trade Cause the Industrial Revolution? Richardson notes that “in terms of its overall impact the slave trade and the various West Indian plantations had on the British economy, they only accounted for 5% of the total national income Great Britain accumulated during the time of the Industrial Revolution” (Richardson, 1977).

As such to assume that the slave trade directly contributed to the start of the Industrial Revolution is actually erroneous despite various claims that it did. While it is true that it contributed to the financing of the Industrial Revolution in no way was it actually the reason behind the start of the Revolution itself.

Socio-political factors as well as the expansion of the British economy through subsequent imperial expansion were actually the primary reasons behind the Industrial Revolution. Various proponents over the years have claimed that towards the end the slave industry actually lost its profitability and that was one of the main reasons behind its cessation.

This paper refutes that idea; free labor is and always shall be a method of creating large amounts of profit and as such from start to finish the slave trade itself was profitable. It was only due to the development of a distinct social consciousness for the plight of the African people that slavery truly came to an end, not as result of economic considerations but rather the development of empathy from the human spirit (Muhammad, 2004).

Conclusion Based on what has been presented in this paper it can be seen that while the slave trade greatly enriched Britain during the 16th to 19th century it cannot be considered as the primary catalyst of the industrial revolution. While it may be true that it provided substantial agricultural goods and labor to the British economy the fact remains that overall the slave trade and the produced agricultural products only accounted for 5% of the total British economy.

While this may be considered substantial in terms of wealth created there are actually few connections that can be feasibly created between the small amount of wealth created by the slave trade and agricultural production with the start of revolution. It can be considered though that the slave trade could have acted as secondary financial catalyst since it provided wealth to certain sectors of the British economy which did eventually facilitate the start of the Industrial Revolution.

Furthermore, various historians also agree that the primary catalysts behind the industrial revolution was Britain’s subsequent imperial expansion and various socio-economic factors such as increases in the local population, greater concentrations of individuals within certain areas and the development of new forms of technology.

While it may be true that from a historical perspective the slave trade was one of the reasons behind the proliferation of the African race and culture the fact remains that in terms of its overall economic impact and as a means of facilitating the industrial revolution which gave birth to the modern day industrial culture that is present today, it is highly infeasible to suggest that the slave trade played any major role based on the facts that have been presented.

References Brennan, A. (2003). “Humanism, Racism, and Speciesism.”Worldviews:Environment Culture Religion 7.3, 274-302. EBSCO. Web.

Gray, R. (1981). THE VATICAN AND THE ATLANTIC SLAVE TRADE. History Today, 31(3), 37. Retrieved from EBSCOhost.

M’baye, B (2006). The Economic, Political, and Social Impact of the Atlantic Slave Trade on Africa. European Legacy, 11, 6, p. 607, EBSCOhost.

McGill, S. (2009). Atlantic Slave Trade. Atlantic Slave Trade, p. 1, EBSCOhost.Singer, Peter. “SPECIESISM AND MORAL STATUS.”

Metaphilosophy 40.3/4 (2009): 567-581. EBSCO. Web.

Muhammad, P. M. (2004). THE TRANS-ATLANTIC SLAVE TRADE: A FORGOTTEN CRIME AGAINST HUMANITY AS DEFINED BY INTERNATIONAL LAW.

American University International Law Review, 19(4), 883-947. Retrieved from EBSCOhost.

Richardson, D. (1977). Black Slaves in Britain. The Problem of Slavery in the Age of

Revolution. The Atlantic Slave Trade

[supanova_question]

Supply and Demand: The Case of Milk Essay college essay help online: college essay help online

Milk prices are soaring. Millions of consumers all over the world buy milk products on a daily basis and are not willing to give them up. Climate change, competition among biofuel producers, trade policies and other factors drive global milk prices and turn milk into one of the most expensive food products (Arnold, 2007). “Cows are fed with corn and as more corn is diverted to energy production, feed costs and dairy farmers in turn pass those costs up the food chain” (Doherty, 2007).

Simultaneously, international milk producers fail to cope with the growing demand for milk. The demand for milk products is at all-time high (Arnold, 2007). The roaring global economy and rising incomes in India, China, and Latin America make the task of producing enough milk extremely challenging and virtually unachievable (Arnold, 2007).

Milk products are similar to gasoline: consumers cannot give them up even when the price grows unbearable (Doherty, 2007). Financial experts predict that, as the price of milk increases, the demand for milk products is likely to remain unchanged (Doherty, 2007).

Apparently, the elasticity of demand for milk and milk products is extremely low. Put simply, the global demand for milk and milk products is not responsive to changes in milk prices. It should be noted, that elasticity is the central measure of market responsiveness in microeconomics (Baumol

[supanova_question]

The Bioecological Model of Human Development Research Paper writing essay help

Introduction The human development refers to the process of becoming mature physically, psychologically, and socially. The development in a child occurs in relation to the interaction that the child has with the immediate environmental factors. The biological, social, or psychological context in which a child grows is referred to as human ecology (Berns, 2009, p.5).

The setting under which a child is brought up will greatly affect his development. The family and the home setting of a given child becomes the most fundamental factor that influences much of the development. Much of the child’s time during the early stages of development is spent with the family members. As the child grows and relates with other individuals outside their nuclear family, the kind of interaction so developed will also affect his development.

The extended family is the next immediate factor that will influence the development of the child. The child grows up and attends childcare and educational centers. He will be visiting healthcare centers and different other learning facilities in the neighborhood. He then meets children from within the community in different sites like a community playground. The child now interacts with a wider group of individuals from the society.

Other factors may not be in the immediate surrounding of the child but will influence his development. Various legal provisions and the condition of the parents’ workplace may have influence on a child’s development. Such external factors have often been neglected by various researchers and scholars. However, they influence the meaning that an individual makes out of the immediate settings and influence his behavior and development (Bronfenbrenner, 1979, p.18).

Thesis statement

The human development does not occur in isolation. The interaction between the various environmental factors like the family of an individual, their home, the school he attends, the community, and the society have significant impacts on the human development in children.

The systems of Bioecological Model of Human Development The Bioecological model of human development consists of four basic systems that define different levels of settings affecting the development of a child. These are Microsystems, Mesosystems, Exosystem, and Macrosystem. Different interactions and relationships occur between these structures and affect the development of a child (Berns, 2009, p.18).

Microsystems Microsystem is the fundamental structure of the Bioecological model of the human development. It encompasses the relationships and activities that are carried out in an individual’s immediate setting like the family, school, the community as well as the peer group (Berns, 2009, p.19).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The family is the first setting that a child encounters in a normal societal setup and is a major component of the Microsystem for a developing child (Lerner, 2002, p.41). The parents are supposed to take care of the child and provide the required parental love to ensure proper emotional development.

The family background (parents’ education, family size, the availability of the learning materials and other facilities at home) will affect the child’s transition into the next setting and his activities and behavior in the settings. Researches have shown that the home background of a child will greatly determine the performance of the child at school.

This was observed to be more influential, in several cases, than all the aspects related to the learning institution (Bronfenbrenner, 2005, p.203). The failure of a family to carry out its responsibility in nurturing a child will disadvantage the child at later ages and allow for other factors that impede development. The family background will determine how the other aspects of the Microsystems affect the child.

The aspects related to the school attended by a child have also been observed to have impacts on the performance of the child and the general development of the child. However, the factors that many individuals would consider more influential have been found to be less significant. The students’ population in a class, the number of learning materials available in the school, and the ability of the students to work in groups has been found to be less significant to the student’s performance (Bronfenbrenner, 2005, p.204).

The teachers’ competence in handling specific subject areas was observed to contribute significantly to the child’s performance. Such a teacher will be a role model to the children. The most influential aspect of the learning institution was found to be the characteristic behaviors of the other children in the learning institution. The family background of the other children would influence the performance of a child from a lower-class family.

A child from a middle or high-class family would, however, not be influenced negatively by the children from the poor families (Bronfenbrenner, 2005, p.204). In this context, it is evident that the peer group influence that a child may experience can have positive or negative impacts on the development of the child depending on the environment for interaction created by the individual’s seniors in the immediate setting.

Community in which a child is brought up is another immediate setting that influences the behavior of the child, his perception of life, and the general development. The activities that are carried out in the immediate neighborhood, the communal facilities that the child can access, and the cultural composition of the community affect the child’s ability to socialize (Berns, 2009, p.20).

We will write a custom Research Paper on The Bioecological Model of Human Development specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More A child will interact with the others in the community playground. A child who visits a word workshop may identify his interest and ability in carpentry that can be of economic significance to his life. The activities in the community that brings the children together help model the children into full human.

The joint participation of two or more individuals in a given activity will affect the relationship that is developed among the individuals. Those who work jointly in some activity will develop empathetic and enduring feelings for one another. The individuals tend to consider the problems of every other member as a common problem.

Media was not considered among the Microsystems that influence human development due to the non-interactive nature of the earlier forms. The modern media technology is interactive and influences a child’s development depending on the relative exposure to, and the contents of, the materials in the media.

Mesosystems Mesosystems refer to the interactions and relationships that occur between the different aspects of the Microsystems of a developing individual (Bomstein

[supanova_question]

Decline of Polar Bears Research Paper college essay help near me: college essay help near me

An examination of the literature involving the dynamics between polar bear extinction and environmental changes reveal that there are actually 3 reasons behind their current declining populations, namely: human-polar bear interactions, food availability and competition as well as rising air temperatures and climate variability in the their natural environment (Dyck et al., 2007).

What must be understood is that certain changes in natural environments have an adverse affect on creatures living in them, while it may be true that animals do have the ability to adapt to gradual changes over a period of time the sudden changes that are affecting the natural habitats of polar bears were too fast, too sudden and as a result the species was unable to adequately adapt resulting in their declining numbers.

Various studies cataloging the population development of polar bears have stated that one of the main proponents of their decline is the sudden temperature change brought about by global warming, which has in effect caused glacial melting (O’Neill et al., 2008).

It must be noted that the natural environment of polar bears are the frozen vistas and tundra of the arctic, which undergo a periodic freeze and thaw cycle which affects not only the shape of the surrounding landscape but also the surrounding biodiversity (Dyck et al., 2007).

Earlier thaw cycles due to increased temperatures have resulted in arctic ice breaking up more so than usual, which affects the ability of polar bears to effectively hunt prey such as seals and other species. Over the past several years, it has been noted that there has been an increase in the number of polar bears found drowned at sea as a result of melting sea ice wherein the bears literally drown due to exhaustion after trying to find a livable plateau of ice that contains prey.

This lack of food availability in certain areas of the Arctic has in effect caused greater competition among different polar bear groups within certain areas. For example, polar bear populations seen in western and southern Hudson Bay that normally have limited contact with each other have now begun a great deal of competition for food and space.

As noted by various studies involving biological science, this in effect causes an evolutionary response wherein the distinct lack of food resources and an increase in competition causes population numbers to decline especially in the case of the western Hudson Bay group who are distinctly smaller and less robust compared to those in the southern half of Hudson Bay.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This particular problem is further exacerbated by the fact that the local Inuit tribes in the Arctic often hunt polar bears as part of their native traditions. In fact, in previous years guided polar bear hunts were often performed resulting in considerable reductions to the polar bear population.

In fact, human forays into the Arctic in the form of various fishing vessels, commercial ventures and basic human expansion have considerably depleted both the food supply and living space of polar bears, which increases the decline of the species. It must be noted though that the research articles utilized in this examination of the decline of the polar bears emphasize that the decline of the species should not be entirely blamed on climate change, but rather other factors should be taken into account as well (O’Neill et al., 2008).

The research asks the question of whether global warming is directly responsible for their decline and answers it by stating that while global warming is a factor it is not the main cause rather it is a combination of factors such as increased competition, human interference in their natural habitat, evolutionary response mechanisms and climate change that when combined are the reason behind the polar bear’s near-extinction levels in population.

On the other hand, it must be noted that a large percentage of the blame can go to human interference in the planet’s natural environment, which caused these problems to occur in the first place.

Reference List Dyck, M. et al. (2007). Polar bears of western Hudson Bay and climate change: are warming spring air temperatures the “ultimate” survival control factor?. Ecological Complexity, 4, 73 – 84.

O’Neill, S. J., Osborn, T. J., Hulme, M., Lorenzoni, I.,

[supanova_question]

Decision to get MBA Essay essay help

Introduction The demand of MBA course has continued to increase in the modern world as many people aspire to upgrade their education to enable them to realize more career growth. Many institutions of higher learning are offering variety of programs to allow MBA students choose the most appropriate program.

The course is offered as a full time course or part time course by either attending classes or enrolling for the online program. Many people see it appropriate to enroll for MBA while others object this enrolment for various reasons. This paper will raise and counter objections against those who are not for the idea of getting MBA.

Counter arguments Flexibility

One of the main advantages of MBA course is that it is offered with a lot of flexibility that suits all types of students. Though critics argue that the flexibility of the course may compromise the standards of training, students can learn through part time and online programs and yet get the necessary training.

Many institutions of higher learning have come up with adequate syllabuses to ensure students have thoroughly covered all the required work though they are attending classes in the evening or through online programs. Many institutions of higher learning ensure that students are fully trained through evening classes and attending classes on the weekends to make sure all the course work is adequately covered just like other students who enroll in full time programs.

Management skills

Secondly, MBA is a professional program that equips students with skills for administration and management. Though some people argue that many students who enroll in the MBA program are not necessarily after management skills but promotion and salary increase, students who adequately undertake the program acquire some knowledge and skills that make them better managers and administrators.

As Rubin and Dierdorff (2009) claim, MBA course is not ‘out of touch’ to the real issues in the organization as some scholars argue (p.208). Many people enroll for the MBA program after working for sometime with at least two years working experience. Enrolling in this program helps such experienced people to acquire leadership and management skills that prepare them to take management roles in the organization.

Most of the subjects taught in the MBA program deal with decision-making process in the organization coupled with insights on how to manage the resources of the organization to maximize its profitability. This inclusion makes students better managers in the organization where many of them are promoted after completing the course.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Improved performance

Thirdly, the critiques of MBA argue that the program is too expensive for company in many ways; for instance, employees will need working time to attend their classes, others may take a leave and in some companies, those employees who enroll in the program are sponsored by the organization.

It is true that the program may be costly to the company but the benefits that the company derives from the MBA graduates outweigh the costs by a significant margin. Going through MBA program gives employees more confidence in their work that enables them to improve their output.

The course helps students to develop their personality as they handle rigorous projects, learn to work with others through discussions and presentations, and internship that equip them to handle challenging situations in the work place. Moreover, students in this course learn some theories that are related with what they do in the work place.

This makes them to understand their work more and such learning elements improve their confidence in their job thus becoming better employees. Increased productivity of employees translates to increased performance of the whole organization.

According to one survey carried by one company in Japan in 2006, the returns of the employees who had gone through MBA program was higher than that of degree graduates (Shimizu

[supanova_question]

Tattoos and shaping of desirable body Essay argumentative essay help

Introduction In the ancient period people adopted many cultural practices and the use of tattoos was one of them. Tattoos served different purposes in various societies. For instance, in ancient Egypt, people used tattoos as part of body decorations. In some societies, people used them to identify a group of individuals.

Around 2000 B.C, the Chinese also started using them for the purpose of identifying notorious offenders in their society. In Japan, members of criminal gangs could also use them to identify their colleagues in the gangs. In addition to these, soldiers in England also used tattoos for identification.

The word ‘tattoo’ seems to be fairly modern. “The word was derived from the Polynesian or Samoan root word tatu, a verb meaning to strike” (Gilbert 23). This word first featured in 1796 in the diary of a prominent captain in Britain called James Cook. “A tattoo is a marking made by inserting indelible ink into the dermis layer of the skin to change the pigment” (Rainer 34).

In some cases, tattoo means a military operation, and it can also refer to continuous drumming. In England, the use of tattoos became prominent in the Victorian era. The tattoo machine also originated During the Victorian period.

During that era, many explorers were fascinated by the communities that used tattoos, and they always took some individuals who had tattoos for exhibitions. This paper seeks to analyze how tattoos were used in the Victorian era, and how they also affected other social values. The above highlighted uses of tattoos will also be examined in detail.

Cultural context of Tattooing A study of tattoo origin and how people perceived it in different cultures is invaluable. This is because it facilitates the understanding of its social impacts to the societies that practiced it. Tattoo practices advanced in the following regions as follows.

Tattooing in Europe

There is scarce evidence about tattooing practices that were conducted in ancient Europe, especially before the introduction of the art of writing. “Tattoos do not lend themselves very well to preservation in the material record” (Allen 123). However, archaeological evidence normally depicts the practice of tattooing among the European tribes. For example, ancient equipment for tattooing was located in France.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Other artifacts linked to tattooing were also discovered in sites located in Europe. Those artifacts included tools, ochre lamps, pencils, and also borne implements that were probably used as body piercing objects. These artifacts are intriguing and they were identified as one of the tattooing objects. Nonetheless, a comprehensive ruling about the use of those tools cannot be reached because nobody is sure of their specific uses. This is because ancient human skins that were decorated using tattoos cannot be found.

Prehistoric individuals who had marks on their bodies and foreheads can actually embody the use of tattoos. For instance the body of Ortzi that was found close to the Austro Italian border provides concrete evidence of primordial tattooing in Europe.

He had tattoos inform of small crosses which were inscribed on his left knee. He also has some blotches on his ankle. Anthropologists that examined Ortzi’s skin contended that the tattoos on his body were probably due to the incisions that doctors made on his skin in the process of treating him.

Greek sources indicate that eastern European tribes tattooed themselves. According to archaeological evidence, tattoos signified high status in society, and they could only be used by influential individuals. These cultures developed a long with horse riding activities that enabled them to have more advantages in military expeditions. In 1993, a discovery of mummified bodies was made in burial mounds situated on Altai Mountains that are found in Siberia.

Two bodies of those bodies had beautiful tattoos. The tattoos were spread on their bodies especially on their arms, shoulders, and legs. The tattoos looked sophisticated and they could much the current qualities. The tattoos represented some creatures like tigers, snakes and fish. Skin pricking techniques were applied in making those tattoos. This technique was not similar to the Siberian sewing-in technique.

In Asia, tattoos had magical connotations. For instance, they offered protection, and they also determined success in hunting and fishing activities. Herodotus noted that the Scythians used tattoos as part of their body art, and he also believed that their contact with other cultures enabled them to adopt this practice.

Athenaeus traced the origin of tattooing among the Thracians. For example, a Thracian vase that was found in fifth century had tattoos inscribed on it. “He wrote that the Scythians invaded Thrace and humiliated local women by marking their bodies with blue dots” (Rainer 56). The women who had marks on their bodies could then use decorative designs to conceal their marks.

We will write a custom Essay on Tattoos and shaping of desirable body specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More When the Romans and Greeks dominated Europe, decorative tattooing was regarded as barbaric. This believe gradually disappeared and the uses of tattoos also changed. Criminals and slaves had their bodies marked as part of the punitive measures that they were given. This act made people to detest tattooing practices that were conducted by Romans and Greeks. Moreover, military and devotional tattoos, together with tattoo removal began among Romans and Greeks.

The Persians introduced punitive tattooing among the Greeks. The Greeks used tattoos to identify their slaves and prisoners by fixing tattoos on their foreheads. Romans also used tattoos for control measures. For instance,” gladiators, slaves, and offenders, could be distinguished using certain tattoos” (Rainer 67). Offenders with tattoos often felt so much humiliated and this deterred others from engaging in vices.

Tattooing of soldiers also assisted in classifying soldiers from different territories, and it also bonded soldiers in various units. Apart from punitive functions, tattoos were used in religious cults that preceded Christianity. Members of those cults were tattooed to signify their allegiance to fertility goddess.

Pilgrim tattoos also became popular in the middle ages, and it was part of the devotional tattoos. People who went to holy places received ritual tattoos, to indicate their completion of pilgrimage. For example, William Lithgow had pilgrimage tattoos. Tattoos also remained in use even in the medieval period in Europe. Tattooing later spread to other territories like America, and this process was facilitated by explorers and monks who often travelled.

Tattooing in Asia

Chinese and Japanese tattoos have significantly contributed to the current tattooing culture. The first account of tattooing in Asia occurred around 200 B.C. The Yue individuals practiced tattooing for protection against monsters and dragons. “Tattoos were also common among Chinese slaves, criminals, prostitutes, servants, concubines, and soldiers”. Tattoos served both punitive and identification functions.

For instance, the Chinese could cut unfaithful concubine’s eyebrow and then fill it with some pigment as a ways of punishment. Unfaithful husbands were given forehead tattoos. On the hand, convicted criminals had ear tag tattoos. Individuals who were tattooed for wrong reasons faced myriad consequences in the society.

For example, people could ignore and isolate them. Tattooing was also used to compel soldiers to remain in service. This is because they could still be identified even if they deserted the army. After sometime, the stigma associated with tattoos faded and the affluent individuals also started using them. In the nineteenth century, there was a rise in demand for tattoos in Asia. This saw the emergence of tattooists. The tattoos were inscribed using different colors and designs.

Tattooing in Pacific

Many societies have been practicing tattooing but only for specific purposes. However, in the Pacific region tattooing is part of the cultural heritage. Tattooing in Pacific Islands was borrowed from Asia. Tattooing symbolized ones status, and it was also used during mourning. Initiated boys also used tattoos to symbolize the change of their status.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Tattoos and shaping of desirable body by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Tattooing among boys was also meant to test the confidence among initiates. This is because the process of inscribing the tattoos was painful and this could prepare them for challenges they would face as adults. The tattoo designs in this region were mainly geometric. Lines, checkers, spirals, and solid colors formed the tattoo design.

The tattoo designs in this place were fascinating because they were beautifully designed. Hence, they were fascinating to the explorers. Some of explorers tattooed their bodies, and they took that practice to Europe. Tattooing was practiced by soldiers, sailors, and the prosperous individuals also embraced them. The missionary influence, however, led to the decline of this practice. They were out to get rid of unacceptable customs and practices. A part from tattooing, cannibalism, and human sacrifice were also eradicated.

Victorian Society and Tattoos The Victorian era refers to the reign of Queen Victoria in England. She ruled the kingdom between 1837 to 1901.The Victorian era came after the Edwardian reign. This Victorian era had a remarkable stability, and there was also a great economic development. The Victorian morality was different from that of the Georgian era. “The Victorian morality can describe any set of values that espouse sexual restraint, low tolerance of crime, and a strict social code of conduct” (Caplan 156).

Most of these values were adopted in other places. The Victorian morality, were reflected in all aspects of life. For example, religious values were highly respected. This is because the church was one of the most powerful institutions. The Anglican Church controlled many schools and other government departments. The church also expected people to be submissive, and obedient. These values brought fundamental changes in England.

Tattooing was also conducted during the Victorian era. In this case, tattooing business was conducted just like other commercial activities. For example, adults who wanted tattoos could have them fixed to their bodies at a certain fee. This kind of exchange resembled other commodity exchanges.

James Bradley, who studied the Victorian era, noted that tattooing was a significant practice during that time. People perceived tattooing as an emotive and intimate act. The tattooing practices in the Victorian era mainly originated from the colonial period. Japanese tattooing also had an influence on the Victorian era tattooing. The type and size of a tattoo that a person inscribed indicated his economic background.

For example, the affluent could inscribe big tattoos, while the less privileged had small and poorly designed tattoos. “There was nothing trivial about this form of tattooing, for it indicated the depth to which economic relations infiltrated the tissues of the body” (DeMello 267). Apart from monetary attachment, a tattoo signified ones ability to endure pain. Heavily tattooed individuals had to be ready for criticisms because they could be negatively perceived by others.

Therefore, the tattoo was treated as a product, and it had various meanings to individuals who used it. A given tattoo design did not have a specific meaning to people. This is because people used and constructed their own meanings to them. A tattoo could mean varied things depending on the cultural context that an individual used it. Individuals from one cultural background had the same understanding of a given tattoo.

For instance, in the nineteenth century, if a person engraved an anchor tattoo, it showed that he was a fisherman or a sailor. In the Victorian England, many people including the aristocrats practiced tattooing. For example, Prince of Wales visited Jerusalem, and he got a tattoo design that resembled Jerusalem cross.

During the Victorian era, many tattoo artists exited, but the aristocrats hired popular Japanese tattooists to engrave for them tattoos. They used Japanese tattoos simply because they were more refined, and unique compared to the indigenous ones that were widely used by the people in low classes.

Some affluent individuals could even visit Japan to have their bodies tattooed by highly qualified tattooist. “A few years after the opening of Japan in 1853, intricate and beautifully stylized tattoos became all the rage among the elites in Europe, a fad that lasted from 1880 to 1920” (Sanders 134 ).

Therefore, Japanese tattoos were introduced in England and they became fashionable. For example, “in 1882, Edward’s sons, the Duke of Clarence and the Duke of York were tattooed by the Japanese tattooist Hoti Chiyo, and George V also received a tattoo of a dragon on his arm” (Rush 456).

However, the British princess never displayed their tattoos in public. Many sources that describe nineteenth century events indicate that tattooing was commonly practiced by seamen, and also by soldiers. Van Dinter noted that soldiers and sailors incorporated new ideas into European tattooing by adding non western symbols and ideas to it.

One fascinating thing about the culture of tattooing is that the middle class influenced the high class to adopt it as one of the fashions of that time. This was quite peculiar because fashion trends normally begin with elites, and then descend to the peasants. In 1846, tattoo shop was opened for the first time in New York, and it mainly served soldiers who wanted tattoos.

Prior to the introduction of tattoo equipment, tattooing posed many health risks. For example, bleeding, and swelling could sometimes occur due to the use traditional tattooing techniques. This led to restrictions on tattooing and some taboos were also created to reduce tattooing activities. For example, women were not allowed to eat oily food staffs after tattooing their lips, and they were also advised against touching the tattooed parts.

Rituals and customs associated with tattooing always varied among the communities, but they all aimed at making the process safe. In 1891, Samuel Reilly developed electric tattooing equipment. This machine transformed the practices of tattooing so much. This is because it made the process of tattooing less painful and dangerous. Many people could also easily access tattooing services. Moreover, the new technique did not involve skin penetration. Hence, infections associated with tattooing reduced.

Apart from serving other purposes, tattoos also provided aesthetic qualities especially to those who were keen on enhancing their beauty. Therefore, ugly tattoos were hated because they would interfere with ones beauty. Beautiful tattoos were mostly applied by young women who wanted feminine images that could attract men. On the other hand, men wore masculine tattoos as a way of enticing women. The aesthetic value associated with wearing tattoos made them popular during the Victorian era.

Among the gangs, tattoos symbolized long term commitment and membership. Some tattoos could also convey some information among criminal gangs. “For example, a giant swastika on the forehead included the wearer in a neo Nazi-gang, but also excluded him from regular society” (Caplan 345).

It also indicated ones defiance to the established social norms. The Victorian authorities in some cases administered punishments to criminals by branding them using specific types of tattoos that could be fixed strategically on their bodies. Hence, they could be easily monitored by everybody.

While some people really liked tattooing, others who were unwillingly tattooed really detested the act. For example, John Rutherford narrated his nasty experience of how he was captured and forcefully tattooed on his forehead. Besides this, tattooing also received criticism from leading figures, who often linked it to prostitution, urban life, and criminals.

Conclusion The nature of tattoos can sometimes make them appear superficial. However, when tattoos are keenly observed they look more sophisticated. “It is not only on the skin, but also embedded in the living skin, making it unique among all art forms” (Gilbert 178). Tattoos convey various meanings and identities.

Tattoos had profound impacts on the European culture that stretched beyond a fad among young people. Tattoos served punitive, aesthetic, religious, and administrative functions. Tattooing is among the ancient practices that have managed to survive at present.

Technology and society have refined tattooing practices. “However, the uniqueness of a tattoo as an art form and the layers of meaning that can be taken or imposed upon it have contributed to its continued survival from prehistoric times to present” (Sanders 135). The manner in which people practice tattooing is quite distinct from how it was done in the past, however, common themes remain.

People are getting more captivated by tattoos, and its acknowledgment is also on the rise. “It is hard to predict the future of tattooing culture, but it will surely continue to be a part of the human experience as it has for millennia” (Rainer 198).

Modern tattooing evolved in the1960s, when tattooing as part of body art now became recognized as part of skin art. Tattooing has gained much prominence today especially in Europe and America. This practice is sometimes called tattoo renaissance.

At present, one can easily find a tattoo shop in any neighbor hood in Europe, and its use is quite prevalent among the youth in urban areas. This cultural explosion of tattooing has sparked both scholarly and popular interests. For instance, many people and scholars have written quite a lot of literature on this issue.

Works Cited Allen, Tricia. The Polynesian Tattoo. London: Mutual Publishing Company, 2010.

Caplan, Jane. Written on the Body: The Tattoo in European and American History. New York: Princeton University Press, 2000.

DeMello, Margo. Bodies of Inscription: A Cultural History of the Modern Tattoo Community. London: Wiley, 2000.

Gilbert, Steve. The Tattoo History. New York: Juno Books, 2000.

Rainer, Chris. Ancient Marks: The Sacred Origins of Tattoos and Body Marking. New York: Earth Aware Editions, 2006.

Rush, John. Spiritual Tattoo: A Cultural History of Tattooing, Piercing, Scarification, Branding, and Implants. Hoston: Frog Books, 2001.

Sanders, Clinton. Customizing the Body: The Art and Culture of Tattooing. New York: Oxford University Press, 2003.

[supanova_question]

Roles of International Financial Institutions Essay college admissions essay help: college admissions essay help

Global financing is a system that involves financial institutions that work internationally or around the world. Such institutions include the International Monetary Fund (IMF) and World Bank. These institutions are global banks that give funds to countries with financial constraints as well as giving economic advice. This paper focuses on the roles of international financial Institutions.

According to Chossudoysky (2003), some of the financial institutions like the World Bank and IMF were formed in the last periods of World War II. Woods Bretton initiated both financial institutions, and their roles keep changing because of technology and political progress.

Their traditional role was to standardize currency exchange rates and monitor international trade in its members and lend money to countries which experienced financial crises. World Bank greatly assisted European countries, especially after the World War II to rebuild their countries.

The World Bank later made plans to support third world countries, particularly those that are in Africa. This has made global economy undergo a change in International Financial Institutions (IFIs) because foreign trade and capital are the cause of the economic development.

Today, global financial institutions are guided by international laws since they control many countries. These international laws were put in place due to many conflicts such as political crisis, which hinder the financial institutions from being operational in some countries.

The law ensures that the member countries are able to pay their contribution without any crisis. The IMF and the World Bank are regulated by the United Nations because they are its agencies. The United Security Council controls the two financial institutions and makes sure that it supports its member countries (Hill, 2009).

The global financial institutions such as the World Bank have long-term goals like development. It also upholds international financial cooperation while promoting global trade and making sure that the exchange rate in all the involved countries are stable. These financial institutions like the IMF get their resources from the quota system where the member countries give contributions, especially when there are new members subscribing.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The IMF also gets its funding from the gold holdings. It is the third largest institutions that have many tons of gold. Goldman (2005) asserts that borrowing is also another way that the global institutions use to get funds; they borrow from their members whose economic status is high. An interest charge from the countries which borrows loans is also of great help to the global financial institutions.

Hill (2009) argues that the main roles of these financial institutions is surveillance, where they monitor the financial status of the member countries and how its fairing globally. It also advices and gives loans to those countries whose economic status are deteriorating and also monitor the economic status while designing economic policies.

When the member countries are under financial trouble, they are protected by these institutions without considering whether the country is rich, poor, or in middle level status. They give technical assistance to low level countries and train them on how to advance or improve their profit institutions while also helping them to plan on both financial and macroeconomic strategies.

Additionally, the global financial institutions lends loans to countries that are unable to pay international debts by helping them to restore their economic status while ensuring that their currencies are stable and also pays for their imports so that they can continue trading with other countries and alleviate poverty.

Apart from giving finances to member countries, World Bank has financed projects, which includes irrigation such as North Africa and klalis project in Iraq. It has been viewed as a bank that transfers money from well able countries to the poor ones. It is also seen as advancement for many countries because it influences their decisions.

The World Bank together with International Finance Corporation prevents fraud, especially in private projects. The IFC fights corruption so that the projects and investments are successful. It also seeks to alleviate poverty by giving resources to the projects that directly benefits the poor while creating employment opportunities to the unemployed (Goldman, 2005).

World Bank has helped countries like Malawi who were protesting against their presidents’ dictatorship in 1994. The security forces of Malawi had also against the rules of World Bank because they went to its offices and scrutinized the banks documents without its approval. The World Bank did not suspend giving Malawi loans, but it was able to convince the government of Malawi to look into the future of its people and avoid financial disasters (Chossudoysky, 2003).

We will write a custom Essay on Roles of International Financial Institutions specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More It has also responded to natural disasters; for example, in Pakistan where floods caused major destruction. The bank aided the country by giving finances especially to the families that were affected as well as reconstruction of highways, houses, and improvement of road networks.

In conclusion, the international financial institutions have helped their member countries by stabilizing worldwide exchange rates, which has led to growth of international trade. They have also removed the trading barriers between their member countries and have improved on global development.

Financial institutions have improved economic status and the living standards of the less fortunate in the underdeveloped countries. These institutions focus on broadening and strengthening the financial concerns of their member countries as well as assisting with funds when economic difficulty arises.

References Chossudoysky, M. (2003) The Globalization of Poverty. Impacts of IMF and World Bank. Penange: Third World Network.

Goldman, M. (2005). Imperial Nature and Struggles for Social justice in the Age of Globalization. New York. Yale University Press.

Hill, C. W. (2009). International Business. Competing in Global Market Place (7th ed.). Boston: Massachusetts.

[supanova_question]

Rapid Economic Growth and Industrialization in Japan Analytical Essay best essay help

In Asia, Japan was the first country to exhibit a marked positive growth after the damage caused to the nation following the world war (Stephenson 2009). This was followed by a similar trend in four other Asian nations during the 1960’s. The countries namely; Hong Kong, Taiwan, Singapore and South Korea began a rapid trend that was marked by rapid economic growth and industrialization. The main driving force behind this trend was a shift of focus driven by availability of cheap labor, to export led growth (Stephenson 2009).

As a result of this export led growth the west including America and other western developed nations began to consume as many of the toys and clothes that came with Made in Asia labels (Stephenson 2009). This process saw the countries amass huge foreign exchange reserves and develop huge trade surpluses in the west.

This plan by the nations appears to have been similar to the initial idea of the Japanese. The Japanese had decided to develop manufacturing prowess by exploiting the large amount of cheap labor in the country (Stephenson 2009).

The approach to focus on low end consumer products has been used by numerous Asian countries to increase national wealth. As wealth increases the trend implies shifting to begin the inclusion of higher end products (Stephenson 2009). A good example of this is the Taiwanese economy that supports the nation of about 23 million.

The country is home to some very reputable producers of high tech computer and electrical products. In addition to increased manufacturing the nations citizens have also began to play a role in the international arena being the initiators of companies such as Yahoo and You Tube (Stephenson 2009).

One of the major drivers in these East Asian countries was education which these governments put education in a very strategic position (Mok 63). The governments focused on creating opportunities for education to raise the education standards of its citizens. It is a common belief in these governments that only through educational advancement can they keep pace with social and economic change (Mok 63).

During the 90’s this accelerated economic growth saw a major slump owing to economic recession in the region seriously affecting the Asian tigers (Rai122).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The main reason this recession had such a major effect in these developing nations is due to the fact economic growth had caused the export market to be over valued. As a result the recession saw the number of bad debts rise dangerously due to a large number of companies going into debt (Rai 122).

In the same 90’s era India was fortunate enough to see the unification of two like minded leaders begin their occupation of the prime minister and finance minister office (Wong 66). The Prime minister, Rao and the new finance minister Manmohan Singh can easily be quoted to be the champions of economic reform in India. Among the major reforms brought about by this team was an almost 80% elimination of licenses for industry. In one move this freed the Indian business community from the chains of the ‘License raj’.

Although this period was marked by economic chaos, India got the opportunity to benefit and readjust economic policy. The serious increase in bad debts provided the Indian business community an opportunity to buy assets at very low prices (Rai 122).

For example, the Jindal group entered an agreement during this period that saw the purchase and transfer of an entire steel plant in South Korea. Further the poor economic state provided sourcing opportunities for Indian businesses. The drop in currencies and excess supply in local and foreign markets provided a good source for Indian companies to acquire raw material.

This also gave the Indian companies an opportunity for backward integration. Further India now gained some companies with an established marketing network which may be used for similar products (Rai 122).

Works Cited Mok, KA-Ho. Education Reform and Education Policy in East Asia. New York: Routledge, 2006. Print.

Rai, Usha Kiran. Export-Import and Logistics Management. New Delhi: Prentice Hall of India Private Ltd, 2007. Print.

We will write a custom Essay on Rapid Economic Growth and Industrialization in Japan specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Stephenson, John. Shell Shocked: How Canadians can invest after the collapse. Ontario: John Wiley

[supanova_question]

Formal Analysis Essay best essay help: best essay help

Introduction Formal analysis is a particular type of art description. It is an elucidation of visual art and of the techniques in which specific visual elements in a sculpture have been put together. It also explains how these work within a composition. Formal analysis is restricted to what the analyst observes.

This paper will touch on a formal analysis of two photographs, one for a warrior and the other for a monk. It will describe this two sculptures in detail and try to determine the message the artist was trying to convey by the style and detail used for the artwork creation.

Discussion Analysis of the warrior photograph

The warrior stands with his two feet flat on a kind of platform, which itself lies on the ground. The right foot is positioned ahead of the left foot with the right lap slightly projecting. He is in only one garment. This garment is folded down to the hip level. The sculpture shows that it has been fastened on the shoulder with a piece of bronze.

The upper and lower lids of the eye are narrow, and the lips are thin and tightly squeezed. The warrior is portrayed in a manner that shows that he is like walking. His posture, with his foot stretching towards us, generates a line and a means of access from our world into his. This sculpture is, therefore, simply categorized as of the late Classical period since the artists of those days were captivated with the structure of human bodies and their locomotion’s.

The space shown directs back from the universe to the back of the sculpture. This confides in a way that so much of it is over shadowed by dark green trees. The margins of this work are not well defined with dark trees that are stranded on both sides. It seems to have been framed on the warriors’ figure in part of a greater scene, and this stresses the significance of the figure.

When viewing this photo, ones eyes are likely to be focused on the concentrated and deep articulated looks on his face and the swords resting on his hands. This two bring to mind the image of a warrior. The upright position of the warriors’ body is a sign of discipline, organization, vanquish and triumph. The legs and feet of the warrior look bigger compared to the rest of the body. This is a clear sign of how the warrior steps out and defeats his enemies.

The base and middle of this photo is more closed than the upper part, which is the warrior. This shows that the warrior has a bit of entrance into the space. In terms of texture, this sculpture is made up of a mixture of smooth (the warrior) and rough portions like the dark green trees around the warrior. The smoothness contributes to the kindness of the warrior while the rough areas are a sense of wickedness, chaos, constraints and torment.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Analysis of the monk photograph

The monk photograph illustrates a three- quarter portrait of a mysterious monk who is bound by oaths of poverty, respect and chastity. The eye is inclined with the descending turn of the face. The upper and lower lids of the eye are wide, and the lips are thick. The monk is bald headed.

He holds a piece of jewellery on his right hand which might have spiritual significance. He also holds another object on his left. There are wrinkles on his face and especially at the bends of his eyes. The mood of this photo is obviously suggested through the position and outlook of the figure. The entire painting works in inducing this response.

The monk as depicted by the photo is lonely but calm, introverted from but linked to his religion. Line quality has been well portrayed in this photo. It is composed of curved, flowing as well as several conspicuous straight elements.

These lines in general strain on the horizontal axis. Some of these curved lines stand out at the edges of the sculpture centered on the monks head. Implausible agony and distress is enclosed in the face of the monk with a head titled expression.

The statue appears life like with plenty of sentiments. The inflated muscles show the strength of his struggle from poverty and obedience to set rules. The monks’ expressions in this case can be illustrated as either confined or dignified or as the decisive depiction of psychological anguish associated with the struggle for freedom. The eyes are raised as a sign of reproach to God.

Comparison and Contrast between the two photographs

The warrior is bathed in deep light; setting his figure vividly against the area that he occupies. The weak lighting source behind him is a sign of the distinctive nature of the portrait. The monk is, however, bathed with weak light with a strong lighting source behind him. This two lighting structure, employed by both artists makes the two portraits to appear totally as three dimensional and practical. The monk is bald- headed while the warrior has his head crowned.

Conclusion This work of art puts into word messages taking into account the significance of religion and wars since this are indeed highly important for the existence of present nations and the survival of their future generations. The two statues point towards various modern day ideas in such a way that the theme of religion and wars is always present.

We will write a custom Essay on Formal Analysis specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More

[supanova_question]

Yoga Relaxation Exercises Essay essay help online free: essay help online free

Stress is part of life and will continue to exist throughout the life of human beings. Human beings have come up with various ways of managing stress and yoga is one of them. Although stress has adverse effects on the health and general well being of human beings, it is argued that stress is not necessarily bad (McCall 48). Human beings need some amount of stress to give them the needed pressure to do some things.

A lot of stress that is not well managed can lead to a lot of diseases because the stress hormone known as cortisol lowers a person’s immunity against diseases (McCall 49). The human mind is the source of all stress and the yoga technology helps in making a person’s mind work for his or her benefit and therefore reduces unnecessary stress. This paper will highlight the nine experiential exercises of yoga.

To begin with, guided relaxation is one of the best relaxations that involve relaxing all the body muscles in a comfortable position as one imagines a smile. The smile should be felt by all the body organs. This slows down breathing and completely relaxing the body. The second experiential exercise is referred to as meditation on the breath where one is supposed to focus on their breathing with closed eyes as they try much as possible to forget about other things (McCall 54).

This exercise helps the mind to become clear and briefly forget the never ending distractions. By following the breathing pattern in a relaxed position away form all kinds of noise; one is able to experience some peace even if it is just for a short while. Meditation on breath helps people become calm by being able to control their minds from distractions.

Breathing assessment is very essential in determining whether one breathes normally or not. Stress and anxiety reverses ones breathing with the abdomen moving in the reverse direction during breathing. The yoga technique helps one to normalize their breathing and in the process lowering stress levels. Belly breathing is a yoga technique used to solve the problem of reverse breathing. The abdominal muscles are contracted gently in a sitting or lying position (McCall 58).

Those doing this exercise are advised to lie on their back as they inhale and exhale gently. The next experiential exercise in yoga is the palming exercise that involves rubbing of palms in a comfortable sitting position. A period of twenty seconds is enough for the hands to generate some heat. The next step is the closing of eyes and placing the warm palms gently on the cheeks and eye sockets. The chest should remain upright for the body to relax as the palms ease the tension in the eyes (McCall 60).

Standing in an upright position and imagining your eyes can see what is on the side helps release tension from the eyes. This exercise is referred to as eyes on the side of your head. Relaxation by being motionless as you lie on your back for almost half a minute is another way of releasing tension (McCall 64). Eyes should be gently closed with the palms facing upwards. All the body muscles should be relaxed especially the jaws.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The leg –up-the -wall pose is another form of relaxation. In this exercise, the back is supported by a bolster or other soft materials like a blanket. One is supposed to remain in this position for almost ten minutes in order for the normal curve of the body spine to be maintained. The “so ham” meditation focuses on the sound of the breath for relaxation (McCall 66). One should maintain the upright position with the eyes closed.

Work Cited McCall, Timothy. Yoga as Medicine: the Yogic Prescription of Health and healing: a Yoga Journal Book. New York: Health

[supanova_question]

The Tell Tale Heart Essay best essay help

The Tell Tale Heart is a short story about a nameless narrator who commits murder. The narrator kills an old man who had a blue vulture like eye that made the narrator very uncomfortable. He plans the murder, executes it, and hides the body of the old man in the floorboard. The story falls under the gothic genre (Snodgrass, 2005). The story falls under the gothic category because it is a horror story that tells how a young narrator kills an old man in cold blood and dismembers his body in order to conceal his crime.

The killer claims he is sane and goes into details to explain how he executed the murder. However, when the police came to the Old Man’s house he gives himself away to the police because he hears the heart of the old man beating behind the floorboard and this incident may suggest that the narrator is in fact insane. The author of the story is Edgar Allan Poe an American author who was born on January 19, 1809 in Boston Massachusetts.

His parents David and Elizabeth died before Poe celebrated his second birthday. After their death, he lived with John and Frances Allan, a childless couple. His childhood was sad, he experienced death of his loved at a young age, and the deaths influenced his works, which have the theme of grisly deaths (Meyer, 2000). Poe’s s misery and suffering reverberates in his works and in popular culture today long after his death.

Poe’s story is culturally significant as it shows how the society was during his time. The people were beginning to have an interest in moral insanity (Bynum, 1989). For instance, it is difficult to tell why the narrator killed the old man at the end of the story was it insanity or plan evil disguised as fear of the pale blue eye? The narrator says that he loved the old man and the man had never wronged him yet he still kills the Old man.

The narrator’s sense of morality seems to be suspended because the brutal killing of the old man does not prick his or her conscience but disturbed by the thought that the police know who has committed the murder and only toying with the narrator’s mind. The story is economically successful even though Poe was not able to reap big economical gains from it and his other works and struggled economically.

The story is underpinned in the popular culture as people try to explain murders in which the perpetrators confess (Bloom, 2002). However, the story is economically successful because it has a large following today and it is still widely read. Moreover, the story has been adapted into the popular culture into various media such as television programs, movies that are widely watched and popular such as the Simpsons.

Lastly, the story reinforces the cultural values of moral insanity as the story tries to explain why some people commit horrendous murders to their beloved ones without a valid cause. In the society today, it is common to hear of stories about people killing people close to them for very funny reason like the prisoner in a jail who killed his cellmate because he heard voices tell him to commit the murder (Burrell, 2001).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The Tell Tale Heart is still a relevant story today as it shows how human beings can be demented and invokes people to look more into the lives and psychology mind of the people who commit despicable murders.

Reference List Bloom, H. (2002). Edgar Allan Poe. New York: Infobase Publishing.

Burrell, I. (2001). Murderer who mutilated inmate locked up for life. Web.

Bynum, P.M. (1989). The Tell Tale Heart and other stories. Ed. Bloom Harold. Web.

Meyers. J. (2000). Edgar Allan Poe: his life and legacy. New York: Cooper Square Press.

Snodgrass, M.E. Encyclopedia of Gothic literature. New York: Infobase Publishing.

[supanova_question]

Polar Bear Survival/ Decline Report college essay help near me: college essay help near me

The article by Evan Richardson discusses how environmental variation influences animal traits and population dynamics; he used polar bear as the sample case of animals. Changes in the environment, climatic patterns and global warming have resulted to threatened animal plant and human life.

Global warming has affected polar life with the bear as the most affected; melting of ice and snow has denied the animal a place to hunt, travel, mate, and live. The writer is of the view that when temperatures have changed, they are having a direct influence on polar life as the habitation of the animals’ changes with melting of snow and ice caps.

The article is a sample of a peer reviewed journal that is written and research according to how a typical academic work should be represented; with the structure, other than the journal discussing an important topic in modern industrialized world, it offers readers the structure of a well-written research material. After reading the article, someone is able to connect the reasons learnt in class and how they can be applied in real life situations.

Sampling design The sample population came from polar bears conducted in Hudson Bays during the time that the bears come ashore; the period when they are ashore is when the ices have reduced in volume, it is mostly mid-July to mid- November of every year.

The sample population was appropriate considering the limitations that the study was faced with; other than the actual sample, the researcher went further can considered other researches that had been done earlier. The research was able to capture bears of different ages, gender, pregnant ones among others; this made the sample a representative of the situation on the ground.

The main cause of error and biasness in the research might have been when collecting the samples since they were collected from the bears that were coming onshore; there are high chances that there were other animals up the shores that were not considered creating a large room for speculation and generalization.

The validity and reliability of the samples and the population is questionable; the sample was collected from a small number of animals who came offshore , then used for generalization.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Data collection The writer collected secondary and primary data’s, the main source of the materials was from previous researches that scholars had taken on the issue and the primary research that was conducted on the animals that came onshore.

Another way that information should be collected from primary sources is visiting the polar areas and having some data collection; it possible a certain area that have bears of a certain character or species living should be visited more than once in a span of three years and information collected be analyzed and used to make the final verdict.

When collecting data, researchers should uphold high levels of ethical conduct, the most important one is to ensure they have collected information from the right population after having sort relevant licenses and permission. When they have collected the data, they should be willing to share and use it for the general good; when a research has been conducted, there is a certain population that is expected to benefit; it is thus ethical to put on measures that ensure the intended people get the information when required (Richardson, 2009).

Reference Richardson, E. (2009). Polar Bear (Ursus maritimus) Life History and Population Dynamics in a Changing Climate. InfoNorth, 62(4),491-494.

[supanova_question]

Decline of Technotitlan (1520-1521) Research Paper essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

The Journey to Tenochtitlan

Tension between Spaniards and Aztecs

Festival Massacre

Siege of Tenochtitlan

Conclusion

Bibliography

Footnotes

Introduction The Aztec Empire was formed through the unification of three city states. These city states had the power to govern, and control the empire. They were also in charge of Mexico Valley. “This coalition was composed of Tenochtitlan, Texcoco, and Tlacopan, and they were commonly known as the Nuhua city states”[1].

Tenochtitlan acted as the capital of Aztec. It was from this city that the Aztec civilization flourished, and managed to control other Mexican tribes. “Within the alliance, Tenochtitlan became dominant among the other partners in the alliance”[2]. Therefore, the ruling class in the Aztec Empire used Tenochtitlan as the main point of operation, and the other cities adopted subsidiary roles. The empire was managed this way until 1520, when the Spanish arrived.

The alliance expanded its frontiers through a series of military expeditions on their neighboring territories. The alliance also annexed a big portion of Mexico territory, and other distant territories.

The Aztec rule was conducted indirectly, and it was also hegemonic in nature. In this case, the Aztec rulers governed their conquered territories through the native rulers that were in charge of those territories before they annexed them. The Aztec empire practiced its hegemony through annual taxation of its colonies. Besides this, their territories also reinforced them through military support whenever they engaged in any serious battle.

The Journey to Tenochtitlan Cortés was a popular magistrate in Cuba, and he mostly served in Santiago. In 519, Cortés together with an army explored Vera Cruz in Mexico. “Velazquez called for Cortés to lead an expedition into Mexico after reports from a few previous expeditions to Yucatán caught the interest of the Spanish in Cuba”[3].

However, Velazquez soon invalidated Cortés authority to lead the mission. After that, he instructed Narvaez who was accompanied by soldiers to go and monitor Cortés activities. Consequently, Cortés did not have power to accomplish his plans and this humiliated him.

As Cortés advanced into the interior, he encountered many tribes that detested Aztec governance. Cortés had conflicts with some communities that he encountered, and they also overwhelmed his army. His army was quite ineffective, but he continued advancing to Tenochtitlan. In November 1519, Cortés got close to Tenochtitlan city, but he organized his army before moving into Tenochtitlan city. He clustered his troops into various units that were comprised of foot soldiers and horsemen.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More When Cortés finally arrived at Tenochtitlan city, he moved in through the causeway, covered with flowers, which was believed to be mainly used by the god Quetzalcoatl. Montezuma cordially welcomed him to the city. “Moctezuma was later taken hostage as a safety measure by the vastly outnumbered Spanish”[4]. It is believed that this measure was adopted against him after he allegedly refused to quite the palace. Pedro de Alvarado was among the captains ordered to guard him. Apart from Moctezuma, the Spanish also incarcerated other Mexican lords.

Tension between Spaniards and Aztecs Moctezuma cooperation and surrender to the Spaniards was quite unusual. He probably did this because he wanted to protect his rule, and he also wanted to avoid being killed by the Spaniard soldiers. Moctezuma may also have wanted to spy on the Spaniards before striking. Nonetheless, he did not execute any of the above mentioned plans, although he was advised to do so. Through the detention of Moctezuma, Cortés did not suspect any imminent attack. Besides this, Cortés also thought of using Moctezuma to govern Aztec.

This plan flopped since Cortés was ignorant of Aztec’s political governance. Moreover, Cortés over estimated the power and efficiency of Moctezuma. “Appointed to the throne was dependent on the king’s ability to rule decisively, and he could easily be replaced if he failed to do so”[5]. This meant that any weakness demonstrated by the king could spark off rebellion. Moctezuma implemented Cortés despotic orders and this eroded peoples’ trust in him. After sometime, people rejected Moctezuma.

While Cortés was occupying Tenochtitlan city, Velazquez on the other hand, made military arrangements so that he could attack, and deport Cortés to Cuba. Velazquez was not amused by Cortés behavior because he did not respect his position. In 1520, Narvaez accompanied with other soldiers finally docked at Mexican coast in April.

When Cortés was informed about Narvaez arrival, his army went and assaulted Narvaez soldiers where they camped. Sources indicate that Cortés attack on Narvaez came at a time when he list expected since they were still negotiating. In addition, Cortés caused a division among Narvaez’s soldiers by telling them that they would get much wealth if they supported him. Cortés imprisoned Narvaez, and he also took his army equipment and soldiers.

Festival Massacre Pedro de Alvarado together with other soldiers took charge of Tenochtitlan, during Cortés’s absence. “During this time, the Aztecs began to prepare for the annual festival of Toxcatl, which was celebrated in honor of the war god Huitzilopochtli”[6].

They were authorized by Moctezuma to conduct the festival, and they also claimed that the Spaniards were enthusiastic to learn some of their cultural practices. Alvarado allowed Aztecs to run their festival provided they did not attend the festival while armed. Many Aztecs turned up for the festival with dozens of gifts and offerings.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Decline of Technotitlan (1520-1521) specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Several Aztec warriors also attended with the experienced ones being in the front part of the venue. Alvarado became weary of the Aztecs, and he suspected that they could be lynched by the Aztec warriors. Nonetheless, the warriors did not have battle gargets. The Spanish ambushed the Aztecs with various weapons while they celebrated, and they also closed all exists to the temple. Many people died while others escaped.

The Aztecs responded by alerting their warriors to come and attack the Spaniard soldiers that had ambushed them. The Aztec warriors responded very fast and they also lynched the Spaniards. “They managed to attack the Spaniards due to the fact that their military infrastructure had been severely damaged after the attack on the festival”[7].

Alvarado managed to inform Cortés about the events that had transpired in his absence. In June, Cortés and thirteen hundred troops moved back to Tenochtitlan. “Finally, Cortés reached his fortress unscathed, and the warriors from Aztec also planned to confront him”[8].

In order to frustrate the Spaniards, the Aztecs cut their logistical supplies to Cortés and the Spaniards. The Aztecs warned their people against any conspiracy or support to the Spaniards. In this case, any person who was caught trying to offer logistics support to the Spaniards could be killed. Besides this, the Aztecs blocked the Spaniards from exiting the palace, and they also suppressed Spanish attacks on them. Cortés did not fully understand the extent of the problem that occurred in his absence from Tenochtitlan.

The Spaniards actions during the festival had many ramifications on Cortés political profile. Cortés tried to reconcile with the Aztecs, but his attempt to appease them failed. Consequently, he instructed Moctezuma to go and negotiate with his subjects in order for them to stop rebelling. However, the Aztecs failed to stop rebelling against Cortés. The Spaniards stated that Aztecs killed Moctezuma when he tried to address them. On the other hand, the Aztecs also felt that their leader had been murdered.

Siege of Tenochtitlan After Cortés had lost the battle against the Aztecs, he decided to relocate to Tlaxcalan. He also felt so much humiliated after his defeat, and army massacre. Since Cortés resided in the middle of Tenochtitlan city, it was not easy for him to escape because he could easily be attacked by the Aztec warriors who had surrounded him. In order to reach Tlaxcalan safely, Cortés had to use a suitable route. This is because he was vulnerable to numerous attacks from the communities that they could encounter along their journey to Tlaxcalan.

The dark nights and heavy rains facilitated the Spaniards secrete exit from Tenochtitlan. The Spanish managed to cross a few canals, but they were unfortunately discovered in the process of trying to cross the fourth canal. The Aztec warriors were alerted very fast, and they immediately attacked the fleeing Spaniards.

The Aztecs wounded and killed many Spaniards, and only a few of them managed to survive. The few Spaniards that escaped were also driven toward Tlaxcalan. Even though the Aztec warriors were many, Cortés managed to defeat them narrowly by murdering the Aztec general. The Spanish incurred many losses, but they finally emerged victorious. After that, the Aztecs retreated.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Decline of Technotitlan (1520-1521) by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More After Moctezuma’ death, Cuitlahuac became his successor. Cuitlahuac found it necessary to consolidate his power immediately in order to govern the Aztecs effectively. “Usually, the new king was would take his army on campaign before coronation; this demonstration would solidify necessary ties”[9]. Nonetheless, he failed to do this because it was still time for harvesting. He instead forged a cordial relationship with the Spaniards.

The Aztec Empire remained fragile because the tributary states were prone to internal wrangles and this affected their cooporation. Cortés also found it important to form fresh alliances. “And as long as the Spaniards could protect new allies from the possibility of Aztec retribution, changing sides would not be too difficult for other tributaries”[10].

While Cortés was trying to reorganize his new territory, the Spaniards were struck by small pox. The disease started in Tenochtitlan, and later spread to Tlaxcalan. The disease claimed many Aztecs lives, and even Cuitlahuac was not spared.

He died of smallpox after serving for a week. The epidemic also killed many Aztec warriors, hence, affecting leadership in Aztec. The Aztecs did not bother to take action against the Spaniards after they had escaped because of the following reasons. First, Tenochtitlan was greatly disorganized after the Spaniards departure. Secondly, the small pox also interfered with the stability of the Aztecs warriors.

In order to recapture Tenochtitlan, Cortés skillfully formulated an attack against his rivals. “Cortés intended to do that by increasing his mobility on the lake, which was previously one of his main weaknesses”[11]. In this regard, Cortés build ships, and also equipped his troops. The Spanish devised sophisticated tactics that enabled them to gain access to Tenochtitlan.

The Aztecs also advanced their strategies. Hence, Aztec warriors did not retreat during the battle with the Spanish. The Spanish sourced goods and equipment from Vera Cruz, and this enabled them to enter Tenochtitlan. “The Spanish fought through the city street by street, and were slowed, though not stopped, by fierce Aztec resistance”[12]. As the battle ensued, Spanish prisoners who had been captured were sacrificed.

Finally, in 1521 the Aztecs formally admitted defeat on the thirteenth of August. Even after the Aztecs had surrendered, they were still attacked by Spanish soldiers. The Spanish destroyed massive property, and also killed many Aztecs. King Cuauhtemoc, who was now the new ruler of Aztec, also lost his life. The allies of Cortés contributed significantly to his success. “As there were several major allied groups, no one in particular was able to take power, and the person who benefited was Cortés”[13].

Conclusion The decline of Tenochtitlan was a gradual process that took many years to accomplish. The Spaniards really struggled to subdue the Aztec warriors who could not retreat easily during any battle. The flourishing Aztec empire was ruined by many battles. The Spaniards lost many resources, and lives in the process of trying to fulfill their mission. However, they never gave up until they finally conquered Tenochtitlan in 1521. “It was the siege of Tenochtitlan that marked the end of the first phase of the Spanish conquest of the Aztec empire”[14].

Bibliography Castillo, Bernal. The discovery and conquest of Mexico, 1517-1521. London: Grove Press, 1958.

Grunzinski, Serge. The Aztecs: Rise and Fall of an Empire. New York: Harry N. Abrams, 1992.

MacQuarrie, Kim. The Last Days of the Incas. New York: Simon

[supanova_question]

The Concept of Learning and Its Crucial Tools Definition Essay custom essay help

The concept of learning is extra-ordinarily fundamental in regard to knowledge acquisition process. Learning entails the process by which knowledge is acquired in all realms of its necessity and by the target individuals. The employment of essential training and impartation tools creates a rationale for enhancement of a learning ground. A variety of approaches are identifiable in the process of learning that act as crucial tools to drive the process.

The impacts of the concept of learning are grounded on the concept of performance in all realms of the study. However, learning and performance differ significantly in the conceptual approaches that are applied in the achievement of learning goals. The discussion in this paper seeks to provide details of the concept of learning (Novak, 2010).

Describing the concept of learning The concept of learning entails an integration of all kinds of tools necessary to facilitate the process by which knowledge is acquired. It is possible for one to achieve set goals in the learning processes through the application of ample tools as well as efficient approaches. The best concepts of learning tools are referred to as those that incorporate all stakeholders that are required to obtain knoledge.

The traditional frameworks could not provide room for the learners to take part in the most important processes of learning. Learning is often referred to as a conscious process in the case of one reading and memorizing a certain material, while it is described as an unconscious process when no deliberate efforts are applied in the process of knowledge acquisition.

The concept of learning has been found ample in the provision of knowledge of life to those people in need of it from the standpoint of education. Thus, learning would also be described as a transition in regards to behavior for the sake of psychological purposes. Learning occurs in different individuals distinctly, ways which are inclusive of observations from other people.

These observable characteristics range from looks, dress code and intellect in addition to charisma and the ability to do things like singing or speaking well. Therefore, the concept of learning entails enhancing the cognitive transformation that must take place in the life of an individual (Novak, 2010).

Differences between learning and performance There is a wide range of distinctions of learning from performance, owing to the fact that one of them is a pre-requisite of the other. Learning is an implication of the process by which one acquires knowledge and skills to perform a task. On the other hand, performance implies the process by which abilities are demonstrated outwardly and the results of the skills that are acquired from a given field can be duly observed.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Additionally, learning defines a particular internal change that is introverted in the regard to its occurrence within a human being. In contrast, performance has an outward implication that is oriented in a person and the results can be witnessed by other parties. Standards that are normatively based are associated with performance goals rather than just personal standards.

Moreover, the standards utilized in performance are ideal in the promotion of demonstration of abilities to other people in contrast to learning whose demonstration is focused on self-enhancement and increment. Furthermore, learning promotes the enhancement of competence in the fields of application while performance is not concerned with the concept of competence (Wiig

[supanova_question]

History and Evolution of the Guitar Instrument Essay scholarship essay help: scholarship essay help

1. The guitar is among the oldest musical instruments used in various ancient musical performances. This magnificent musical instrument was popular during early times of Persia, in many Middle Eastern countries and Rome (Guitar history). However, the experienced progress and advancement of this instrument lies entirely on concerts, recital halls and ordinary individuals who adopted it as a convenient and lively accompaniment to their folk music. During these times, most of the greatest players were either Spanish or Italian.

Their performances were overwhelming thus received passionately in various countries. The performances were a form of inspiration to many thus reviving both local and foreign interests on the musical instrument. A good example explicating such instance is the life experience of Fernando Sor, regarded as among of the topmost performers in the recent past.

The structure of a guitar takes a certain form that makes it suitable for its use. The Spanish six-string guitar, for example, is the most expressive and adaptable among the many types. It is also the most advanced in terms of construction and technique.

Different guitar manufacturers produce dissimilar models of the instrument that often sound quite different. One of the best guitar models manufactured to date is the acoustic guitar. This magnificent guitar has a long life span, and designs have slightly changed over past decades. Popular guitar manufacturers within United States (US) constitute the Gibson Company and the CF Martin Company (CF Martins

[supanova_question]

Characteristics of a Failed State: Pakistan Essay college essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Characteristics of a Failed State

Conclusion

References

Introduction Pakistan is a large and populous country which came into existence in 1947 after an armed struggle from the British colonizers. Since then, the country has had a turbulent history ranging from the aggression against their neighbor India to conflicts with militant groups along its borders.

The insecurity experienced in Pakistan has led to the nation being classified as a failing state by some countries among the international community. This paper shall argue that Pakistan is a failing state and is in danger of becoming a fully failed state if it continues on the same path. To reinforce this claim, this paper shall articulate the characteristics of a failed state that Pakistan currently exhibits.

Characteristics of a Failed State Rotberg (2004, p.85) characterizes failed states as being “tense, deeply conflicted, dangerous, and contested bitterly by warring factions. While Pakistan has a functional government, the country is characterized by bitter warring factions. The government and civilians continue to suffer from the sporadic suicide attacks that are perpetrated and civilian causalities are high. While the Pakistani government has launched numerous operations against the militants, the attacks continue to occur with increasing frequency.

Another characteristic of failed states is that the central government is not able to control all its territory. This is the case with Pakistan and Hains (2008) notes that while the geographical region known as Pakistan appears as a unified state on the map, the region is not wholly under the control of any single government as is typical of a fully functioning nation-state.

The Pakistan government has a marginal control of Baluchistan which is Pakistan’s largest province. In the Sparsely populated tribal lands, the Pakistani government has little to no control and Tribal leaders are the law in these regions. Baluchistan became a part of Pakistan after forceful annexation by Pakistan army following the 1947 independence. Since then, the people of Baluchistan have been involved in an armed conflict with Pakistan in a bid to annex themselves from the state.

Failing states are also characterized by a loss of monopoly by the government over the use of physical force. The Northwest border of Pakistan with Afghanistan is one of the regions where the central Pakistan government exhibits very little control.

This region which is referred to as the Federally Administered Tribal Areas (FATA) is a hub of illegal fire arms and a training ground for militants. As a result of the lawlessness in the tribal regions of Pakistan, the country acts as a safe haven for terrorist groups. As a matter of fact, the Pakistan Taliban is able to operate in Pakistan with the protection of the tribal leaders

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The Pakistan army breached the FATA for the first time during the 2002 US led war on terror in the region. Four years into the incursion, the Pakistan army made a retreat from the region as a result of huge casualties suffered in the region. This led to the signing of a peace deal with the Taliban in the Waziristan region.

Hains (2008) asserts that the signing of the peace treaty was equivalent to a defacto acceptance of an independent “Islamic Emirate of Waziristan” – ruled by the Taliban”. This area continues to serve as a safe haven for terrorist groups such as the infamous Al Qaeda.

A nation’s justice system has a direct bearing on the perceived legitimacy of a government by its people. Hains (2008) states that the reason for this is that the nation’s citizens are more likely to cooperate with the security apparatus if they perceive that the justice system is effective and fair.

While Pakistan boasts of a well established justice system, this state apparatus is plagued by allegations of corruption and inefficiency. The humanitarian situation in Pakistan is at best appalling. A report published by Amnesty International in 2007 revealed that Pakistan violated a wide array of human rights including “right to life, freedom from arbitrary arrest and detention, other ill-treatment and enforced disappearance”.

The Pakistani government relies heavily on aid from donor countries such as the US to reinforce its position. This aid is mostly in the form of military hardware in a bid to contain the terrorism threat in Pakistan. This aid has led to a situation whereby the Pakistani government has been forced to demonstrate its accountability to the US instead of its citizens.

This visible political intrusion has been as a result of the huge financial aid that the US gives to Pakistan. By being accountable to its donors rather than its own people, the Pakistan government has lost legitimacy in the eyes of some of its citizens leading to increased attacks on government installations.

Conclusion This paper set out to give a profile of Pakistan as a country and in particular to discuss the nature of Pakistan as a failed state. To this end, the paper has highlighted the characteristics of a failed state that Pakistan in its present condition exhibits. The Pakistani government does not wield control over its entire territory and its justice system is dysfunctional.

We will write a custom Essay on Characteristics of a Failed State: Pakistan specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This paper has demonstrated that as a result of this, Pakistan falls under the category of failing states. If the situation is not addressed, the future of the state of Pakistan is uncertain and it may become a fully failed state like Somalia.

References Amnesty International. (2007). Pakistan Human Rights ignored in the ‘War on Terror’. Web.

Hains, C. M. et al. (2008). Breaking the Failed-State Cycle. RAND Corporation.

Rotberg I. R. (2004). “The New Nature of Nation-State Failure.” The Washington Quarterly. Vol. 25 No 3, 2002: 85-96.

[supanova_question]

America’s jobless recovery – Not again Essay argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help

America’s jobless recovery is an international issue that talks about a current economic problem that is facing the country. This article is therefore trying to explain why the country’s jobless recovery is not yet satisfactory as it is supposed to be (The Economist 1).

It should be known that the country’s labor markets are faltering which is a major issue that needs to be evaluated and looked at carefully for long term sustainability. The major economic issue here is unemployment in the country. As far as the article is concerned, the economy has started picking up well and the issue of a strong recovery was just imminent.

This is as far as adding jobs is concerned because 400,000 jobs had been created last year (till May). Unemployment is a major issue because just when Americans were hoping that things would look bright, it has increased from 9.0% to 9.1% (The Economist 3). As far as economics is concerned, lack of jobs is considered as the main cause of poverty. This is not only applicable to poor countries but even developed countries are not spared from this.

Governments have been faced with a lot of problems in trying to create jobs and this is what is facing America. As much as America’s jobs situation has been improving, there have been disruptive shocks as a result of the global economy (The Economist 2).

This means that such shocks have had far reaching complications on the country’s economy because it is not immune. For instance, bad weather and the political instability in the Middle East have affected the world economy in a broad way. Currently, the number of jobs that are available in the country can not support the population which is a major problem.

As much as there might be good measures to increase production and ensure that the economy picks up, such will not be achieved with high levels of unemployment. People will not be able to create demand in the economy because of uncertainty as far as their jobs are concerned. This means that you cannot support yourself and to a large extend your family. In the long run, the economy cannot be boosted in any way.

America’s growth has been disappointing in recent months and this is because of various reasons. Because of a slow down in economic activities, the labor market has been troubled in a broad way. It is quite disappointing that while the economy created 220,000 jobs up to April, it was only able to create 54,000 jobs the following month (The Economist 4).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This economic issue is related to economic concepts that have been learned in class. In this case, the economy is always producing goods and services but there must be a guarantee that they will be sold.

This means that with unemployment soaring up, people will not have any disposable income to support production activities. As a matter of fact, demand is created when people increase their spending on goods and services. When people loose their jobs or they are not able to find good jobs, they will always experience a shortage of money which is not good for any economy.

High unemployment rates should not be entertained in any economy based on the fact that this has a direct impact on income. Manufacturing employment in America has been going down and this increases economic woes.

In this case, people will only be interested in buying essentials yet the economy can not just but exist on essentials alone (The Economist5). All this aspects are interrelated because one thing leads to another. For instance, we all know that you can not be able to invest without making any savings. Our ability to save is always dictated by our disposable income.

This is an economic rule and concept that can not be disputed in any way. As much as people are earning some money, it is not enough to sustain an economy that is just coming from the global financial crisis. America’s ability to create jobs has been complicated by budget issues that are being experienced because of politics. In this case the expected budgetary cuts have not been effective as they had been projected to be.

The economy grew by les that 2% in the first quarter and this is not good news for the job market that needs to be stimulated (The Economist 5). People are not able to return the money that they have earned back to economy through spending which is not good.

Such a problem is only complicated by unemployment and joblessness in the economy which can not be disputed in any economic class. There is no country that will ever pick up as far as economic growth rates are concerned unless they sort out their job market and this is the situation that America is facing.

We will write a custom Essay on America’s jobless recovery – Not again specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This means that there should be all efforts to solve the country’s economic woes to enhance the creation of jobs that will ultimately stimulate demand in the economy. Inflation has also been soaring in the economy and these issues are interrelated with unemployment in one way or the other. In conclusion, it can be boldly said that this economic issue is related with major economic models and concepts.

There are a lot of arguments and opinions that have been discussed in this article in relation to unemployment and joblessness in America. Various firms are growing nervous to continue hiring and this is because of the state of the economy. In this case, the economy has been subjected to a lot of external shocks that have had far reaching implications that need to be looked at (The Economist 1).

As much as the crisis in Europe shook up markets, the economy was only able to pick up after the stimulative asset purchases. Therefore, the article argues that the economy has not been able to pick up because of these disruptive shocks. Everybody seems to be in agreement that the economy has been disappointing as far as economic growth rates are concerned which explains a slowdown in labor activities. In this case, the unemployment rate in the country has been rising as time goes by which is not good at all.

As much as the number of jobs that are being created is not satisfactory, the country has the potential to create more jobs. In this case, there should be concreted efforts to promote a healthy environment that will make this possible by all means. All opinions point to the fact that it is not hard to see the source of the country’s economic woes meaning that something right is not being done.

For instance, manufacturing employment has been going down which indicates that what they are producing is not being bought or consumed by the economy (The Economist 6). In this case, there is no manufacturer who will be able to incur high labor costs yet their goods and services are not selling well in the market.

As a matter of fact, most manufacturers are involved in cost cutting measures to continue being in business and the most notable way of reducing costs is by cutting jobs. There is an argument that retail trade employment has been going down which needs to be sorted out. This is a clear indication that people are not spending enough because the economy has a lot of nervous consumers which can not promote growth.

America’s job problems can be said to be self made but this depends on the approach that this aspect is given. In this case, as much as the private sector has been increasing jobs, the government has also shed the same number of jobs that have been created by the private sector.

The drag on the national economy has been complicated by federal aids that have not helped in creating jobs (The Economist 7). All this problems are being brought about by budget issues that need to be looked into. The economy had been projected to grow by more than 4% but this will depend on various issues that need to be looked at and evaluated based on the role that they play (The Economist 5).

Not sure if you can write a paper on America’s jobless recovery – Not again by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More All in all, the debt-ceiling battle is another issue that will increase uncertainty in the economy thereby limiting its ability to create jobs. In this case, politicians should stop bickering because this will lead to the country being downgraded as far as its debt rating is concerned. Financial markets in the country are not stable and this mans that there should be no complications that will worsen the situation of jobs.

I agree with the analysis that has been done in the article because this is the true situation in the country which needs close scrutiny and attention for long term sustainability. The country’s economy is picking up but there is need for cautiousness and restrain when dealing with all aspects that have a bearing on economic performance. Currently, the global economy has not recovered and this is because of various reasons.

For instance, the Middle East crisis has had a lot of impacts and negative effects on oil which is a major factor of production. On the other hand, the earthquake in Japan disrupted market activities because the country is a major world economic player (The Economist 1). In this case, America can not cushion itself from such events but there should be good measures to jumpstart the economy. As a matter of fact, there is a lot of volatility that will ultimately have an impact on the country’s economy.

Inflation is a very big problem that should be sorted out because it negatively slows down economic growth rates. In this case, it reduces individuals’ disposable income thereby limiting their spending. This is well elaborated by the article where there are all indications to show that retail trade employment fell drastically. This was brought about by nervous consumers who are not ready to spend because of their limited income.

In the process, a lot of jobs have been lost because of a slow down in spending which should not be encouraged in any way. I also agree that the country’s job problems are self inflicting based on the measures that have been taken to increase jobs. This is based on growth rates that have been disappointing (The Economist 8). There are a lot of sensible job realizations that need to be evaluated as time goes by.

As an economist, I would say that as much as the country is exposed to a lot of external problems like oil fluctuations, there should be enough measures to cushion the economy that is still growing. The country has a big labor problem that is supposed to be given the attention that it deserves.

Many Americans are not comfortable with an unemployment rate of 9.1% which will further complicate the situation. In this case private firms have shown that they have the potential to increase and create jobs if they are supported well (The Economist 6).

There are all indications to show that the country’s retail sector is not performing well and this can related to a slow down in spending. In this case, consumers are very nervous because of their little disposable income. This means that they have to trim down their spending. In such scenarios, the country will not witness and encourage any meaningful investment activities because people’s income has been reduced by inflation.

America is not creating enough wealth based on its current economic growth rates which is not good for the labor market. A country can not progress and move forward with a high unemployment rate because people will not be in a position to save. Instead of saving, people will spend what they have which is very disastrous in the sense that economic activities will not be supported effectively.

Based on prevailing trends in the global economy, the country should come up with good measures to promote growth because such aspects will ultimately make matters worse. In this case, internal issues like inflation should be checked to ensure that people’s income is not eaten up in any way (The Economist 4).

In addition, it will be better if issues that revolve around the federal budget are handled well to aid financial markets. This is because the market is still shaky and any slight mistake will hurt the world’s financial system (The Economist 8). Currently, the country’s labor market is still vulnerable and there should be no room for mistakes.

Works Cited The Economist. America’s jobless recovery- Not again. 2011. Web. https://www.economist.com/free-exchange/2011/06/03/not-again

[supanova_question]

True or False? Having Kids Makes You Happy Essay essay help free: essay help free

In the article, True or False: Having kids makes you happy the author; Lorraine Ali examines critically the theme of parenthood. Children are part of family but couples have a choice on whether to raise children or not. Through analysis of the theme of parentage, Lorraine outlines the pros and cons of having children in a family. Although the society believes children are a source of joy in a family, having children does not make someone happy.

In her article, Lorraine compares the lifestyle of her childhood neighbors, the Sloan’s, who opted to have no child and her family, which had children. The Sloan’s not only lived a comfortable life, but they also had no regrets (Ali, 2008, p.63). On the contrary, her parents seemed to have a hectic life yet they had children.

Research on the impact of child on a marriage reveals that although children are part of a family, their presence leads to marital dissatisfaction, unhappiness, and financial constrains. Furthermore, parents experience hardships in juggling between job and parental responsibilities. Interestingly, many families have children and parents are quick to defend the position of their children in the family.

If having a kid is both expensive and hectic, why do most couples opt to have children? A family is never complete without a child or children in the contemporary world; the major advantage of children is that they are a source of security and joy or so many think. At old age every parent, needs a caretaker and company therefore, most people have children to secure their future in terms of company.

Children provide the basic needs to their parents and love. Therefore, couples have children to ensure continuity of their lineage, bond their love and for security reasons. Most couples overlook the pains and troubles of raising a child for identification reasons or ensure they fit into the society.

Regrettably, the process of raising a child is not a smooth road. Raising children is hectic and expensive. A toddler will require your attention, food, diapers, and medical check up. With the current tough economy, parents have to work extremely hard to earn an extra penny to look after their young ones. Moreover, education is a necessity in a child’s life and the current education providers are too expensive.

When the children hit the adolescence age, they need attention and constant guidance to ensure they do not develop unbecoming manners. Consequently, couples shift the attention to the children, which is time consuming forgetting all about their marriage or careers while some develop stress incase of stubborn children. Therefore, children are expensive to maintain, time demanding, and in some cases kill the love couples hitherto had for each other.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More On the other hand, what is the impact of opting to remain childless? A couple without a child may only experience loneliness, which becomes an issue incase of sickness or at old age. The couple without a child lives in a quite serene life with nobody to bother or shift their attention. Children do not bring happiness. The fears allied to lack of children like lack of security at old age are now obsolete with the introduction of homes for the aged.

Although the author concludes that having children does not make you happy, the change from traditions seems to be the major cause of unhappiness. Historically, children belonged to the community and every adult had the right to guide, discipline, and feed a child whether he/she is the parent or not. Currently, parents forbid non-relatives from disciplining their children or accepting food from the neighbors. Therefore, the author should actually have described the role of the modern society on parentage.

In summary, most couples tolerate children only to fit in the society because the maintenance and education of a child is too expensive in the modern world. When compared to childless couples, parents might develop emotional stress while some might even quit their careers to look after their children. Therefore, even though having children in the contemporary society seems inevitable; children do not make one happy.

Reference Ali, L. (2008, July 14). True of False? Having Kids Makes You Happy. Newsweek, 152 (1/2), 62-63.

[supanova_question]

Sleepwalk in Life Essay college application essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Discussion

Conclusion

Works Cited

Introduction The idea that most people are sleepwalking through life is a very important aspect in our society. Therefore, it is undeniable that most people who are sleepwalking through life are always unaware of what they are doing. This means that a sleepwalker will not be aware that he is engaging himself in such behavior.

It should be known that there have been a lot of arguments in relation to sleepwalking which needs to be understood. As a matter of fact, some people have treated individuals who are sleepwalking differently yet they need to be understood and supported for the society’s well being.

Most of us are sleepwalking in life which is undisputable. As much as most people are unaware that they are sleepwalking, this is caused by various reasons and aspects. The pressures of modern life have made people to sleepwalk in life which is set to continue as time goes by (Charlie 12).

Discussion I think that most people are sleepwalking through their life because they are midway their organizational lives. Sleepwalking can be done in different dimensions depending on the activity that an individual is engaged in. When people are asked if they are sleepwalking, they will always say no yet this is not the case. It should be known that there are various symptoms of sleepwalking that can be exhibited by individuals like having no goals and ambitions.

Most things that people do are the ones that are making them to sleepwalk like constant watching of TV, surfing on the internet and others. I think that we are sleepwalking in life because we engage in unproductive activities. This is because of shutting off their brains as a result of these activities (Nowak 16). People who are living their lives in a state of unconsciousness can also be said to be sleepwalking.

This should not be assumed to be physically awake because we might think that we are okay. There are individuals who are not aware of whom they are in the society which is a reason for sleepwalking through life. In this case, there is a large context of life that people can be part of which should be understood.

It is not easy to tell an individual who is sleepwalking in life because they are just like any one of us. We always sleepwalk because we do not have any clarity in our lives. In the long run, we end up being physical shells that are just there. As earlier noted, sleepwalking can be manifested in different ways and this is as far as people who are not thinking about their future are concerned (Culebras 15). Our life should always be about the bigger picture and when we lack it we are also sleepwalking.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More If you can not find enough time to do the things that you want to do in life then you are literally sleepwalking. This is mainly caused by being preoccupied with things that do not matter in life. As a matter of fact, it has been argued that sleepwalkers are always busy and they will wait for another next time to accomplish their goals.

Lack of motivation or ambition has been cited as one of the reasons behind sleepwalking. It should be known that most people are not driven in their lives because of various things which should be evaluated. This is based on the pretext that we are just there to live which is not good at all (Mackay 23).

There is no need to live other people’s expectations because we will not be able to define our direction. People should not be made to stash away their goals and desires which might revolve around sleepwalking. The society has a lot of sleepwalkers because of our preoccupation with making money where we forget what we stand for.

This means that there is something that can be done to stop or reduce sleepwalking in the society (De Bruxelles 9). In this case, this is as far as how we can break out of such a situation is concerned. It is undeniable that everybody has his dream that he/she wishes to accomplish in life and they should be supported for long term sustainability.

This means that there is a solution to everything so long as a good approach is given. To break out of this, we should engage ourselves in value added activities. This should not revolve around filling our lives with random activities but with things that will better our lives. There is no need for a passive approach to life because most people live on a day to day basis.

Conclusion Because all of us sleepwalk in life, we should pay more attention to time allocation. This will enable us to do things that matter most because it is not good to wait for next time (Charlie 27). In conclusion, we can say that most of us are sleepwalking in life because of our environment and society. This is because we need to be on the move to make money which has been considered as the measure of success. All this activities have made people to be preoccupied with a lot of things that wear them down leading to sleepwalking.

There is a lot of competition in the society today which has complicated everything because there is nobody who wants to be left behind. All in all, there is a lot that can be done to ensure that people are focused in life based on proper identification of goals.

We will write a custom Essay on Sleepwalk in Life specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Works Cited Charlie Parish. Sleep Walking Through Life. 2011. Web.

Culebras, Antonio. Somnambulism: Clinical Handbook of Sleep Disorders. Massachusetts: Butterworth-Heinemann, 1996. Print.

De Bruxelles, Simon. Sleepwalker Brian Thomas admits killing wife while fighting intruders in nightmare. London: The Times, 2009. Print.

Mackay, Irene. The Sleepwalker is not insane. New York: Routledge, 1992. Print.

Nowak, Rachel. Sleepwalking woman had sex with strangers. New York: New Scientist, 2004. Print.

[supanova_question]

Global Economics: Effects on the Production Possibility Frontier Essay essay help online free: essay help online free

The production possibility frontier is a curve that shows the efficient combination of outputs; mostly two goods or services, that an economy can produce when all the available factors of production are used to their full potential (Dwivedi 525).

This curve illustrates the point at which the economy is most efficiently producing goods and services and consequently allocating resources in the best way possible. The goal of this paper is to explain the effects that recession and unemployment, increased technological advancements, and increased skilled labor will have on the product possibility curve.

A production level that is less than or greater than the position indicated by the production possibility curve, means that resources are being managed inefficiently. This inefficiency results into a dwindling production level than the expected. The product possibility curve is drawn on the right as a concave from the origin, or as a linear bulging in towards the origin. Shifts in the product possibility curve have their origin from changes in factor inputs like; labor, raw materials, and technological knowhow.

Effects of recession and a fifteen percent unemployment rise on the product possibility curve

The current global economic crises has brought with it a fifteen percent increase in unemployment levels and recession. During such periods of recession, most factors of production remain idle and unutilized. Sloman affirms that such factors like land, labor and capital remain under utilized if not laid off, at such times of recession (200). Land that could be used for business expansion and building more factories remains idle, while labor is cut down by laying down a good portion of workers as an effort to reduce costs. The demand of capital equipments is reduced as firms cut down their expenditures.

The consequences of these actions will be an inward shift in the product possibility curve from the original position, to anew point inside the curve. Production taking place inside the product possibility curve instead of taking place on it is observed in periods of increased unemployment levels. This indicates that the economy is not achieving its maximum production.

Effects of the increased technological advancement on the production possibility curve

Radical reforms in the education sector have resulted into improved educational standards in the United States. The improved educational standard has favored research and development and innovation, leading to a transformation in the way goods and services are produced and offered. These transformations coupled with the technological revolutions have made production, marketing and distribution of goods and services cheaper. The productivity of resources both labor and capital have also been increased by this technological improvement, leading to production of more goods per unit time using the same quantity of resources (Dwivedi 28). The consequence is that market prices will fall and products will be cheaper and affordable to consumers, and the product possibility curve will shift outwards indicating increased output.

Effects of the change in immigration laws to enhance the labor force

The recent changes in the immigration laws have placed restrictions on the number of immigrants entering the United States. It is now a requirement that the immigrants receiving visas to live and work in the United States have some skills, knowledge or talents that will enhance the work force.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In this era of technological revolution, the more skilled a country’s work force is the more competitive it will be. Outsourcing cheaper skilled labor is more cost effective in the long run, compared to internal sourcing and training. This precious skilled labor if utilized will lead to an outward shift in the product possibility frontier, indicating increased output.

In conclusion, an outward shift in the product possibility curve is the desire of every nation. When the factors of production such as labor and capital are employed effectively, improved output will be achieved and affordable products availed to the customers. The improvements in technological knowhow and the changes in immigration law have worked for the benefit of the United States resulting into improved output even in periods of recession.

Works Cited Dwivedi, D N. Microeconomics: Theory and Applications. New Delhi: Dorling Kindersley Publishers, 2008. Print.

Sloman, John. Essential of Economics. 2nd ed. Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall, 2001. Print.

[supanova_question]

Integrated Marketing Communication Research Paper best college essay help

Integrated marketing communication is a systematic process of managing good customer relations through effective communication. The process tries to ensure all procedures of communication and messages received are interlinked together. It mainly deals with interlinking all promotions tools in order to create harmonious relationship between the customers and the stakeholder.

Blizzard is cream product meant for people of all walks of life. It has been in the market for over 25 years now. Due to its long stay in the market, the product needs to adopt a unique marketing approach that would ensure that its market share remains with the targeted group.

Various techniques of communication should be applied in order to increase its audience and to reach as many customers as possible. Based on the stage of development of the product in the life-cycle of the product, the following combination of media approaches will be of great use to marketing Blizzard.

Use of media such as radio and television which are mostly used by many people this will ensure that a wide group of people will be reached by the information. Magazines and newspapers which have a wide popularity should be applied as a mean of communication, this will ensure that must people will read about the product also a lot of information about the product will be given in details. Internet is another good means of communication that can effectively be used to reach many youths across the nation.

The use of internet will enable the company to reach even those outside the locality of dairy Queens as far as sales are concerned. The advertisement by use of the internet can also incorporate social media which would promote the awareness of the product among the youths as they are known to be heavy consumers of the social media.

To promote the product, it is important to adopt a marketing approach that will ensure that the product achieves the targeted sales. The marketing mix that will be appropriate for the product will utilize four tools of the traditional five tools of marketing mix. The four tools as identified by Armstrong and Kotler, (2009), are advertising, sales promotion, public relations and finally direct marketing. Personal selling is not appropriate due to the small units of the product in question.

To promote the product it should be marketed to the specified niche whereby all efforts are concentrated towards the likes of the identified group. Blizzards do well among the youths, young couples and young families. The product shall therefore be marketed to this group by use of trendy adverts that captures the attention of the identified group. The advertisement shall be used to promote a good relationship of the target customers and the products.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More To promote public relations, the company can also sponsor various events that the target groups are expected to attend. This would improve the product image among the people. In such events, the company can also use sales promotion to ensure that the overall performance of the product is good. As noted by Immonen, (2008), a good marketing mix must be able to address the desires of majority of the customers.

The identified marketing mix meets this criterion as it focuses mostly on what will please the target group. The identified approaches also may be aligned to the fast moving members of generation Y as well as young youths who are main consumers of the identified product. With such an approach, Dairy Queen can remain sure that the relevance of the identified product in the market remains high.

References Armstrong, G., A. and Kotler, P. (2009). Marketing: an introduction. 9th Ed. New York: Cengage

Immonen, A. (2008). Product Lifecycle Management. New York: Springer.

[supanova_question]

The Novel: Remarque’s all quiet on the Western Front Essay custom essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Discussion

Conclusion

Bibliography

Footnotes

Introduction “All quiet on the Western Front” is a novel that was written by Erich Maria Remarque. Remarque was a German war novelist born in 1898 in Osnabruck, Germany. This novel was published in 1929. It depicts Remarque’s experience in the World War 1. The main aim of the novel was to explain and bring out the generation that was negatively affected by the war. Paul Baumer is the narrator of the story. He narrates his part in the war in episode form as the war advanced and taking new ways and directions day after day.

Baumer was a 20-year-old German soldier who took part in the war and ended up seeing how the war was disastrous to the youth. He had just completed high school and had joined the military in Germany. Baumer and other young men end up been hopeless about the future. The aim of this essay is to analyze what led German youths to war and how they ended up been affected by the same war. In addition, I will examine at the lessons that were learned from the war.[1]

Discussion There are many reasons that led the youth in Germany into joining the war. One of the reasons that made the youth take part in the war was betrayal by their parents, teachers and the government. The parents as it is put are always accusing young people who do not participate in some things such as war. They even call them cowards and so they find it very painful. The parents’ knew very well that the war would be a misfortune but did not care at all.

They pressurized the youth to take part in the war and this was very wrong, as the role of parents is always to guide and help young people. In an example Paul goes home, a sergeant- major condemns Paul for not saluting him, and yet he has spent his time in wars killing enemies and trying to survive. The young generation was helpless and it did not receive any positive concern from the older generation.

The young generation did not share any traditional values with the older generation and the joy of the older generation was seeing the young people take part in the war. It became the work of the young people to fight for their country and to protect the older generation. Therefore, it is very clear that betrayal by parents made the young people to engage themselves in the war so that they could prove that they are not cowards.[2]

Teachers also pressurized the young people to engage in the war. The schoolmaster is the one who urged Paul and his classmates Muller, Kropp and Leer to join the military. At the first encounter, many young men were killed and Paul puts the blame on the Head teacher who made them join the military. When Paul is already in the military, the head teacher argues that he knows more about the military and is operations than Paul who is already a member does.

This and other arguments are only intended to provoke the youth to engage in the war. It makes no sense to say that you know more about a profession you have never been in than a person who is already in that profession, so the teachers were only pressurizing the youth to join up in the war. The teachers were also telling the young men that they should put all that they have been taught and trained into practice. This was only aimed at wanting the young men to join up in the war.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More With increased inhumanity in the war, the young soldiers were eager to join the military in order to save life. Paul and his friends were keenly observing what was happening day after day. They saw that many people were losing life and this hardened their position in the military hence fighting without looking back. There were mass destructions that were not pleasing such as inured soldiers that had their noses cut and their eyes poked out.

On another occasion, they found men who were hanged and others who were skinned alive. This and many other horrific incidents made the young men furious and they then opted to fight no matter what comes. The feeling of humanity therefore compelled the young people to join in the war. In addition, nature compelled the young soldiers to join up the war. Observing all that was happening, just like any other human being, the young men offered their hand in the war.[3]

Another reason that made the young soldiers join in the war was comradeship. As one of them joined up in the war, others were also compelled to join due to friendship and unity. They could encourage each other even in hopeless situations and they became closer to each other even than they were with their own relatives. Even when some of their friends died, they did not show any signs of getting weak and they opted to fight even more to overcome the feelings of loneliness.

Many of the consequences of the war to the young men were negative. The young soldiers who survived in the war became hopeless and they saw no good in life. This was because of losing friends and the horrific episodes they came across. Incidents such as seeing people die on their sight, other injured soldiers with missing body parts made them hopeless, and they were discouraged of living in such a world.

They remained lonely as many of their friends died in the war and others got lost in due course. The young men also developed negative attitudes towards the profession. Many of them were regretting why they had opted to join the military. They were discouraged by the war and even other young men who were hoping to join the military lost morale to do so.[4]

Many of the young men who survived the war had many injuries. Some had some of their body parts cut off and other internal injuries. These sufferings were very painful to them and their living was threatened. Some ended in active euthanasia to get relieved from the pains that were de-moralizing to live with. The young people also developed negative attitudes towards teachers and parents who had provoked them to join up in the war referring to them as cowards.

They had blamed the government for not taking other options apart from war, which they new very well would have, negative consequences. Since most of the soldiers in Germany were not ready to stop fighting, they were threatened of being reduced and in the process with some losing their jobs. The young jobless ex-soldiers began engaging in other bad things such as street fights that threatened the country’s peace.

We will write a custom Essay on The Novel: Remarque’s all quiet on the Western Front specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More After the war, technology experienced a great boost as each country opted to get better machinery for use. These technological advances made the government to invest much in the companies. This meant that much of the country’s money was directed towards technological advancement leading to negative effects on other developmental aspects. The young soldiers’ living standards were lowered as life became expensive. This threatened their living and some were ended up in absolute poverty.

From the novel, we learn that war should not come in as a way of solving conflicts. Parties who are involved in a conflict should mediate and negotiate to come up with solutions. We clearly see the negative consequences of war on the young soldiers who remained hopeless and lonely.

War should never be repeated again in the world. We also learn that it is not good to encourage young people to take part in war such as the teachers and parents did. The military should also be viewed positively as a body of enhancing peace, maintaining order and imposing laws and not as a body to engage in wars.[5]

Conclusion This novel by Remarque is a good example to reveal the disadvantages of war. The parents in calling the young people cowards when they did not join up in the war were a way of provoking them to join it. In addition, the government and the teachers played part in provoking the young soldiers to engage into the war.

The war made the profession to be viewed negatively as most of the young soldiers were regretting why they had joined the military. Lives of the young men after the war became difficult with injuries and increased living standards. War should never be encouraged but peaceful means should be used to solve conflicts.

Bibliography Bloon, Harold. Erich Maria Remarque’s all quiet on the western front. New York: InfoBase Publishing, 2009.

Wagener, Hans. Understanding Erich Maria Remarque. Columbia: University of South Carolina Press, 1991.

Waine, Anthony. Changing cultural tastes: writers and the popular in modern Germany. New York: Berghahn, 2007.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Novel: Remarque’s all quiet on the Western Front by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Footnotes Harold, Bloon. Erich Maria Remarque’s all quiet on the western front. New York: InfoBase Publishing, 2009.

Hans, Wagener. Understanding Erich Maria Remarque. Columbia: University of South Carolina Press, 1991.

Anthony, Waine. Changing cultural tastes: writers and the popular in modern Germany. New York: Berghahn, 2007.

Anthony, Waine. Changing cultural tastes: writers and the popular in modern Germany. New York: Berghahn, 2007.

Harold, Bloon. Erich Maria Remarque’s all quiet on the western front. New York: InfoBase Publishing, 2009.

[supanova_question]

The Right Marketing Strategy Role for Any Organization Research Paper essay help free: essay help free

Choosing the right marketing strategy is very important for any organization that wants to establish a competitive advantage in the and in the process increase its sales. There are three fundamental marketing strategies commonly used by business organizations to penetrate the market and at the same achieve a competitive advantage in the market.

These strategies include the product differentiation strategy, the cost leadership strategy and the niche marketing strategy (Armstrong

[supanova_question]

Application of IT in Business Organizations Essay (Critical Writing) writing essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Application of IT in Business Organizations

Conclusion

References

Introduction Most organizations have adopted and embraced the use of Information Technology (IT) in their conduct of business. IT has made the conduct of business easier and smooth for many organizations. However, aligning IT with business operations remains a big issue for many organizations (Boom, 2010). Alignment in this sense means adopting an IT strategy that suits the overall business strategy for an organization.

IT strategy is now a very important tool in management and formulation of overall strategies in an organization. This is the reason why most organizations now have a full IT department that is well supported in order to work in conjunction with all other departments. Alignment of IT strategy with business strategy remains to be a big challenge because of the debate on the role of IT in the business (Betz, 2002).

Application of IT in Business Organizations An IT department in an organization can adopt various strategies. One of the strategies is the table stake strategy in which the IT department is empowered to support only basic operations of the business in the cheapest method possible. Another strategy is giving the IT department critical capability whereby the department supports basic operations as well as finds ways to boost the competitive advantage over other competitors (Dubey, 1999).

Under this strategy, the IT department has a wider responsibility of gaining competitive advantage, growth in revenues and enhancing overall business performance. The looming debate is whether adoption of an IT strategy that maintains a cutting-edge position on technology is the most effective way of supporting any overall business strategy.

I agree that an IT strategy that maintains a cutting edge in technology over competitors is the most effective way to support any overall business strategy.

Primarily, any overall business strategy does not require the job to be just done. In the increasing competitiveness and globalization of the business environment, organizations must ensure that they perfect what they do (Sutherland, 1991). An IT department that is focused on maintaining a cutting edge is the best to ensure that the organization achieves perfection rather than getting things ‘just done.’

IT acts as a competitive differentiator and a strategic asset that is needed especially in this era when businesses are keen on value addition (Boom, 2010; Betz, 2002). In order to beat competition, an organization must ensure that there is creation of value in the organization. Since all organizations have adopted the use of IT in creation of value, an organization that wishes to out-compete the competitors should use an IT strategy focused at maintaining a competitive edge over the competitors.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The role of IT in an organization is perceived to be beyond the support of basic operations of the organization. The application of IT in a firm processes should be redesigned in order to ensure value addition. Businesses and organizations operate in a dynamic environment with many changes.

For any business strategy to be able to work, a business must understand and forecast the future. In order to be able to perform the above functions that are critical in any overall business strategy, innovation in IT department is required. This innovation can only be achieved through maintaining a cutting-edge position in terms of IT in the industry (Dubey, 1999).

Any overall business strategy must be developed with the understanding that the environment of operation is very dynamic in terms of industry trends, customer requirements, employee requirements and general changes in the business. Overall business strategy should incorporate these trends in order to be able to gain a competitive edge over other businesses.

An IT strategy that aims at supporting the basic business operations will not be sufficient to provide support to formulate and implement an effective business strategy given the dynamic environment (Sutherland 1991). An IT strategy that focuses on maintaining innovation and efficiency is thus the most effective tool to support the overall business strategies since it will create a competitive edge in innovation for the firm over its competitors.

The formulation, implementation and evaluation of overall business strategy require the use of IT. The effectiveness of the IT department in the firm should be maintained in order to be of help to the firm. A good IT department should thus ensure that it maintains a competitive edge in order to ensure effectiveness in formulation, implementation and review of business strategy (Boom, 2010).

Conclusion In conclusion, an IT department especially one that maintains a competitive edge strategy in innovation and efficiency is hard to set up and maintain. However, such IT strategy is the most effective way to support any business strategies.

IT is a strategic tool in an organization and the better the IT department is, the better the overall strategies and competitiveness of the business will be. IT supports all departments in an organization. Thus, an IT strategy that emphasizes on maintaining a cutting edge will lead to efficiency in the organization hence effectiveness of the overall business strategy.

We will write a custom Critical Writing on Application of IT in Business Organizations specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More References Betz, F. (2002). Executive Strategy: Strategic Management and Information Technology. New York: John Wiley and Sons, 2002

Boom, C. (2010). An Introduction to Business Information Management. Brussels: Asp / Vubpress / Upa.

Dubey, S.S. (1999). IT Strategy and Management. New Delhi: PHI Learning Pvt. Ltd.

Sutherland, E. (1991). Business strategy and Information Technology. London: Taylor

[supanova_question]

Prohibiting the Utilization of the Tobacco Report (Assessment) cheap essay help: cheap essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Strategies

Public Relations and Communications theory

Relationships with Theories of Public Relations

Research Needs

Ethical and Legal Considerations

Bibliography

Footnotes

Introduction Tobacco is one of the plants relied upon by a majority of farmers in making their livelihoods. Its proceeds are channeled into other investments that aim at improving the standards of living. Banning its usage in public means that the product will be less consumed, leading to losses for producers and reduced income for both manufacturers and the government. Prohibiting the utilization of the product in public is not safe for the economy.

Any form of control is suicidal to free market economy. Government revenues rely partly on taxation of tobacco and at the same time, the sector accommodates a number of individuals who would otherwise be jobless. Because of huge incomes generated from the product and the role it plays in national economic development, the bill prohibiting its use in public should never be allowed to see the day.

Strategies Strategies are broad statements of action to be employed to attain the aims. Strategies for this plan will describe how, in concept, the goals are to be realized. The set strategies will provide guidelines and themes for general endeavors to persuade various stakeholders to reject the bill.

The strategies will be aiming at short and long term goals. The basis at which the strategies are set is determined by the nature of the campaign and the audience. Long-term strategies for this plan will be to come up with a national publicity campaign that will try to contain the influence of the bill seeking to cut down the use of tobacco.

For this case, the public relations officer develops key themes that will be driving the plan. Short term strategies for this campaign pertains to matching various element suggestions to magazines, coming up with a sequence of media discharges, kick starting the plan with a national media conference and finally launch a new website. The persuasive strategy, which is a long-term strategy, for this plan will be to alter the present outlooks, develop the accessible ones, or crystallize the hidden viewpoints.

Public Relations and Communications theory People do not robotically concentrate on every communication that is being broadcast to them, especially nowadays when there are numerous messages as illustrated by Harrison.[1] The valuable style that will enable this plan have specific aim is the exploitation of medium and application of gratification theory of communication. The foundation of the theory is that the messaging procedure is interactive.

The addressees are dynamic and choose messages that are expected to be constructive and/or pleasing in various means. In manipulating this plan and selecting communication medium, Grunig and Hunt’s theory of active and passive audiences is taken into consideration.[2] Usually, billboards reach submissive addressees, radio broadcasting and TV broadcast, placards, attractive catchphrases, spectacular cinemas, bumper markers, and exceptional entertainment proceedings.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More These techniques do not need much of participation or attentiveness on the part of the addressees. Flyers, exhaustive journal articles, PowerPoint staging, DVDs, symposiums and, progressively, the Internet, are to be employed for lively information searching publics. Unreceptive addressees are at the understanding juncture of the espousal progression, while lively addressees are at the curiosity, assessment or audition phase.

Relationships with Theories of Public Relations The plan will employ the four public relations models as postulated by Grunig and Hunt. The press agentry model has a sole purpose of passing out propaganda. The nature of communication will be one way hence truth is not an issue. This theory does not rely much on research though it is required to pass out the intended message.

The plan will as well utilize public information model where by the aim will be to disseminate information, the nature of communication being one way also, implying that truth would not be essential.[3] The type of research conducted before the model is applied is little. It would rely on readability tests and some other times surveys may be carried out. Communication will be two way but aiming at establishing trust through mutual understanding.

Research Needs Marston, Hendrix suggested that any plan should start with investigation, but then should shift to purposes, which are segregated into productivity needs and consequential objective. Productivity needs are messages the public relations attempt seeks to generate over the objective epoch.

For this plan, it would be to modify people’s attitudes towards tobacco usage. Impact objectives have various partitions: informational intentions that is, message disclosure, conception and maintenance. For this need, this plan targets to collect enough data that would convince the audience then they would be released constantly through viable medium. The attitudinal objectives are formation, fortification and adjustments of beliefs. The plan ought to find out how the public perceives the bill in relation to cigarette smoking.

Ethical and Legal Considerations To be viewed as publicly accountable, this organization will have a say in societal, political and financial wellbeing of the society. It will participate in public relations to hoist management’s consciousness on the organization’s task to the entire publics, both interior and exterior. Newsom, Turk and Kruckeberg identified that most qualified PR practitioners are aware that they have moral liability to several diverse publics.[4] Other organizations have freedom of reasonable contest.

Bibliography Grunig, J

[supanova_question]

Argument for alignment of business with IT Essay (Critical Writing) essay help: essay help

Table of Contents Author’s arguments

Critical review

Conclusion

References

Author’s arguments In his article, Be What You Are Not, Carr (2004) presents his arguments in support of the need of flexibility among IT companies. According to him, the world of IT is rapidly changing and managers, investors, and entrepreneurs need not be rigid but to change as the IT changes. Carr continues to point out that many companies continue to use the internet by applying business strategies that are traditional where they just want to sustain their market advantage.

Many businesses continue to take a defensive position in the market in relation to the use of IT rather than to adjust as technology changes. If a certain company pioneers in the use of on-line services for its products and at first attracts many customers, management of such company thinks it will continue enjoying the same advantage for long and therefore, they put mechanisms to protect this. However, according to Carr, this amount to building castles in the air, which cannot work.

Within a very short, all the rival companies would have adopted the same technology in their services and within no time, they will have advanced the same technology thus leaving the company that came up with the idea lagging behind in the market. As the author argues, in the world of IT, there is nothing like sustainable advantage to the first mover in a certain technology. Every technique is easily replicated and investors will always run where there is large profit.

The author gives several examples of online companies such as Yahoo and American Online that have managed to sustain the advantage of first mover in the IT market, but according to him, those are exceptional cases. Indeed, those companies have also constantly adopted change to sustain their advantage in the market.

Critical review The field of IT is changing so fast and only entrepreneurs, managers, and investors who keep pace with these changes can reap the resultant benefits. As Wang (2010) puts it, every organization is in a race chasing the newest technology (p.63). I agree with Carr argument that, there is nothing like sustainable advantage for the first mover in the field of IT and companies must be always ready to be what they are not. Many companies in the recent past have lost their market share for failing to keep in pace with IT development.

Though at the beginning they were making huge profit by being the first mover in a certain technology, within a short span, their secrets are replicated by rival companies, and after sometime, they find themselves lagging in the market rather than leading. A good example of these companies is CDNow that was the first mover in selling CD over the internet. It made huge sales at the beginning and everybody thought it would continue reaping the same profits.

However, after a short period, Amazon came up with a technique to sell music on-line rather than the CD. Amazon also came up with other services such as online bookselling that strengthened its position in the market compared to CDNow (O’Brien

[supanova_question]

A Musical Analysis of the song “As I Lay me Down” by Sophie B. Hawkins Essay college application essay help

The Sensuous level The song “As I lay me down” captures the emotive senses of the listener purely by the introductory combination of the guitar and the piano. The musical ‘power’ in the song – its ability to draw one to pause and listen to the song even when the listener is engaged in other matters, is almost tangible.

The tone of the music almost sounds like a pleasurable lullaby that an adult would want to get soothed by. The song begins by the sound of guitar strings followed by a piano that captures the listener’s attention. The melodious vocal voice of the singer then follows, complementing the introductory instruments mentioned in synchronous harmony that makes it almost natural to want to sing along to the song. A dedication to her father’s memory, the song’s reflective tone makes it even more captivating.

The Expressive or Emotional Level “As I lay me down” invokes the feelings of memory for departed loved ones. As mentioned earlier, the song is the composer’s dedication to her late father. The song thus generates memorial feelings for loved ones the listener may have lost, either a family member or close friends.

This was clearly the intention of the composer and this intent is clear in the musical lyrics of the composition as well as the tone the song creates, and the mood the song evokes. Paradoxically, the song does not create the feelings of loss and heartache because of the feelings of memory of the dearly departed, but induces feelings of love and appreciation for those dearly loved who are still living.

It makes the listener appreciate his or her loved ones who are still alive and close. Depending on the state of mind of the listener at the particular time of listening to this composition, the emotions created in the listener tend to swing from memory of the departed loved one(s), to love and appreciation for the living loved one(s).

The song can be especially important in giving the listener a sense of appreciation, with the message generally being that those around us should be shown love and appreciation while the listener still has the privilege of enjoying the loved one’s company. The song dwells on the special love that exists between a father and his children (especially daughters), and the singer magnifies the seemingly ‘simple’ role – powerful in the eyes of the daughter – the father used to play in ‘laying the daughter to sleep’.

The song is able to pack a lot of emotion in the act of a father laying his child or children to sleep. The song has been used as a soundtrack in many movies that seek to express the paradoxical emotions of saying goodbye to a loved one, and welcoming back a loved one after years of being apart. The song has been regularly touted as one of the best soundtracks for a movie.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Musical Content Level The piano and the guitar are the major instruments that are used in this composition. Sophie B. Hawkins’ unmistakable voice then follows the introduction, and many of her ardent listeners can easily identify her slightly husky and powerful voice as she begins to sing.

The piano and guitar, which play short notes, have been slightly tweaked and stretched in this song, because the intro has the guitar and the piano playing slightly higher durations than their typical short strokes and sounds respectively; an indication of the expertise of the instrumentalists.

All the instruments accompany the singer’s voice in a repeated rhythm that gives the composition a pattern that a listener can easily follow. The guitar is more prevalent than the piano in this song and the singer herself is an accomplished guitarist and plays the instrument to accompany her vocals in the song.

[supanova_question]

The Portuguese Financial Sustainability of Social Security System Research Paper custom essay help: custom essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Background Literature

Data

Research analysis

Results explanation

Further analysis

Summary and conclusion

Works Cited

Introduction Just like any other part of the world, Portugal has a well-established social security system, which many of her people depend on for their welfare. Like in the US, social security system in Portugal covers a wide range of programs. Some of these programs include retirement pension scheme that covers employees from both public and private sectors, social assistance program that includes benefits for the unemployed and their dependencies among other programs.

The social security system in Portugal experiences problems such as non-contributory coverage, dealing with many survivors and disability beneficiaries (Barrows 25). Generally, the system experiences a problem of dealing with large number of people requiring assistance – an unrelenting problem that seems to affect many of the social security systems across the world.

Large proportion of inflow comes from PAYE funds, as it is the case of the United States. Taxes from the payroll can be termed as the backbone of the Portuguese social security system; however, there is a problem based on ‘baby boomers’ experience. After Second World War, populations across Europe blossomed and such large populations joined the social security systems, which also thrived.

However, as the ‘baby boomers’ generation approaches retirement, the current working population is smaller and cannot sustain the current social security system, firmly established by the ‘baby boomers.’ Moreover, many contributors do not see any positive relationship between what they contribute and what they get at the end of the day. Indeed, according to many employees, the taxes reduce their private savings and disposable income and hence the capital formation.

This paper will analyze financial sustainability of the Portuguese social security system mainly by comparing the revenue contributed and the cost required to maintain it. The research will use secondary data to analyze the trend of income and expenditures of the system for a period of fifty years from 1999 and 2050.

Background Literature Social security system in Portugal comprises of three components; family allowances benefit systems and social welfare allowances for citizens. The allowance component compensates citizens when their earnings decline due to the following reasons; unemployment, sickness, disability, death, old age, and work accidents just to mention a few. Employees, both self-employed and the employed, benefit from this system.

Non-working and unemployed individuals however, have the right to subscribe if they so wish. For one to enjoy the benefits of social security system, he/she must meet two conditions. First, one must register and secondly, the individual must meet his/her monthly contributions just like the employed.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Though the Portuguese social security system has improved over the years, it continues to face many problems. Financial instability is the major problem. Those people who contribute each month to the social security system suspect misappropriation of these funds; hence, they do not get the expected benefits from this scheme. Many employees would therefore prefer some structural reforms in the system for it to meet their needs effectively. Portugal needs to change her current scheme of ‘pay as go used go’ and adopt a capitalization system.

In this type of system, every employee has his or her own account where all the contributions made goes into this personal account. When the employee attains the age of retirement, then he or she can withdraw all the money deposited in the personal account. This will help to address dissatisfaction by many employees who question the efficiency of the current system. As Barrow claims, capitalization regime will ensure direct relationship between the benefits and contribution.

This will eliminate the perception that the contribution to the social security system is just as tax deducted on the labor income (26). Capitalization regime will ensure that there is no sharing of the social security system’s funds from one single pool. Every employee will sustain his or her pool and in case of anything, he/she will withdraw the money from the personal account.

Failure to do that will perpetuate the worsening the financial position of the system as more and more beneficiaries depend on insufficient funds contributed by just a small proportion of the population now and in future. As Pereira da Silva, Calado, and Maria put it, there is a looming financial problem facing the social security system in Portugal; the government needs to address it urgently before it gets out of hand (418).

There is a large gap between the benefits and the declining rate of contribution and subscriptions. The active population does not benefit from their huge contributions to the social security system. The founders of the Social security trust fund in 1995 aimed to reinforce the social security system, but this has not solved the problem of financial instability.

The government also introduced partial capitalization program in 1989 in which it invested the contributed funds in the different ways such as in financial markets. This also aimed to stabilize the financial status of this system. The returns from these investments would cater for future raise in costs. According to Pereira da Silva, Calado and Maria these stabilization funds created by the government are not in a position to counter the financial challenges facing the system and therefore it ought not to be the focus of the stakeholders (418).

As mentioned earlier in the research, it is not Portugal alone whose social security systems are facing challenges. Yasar argues that social security systems in US also face the same challenges. Economists attribute the US challenges to the increased number of baby boomers attaining the age of retirement (843).

We will write a custom Research Paper on The Portuguese Financial Sustainability of Social Security System specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Currently the debate is going on in US among the reformers and other groups over the appropriate reforms in the social security system to meet the raising demand of beneficiaries. Reformists are advocating for the change of the system and adoption of a fully funded retirement plan with clear definitions. Other groups are arguing that demographic problems, which justify the privatization of the system, are wrong.

Irrespective of which group is right, the fact remains that there is a challenge in the social security system in US which may even become worse in the future as more and more people attain the age of retirement. Puckett argues that managing social security system is a challenge not only for today but also for yesterday and tomorrow (25).Thus even as we analyze the case of the Portuguese social security system it is important that we have it in mind that these systems are facing challenges in all the parts of the world.

Data To analyze the financial sustainability of the social security system in Portugal, this study will use secondary sources of data mainly from the international association for the study of insurance economics 2004 among other sources. This study chose these sources of the data for various reasons, which include; first, the sources are reliable and thus provide reliable data for valid conclusion.

Secondly, this data is very relevant to the topic of the study since it provide all the required information about the Portuguese social security system. Data about the contributions and distribution of benefits in this social security system is very relevant to this study, which these sources adequately provide.

This data will make it easy to analyze financial sustainability of the Portuguese social security system by comparing the rate of growth of revenue collected from the citizens and growth rate of the fund’s beneficiaries. The data clearly portrays the gap between the rate of fund’s growth and cost rate for easier comparisons. The data also compare the difference between synthetic cost and income rate, which helps to predict the future of this social security system.

The data also helps to show the projected accumulated funds as well as the growth trend for the next forty or so years. This will help to show or measure whether this system will become more sustainable or less sustainable in future. In addition, this data will help to show the account of the social security benefits to the current and future’s GDP of Portugal. All this will assist in coming up with a valid conclusion in this research.

Research analysis From the various tables given in this research, it is possible to observe the trend of social security system in Portugal. To start with, Table 1 shows the comparison of rate of revenue and rate of cost from 1999 to 2050. From this table, we can observe the following; accumulated asset funds will attain their maximum level by 2012 where the rate of revenue growth will be approximately 0.285 per cent.

The rate of revenue has been growing consistently from 1999 though by a small margin until 2012 when it reaches the maximum point. Thereafter the growth rate of revenue starts to decline from maximum level attained in 2012 to about 0.26 percent by the year 2020. This trend remains constant for the next 30 years; table predicts the same rate of revenue growth by 2050.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Portuguese Financial Sustainability of Social Security System by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Contrary to growth rate of revenue, the cost rate grows steadily throughout the research period and there is no record of decline in growth. The growth in cost rate in 1999 is 0.24 per cent and continues to grow consistently year after another until it reaches a maximum level of 0.36 percent by 2050. The current growth rate of revenue is 0.34 percent, which is a large increase from 0.24 percent in 1999. This rate does not fluctuate much in the next forty years since the projected growth in the rate of cost by 2050 is 0.36 per cent.

Again, this table notes the trend in differences of cost and revenue. From 1999 to 2005, the rate of growth in revenue exceeds the rate of growth in cost. This means that during this period, the rate of growth of contributions collected in the system was less that the number of beneficiaries.

However, from 2008 onward, the rate of growth of cost is more than the rate of growth of revenue. This means that the rate of growth of beneficiaries of the social security funds is exceeding the rate of contribution. This may lead to financial problems in the system.

Results explanation The data portrayed in this table shows a move from equilibrium to disequilibrium since 2008. There is acute imbalance between the growth rate of contributions and beneficiaries of the social security funds. The data shows that before 2008, the system was sustainable and it could support all the beneficiaries since there was more revenue than cost.

When the beneficiaries started to exceed the contributors in 2008, the financial however instability started. Though the country never experienced population boom like other countries, which had participated in the Second World War, the number of children born after the war were many.

This generation started attaining the age of retirement in 2010. Predictions show that this trend is likely to remain for the next ten years. This has already started exerting pressure to the social security system funds since the amount going out is more than the amount coming in.

The subscriptions and contributions have already started to decline as more and more members continue to retire. By 2025, economists expect that the benefits of the funds will not be enough to cover all the benefits, management and the administration costs. Further projections show that by 2050 this deficit may reach to about 38.5 per cent.

This will be equivalent to about 2.25 percent of the country’s total GDP. This means that to minimize this deficit, there is need for some action to close the gap between the rate of revenue and costs. Two options are possible, either to increase the rate of contributions or decrease the rate of expenditures. The government may reduce the rate of expenditure by 0.7 percent or increase contribution rate by 10 per cent in order to attain equilibrium by 2050.

These two options are possible but not easy especially on the side of the government. For instance, to increase the rate of contribution, government will need to improve its efficiency in recruiting and collecting more contributions from the citizens or coming up with a legal provision that will raise the amount contributed by each member.

The latter will have an opportunity cost to the economy in terms of savings and investments. The government may also consider implementing the two methods simultaneously to increase the amount of contribution to the social security system. The second option of reducing the expenditure by 0.7 percent will also be costly to the government and the citizens.

Lowering the benefits may result into suffering of some people. Members of the social security schemes may not get the expected amount after retirement even after dedicating themselves to contribute during their working days due to shortage of the funds. The system may not be able to finance fully some cases such as accident, sickness, and maternity of the active contributors due to this policy. This option will also have some consequences, which may be too costly to the members and the government.

Further analysis Table 2 compares the rate of fund’s growth with the ratio of the fund. The rate of fund’s growth reaches the maximum point in 2005 and starts to decline consistently until it reaches the lowest point in 2020 where it shows a negative growth. From there the growth rate remains constant at 0 percent showing no growth in the next thirty years up to 2050.

The ratio of the fund grows consistently until it reaches a maximum in 2011. It then starts to decline until it reaches 0 percent in 2035. The high rate of unemployment is the attribute to the decline of the growth rate of fund. Increased number of employees who are retiring can also lead to low contribution rate. At the beginning, the fund ratio is high since the number of people remitting their contribution is increasing but later the trend decrease as more people reach their age of retirement.

Table 3 compares the rate of growth of synthetic effective income and synthetic effective cost. Synthetic effective income increases steadily until it reaches a point where it starts to decline. It manifests the highest rate in 2040 and thereafter it starts to decline. The rate of synthetic effective cost increases steadily and reaches the maximum (30 percent) by 2050. The difference between the two rates decrease from positive side and then start to increase steadily on the negative side.

Effective income rate shows “taxable payroll to the income ratio and it will increase so long as the income of the employee is increasing” (Puckett 76). As a result, the rate increases despite the cost increase. The effective rate of cost shows the ratio of taxable payroll to expenditure and continues to increase steadily so long as the expenditures are increasing. The differences between the two rates change due to fluctuating income and expenditure for the entire research period.

Summary and conclusion From this study, it is evident that the current social security system in Portugal is not sustainable. The analysis of the data shows that by 2050, the deficit in the system will have risen to 38.5 percent, a significant proportion of the total GDP of Portugal.

The gap between the growth rate of revenue contributed and the cost demanded from the funds has continued to increase over the years and projections show its increase in future. This condition may be attributed to high rate of retirement as large proportion of the population, which was born after Second World War, currently attain the age of retirement.

Other factors such as high rate of unemployment have contributed to this problem; there are few people joining the system to increase the revenue collection. The government has come up with various programs to address the problem; however, the outcome is of little significance. Initiatives such as investing the contributed funds in various ways have not helped much in addressing the problem.

To address the problem, the government may either look for ways to increase the contributions such as recruiting more members and increasing the rate of contribution per member or coming up with ways to reduce the expenditure of the social security system. The two options are not easy for the government given that they have their opportunity costs in terms of saving and investment.

However, an urgent action is necessary to prevent the situation from deteriorating in future; actually if unchecked, the situation will degenerate into a crisis and the retiring will go home uncompensated as the system crumbles under the weight unsustainable demands due to poor policymaking. Nevertheless, a swift well-planned and executed strategy will ensure that the social security system in Portugal is sustainable for now and in future.

Works Cited Barrows, Jen. “Portugal’s Social Security System: The Efficacy of Reforms.” Yale Economic Review 6.1 (2010): 25-27. Print.

Pereira da Silva, Carlos, Calado, Joao, and Maria, Teresa.“The Financial Sustainability of the Portuguese Social Security System.” Geneva Papers on Risk

[supanova_question]

Characteristics of “The gentleman,” according to Confucius Report (Assessment) essay help free

The gentleman, according to Confucius is simply a man of virtue. Confucius teachings explained the characteristics of a gentleman as a superior man, a man at his best, and a portrayer of authentic manhood. Meaning is added to the relationship between human beings referred to as Jen by Confucius by incorporating the idealness of the terms of human relationships (Chun-Tzu). Confucius states that there are five major characteristics that make up a true gentleman which are humility, sincerity, graciousness, magnanimity, and diligence.

According to him, an individual who can practice all five of them can be considered as a superior man/ a portrayer of true manhood or put a gentleman. From the teachings of Confucius, there is no indication that a gentleman looks upon his endeavors and looks down upon those below him; but rather a gentleman’s endeavors pull others towards him (Damrosch et al. 600).

Confucius says that humility and sincerity make others put their trust in a person. He states further that humbleness comes with respect; being magnanimous attracts many to one’s side and getting along with one’s subordinates you need to be gracious.

Confucius’ understanding of his relationship to others whether above or below him is pegged on the characteristics that refer to a person as a gentleman, a man of virtue. According to him, a man of this nature that encompasses all these characteristics is a force that can bring change to society and turn it into a peaceful environment, the state it was and is meant to be.

Another understanding of his relationship with others is found in his belief that each person within the society should act his/her proper part so that society would be better organized. He believes and states that the ruler of an empire should be a ruler while the subject a subject; the father should be a father while the son a son. This shows that he believes in everyone having a specific role to play and should not take up another’s role (Damrosch et al. 602).

Reading Journal Prompt for the Quran: Experience reading the Quran The reading in the Quran that touches on Heaven, Hell, and Death is a complex through a straightforward recitation to understand the passage of reading. After the reading, one is left wondering whether the characters and events mentioned and referred to extensively in the text are realistic.

There are character and events that come out vividly and leave a yearning of meeting them and experiencing them. This yearning to experience does not mean that the character or events in any way appeal to the reader but the reader feels that for better understanding, it would be better if they were to meet with the character and interact.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More From the study of the Quran, it becomes evident that recital of the Holy Qur’an appears to have psychological and physiological benefits. It “appears to reduce a reader’s perceived stress levels, heart rate and blood pressure” (Damrosch et al. 289). This feeling can’t be found with the recital of secular materials written in the same lingo as the Qur’an. Other texts that have the same effect as the Quran are religious materials such as the bible. The Quran describes heaven and hell figuratively, and it further states when this occurs within the text.

The complexity of the reading and where most readers find it hard to understand is on the issue of death. The Quran explains death as a great mystery to most people. However, scholars/students of the Quran can understand the deeper meaning of death. We learn that death is exactly like sleeping, complete with dreams. One point that was especially hard to understand is the aftermath. A point of conflict is whether the righteous die or go straight to heaven (Damrosch et al. 290).

Works Cited Damrosch, David et al. The Longman Anthology of World Literature: The Ancient World, the Medieval Era, and the Early Modern Period. Canada: Pearson Education Canada, 2008. Print.

[supanova_question]

How Equiano defines himself by the time he is writing his book Essay essay help

Introduction Equiano Olaudah has had a life full of challenges right from his early childhood. From the time Equiano was kidnapped when he was left at home, he shares about his life as a slave and it is rather clear that the experience was dreadful as the reader is able to see and understand clearly how the slaves are treated when being transported to become slaves in foreign land; hunger, starvation, brutality and death are major problems faced by the slaves (Equiano, 89).

The first chapter of this book by Equiano makes an introduction about his origin country and it also gives a description of his background information. Thus, in order to understand better about Equiano’s life, it is important we briefly focus on his basic information as presented in this book because it provides the reader with a good basis for argument about the topic.

The narrative of Equiano’s life

Equiano was born in Africa in a country known as Benin, his family included seven members and Equiano was the youngest in the family that only had one sister; during his childhood, he was taught the art of war which he enjoyed doing until the age of eleven years when he was kidnapped together with his only sister and they were taken to a foreign land where they became slaves (Equiano, 26).

Equiano was sold to Mr. Pascal as a slave and it was here that he was given the name Gustavus Vassa as it was traditional for masters to give their slaves new names. Pascal sent Equiano to Britain and here, Equiano had a chance to visit places; most importantly he was sent to school in London where he learned how to write and read (Equiano, 127).

It is after this that Equiano visited other different countries and after several years, Equiano had a chance to come back to Britain where he made a very essential decision; he ventured into politics and become involved in legal procedures in efforts to campaign against slavery and slave trade. For this reason, Equiano made the first step in his major campaign by writing the book “The Interesting Narrative” which was aimed at sensitizing and campaigning against slavery.

Discussion How does Equiano define himself by the time he is writing his book?

Its is no doubt that, Equiano’s life is a concept full of dilemma for two major reasons; one, as we have already learned, Equiano was kidnapped and brought to Britain as a slave from Africa where he had a family, parents and siblings who all lived there.

Secondly, the question about his identity remains a dilemma since, when Equiano came to Britain, although he was a slave in the beginning, he had great opportunities and he became a very prominent person a factor that motivated him to make necessary social changes through campaigning against slavery.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In this regard, I am of the opinion that, Olaudah Equiano is an African and by the time he is writing this narrative book, it is no doubt that he is a supporter of the African heritage. As a critical reader, one can be able to see clearly from the beginning that, Equiano’s interesting narrative is captured from a home setting of the African background and as the book begins, it explains and makes a full description about the early child hood and life of Equiano which provides very basic information about his community and his society.

Equiano is enslaved and taken to the foreign country in which he comes face to face with a very different lifestyle and culture. However, Equiano takes great pain when he is in the foreign land considering what his fellow brothers and sister in Africa are undergoing. This clearly shows that, Equiano indentifies with Africa (Equiano, 110).

As Equiano narrates about his life in this book, he maintains and portrays a great aspect of African legacy and through out the book, he upholds African purity and further claims that, people in the Europe do not have high cultural qualities especially considering their flexible and dynamic way of life. Although, Equiano Olaudah grows in the middle of western ideas, it is no doubt that he also portrays numerous and desirable African cultural qualities and therefore making him to appear as a person who is proud of the African culture.

Additionally, based on his courage and fighting spirit, we are also able to observe that Equiano Olaudah is not happy neither is he contended about what is happening in Africa (slavery and slave trade). For this particular reason, Equiano becomes ambitious and he decides to campaign against the wide spread evil of slavery and slave trade which by then, is a common practice against Africans by people from the west. This incidence clearly shows his love for Africa and it also depicts his loyalty to his native home; Africa.

Conclusion Slavery was a practice that was wide spread in the world during the early period. Amongst the many slaves, Equiano also became a victim from the time he was very young. However, when he becomes of age, Equiano is well informed and he makes a decision to fight against the negative practice. “The interesting narrative” plays a major role in facilitating the war against slavery which is later abolished shortly after the death of Equiano Olaudah.

Reference Equiano, O. The Interesting Narrative of the Life of Olaudah Equiano. LinkedIn: Coffee-town Press, 2008.

[supanova_question]

The Difficulties in Exploiting Sea Floor Massive Sulfide Deposits Essay essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu

The discovery of underground mineral deposits is always seen as an opportunity for economic emancipation. However, the difficulties involved in exploring the minerals have been the greatest obstacles to the full exploration of sea floor mineral deposits such as sulphide.

The first challenge is in locating an active ridge spreading area. The location of an active hydrothermal activity is a very taunting task requiring the use of high resolution multi-beam sonar and a comprehensive mapping of the seafloor requiring the use of magnetic field sensors.

The possibility of encountering corrosive acidic fluids from vents is another great challenge experienced by seafloor miners. The situation becomes worse when the mining team does not have chemical and temperature sensors. The process of locating hydrothermal vents with sulfide deposits requires extensive underwater surveys with concrete photographic data.

Although many sulfide deposits have been discovered in international waters, the mineral has not been fully exploited because of the high cost involved in mining seafloor mineral deposits. The process of locating, characterization and final extraction is still very costly compared to land-based mining. There are very few mining companies all over the world with the high resolution equipment for mining underground mineral deposits such as sulfide.

There are a lot of risks involved in exploring deep sea sulfide deposits that are beyond the Exclusive Economic Zones. The financial risk is relatively high considering the fact that the economic prospects of deep sea mining in those zones are unpredictable. The regulatory environment is the other issue of concern in deep sea mining of sulfide.

There are no special regulations to govern deep sea mining in both international and territorial waters. For comprehensive exploration of deep sea sulfide deposits, in is necessary for regulations governing research, and all exploration activities to be put in place. Currently there are no regulatory codes for deep sea mining.

The International Seabed Authority has voluntary codes that are yet to be fully enforced. Countries with deep sea mineral deposits have to come up with the necessary regulations to facilitate the exploration of deep sea minerals like sulfide. Environmentalists have always been against deep sea mining by claiming that deep sea mining is a serious threat to the marine environment.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The International Seabed Authority has been at the forefront in regulating deep sea mining to protect the marine environment from the adverse effects of deep sea mining. A comprehensive environmental impact assessment is needed before any deep sea mining activities begin.

The potential impact of sulfide exploration to marine life and the possible models of transporting dissolved minerals need to be determined before the exploration of sulfide deposits. The cost and benefits of seabed mining have not been seriously explored in recent times due to the economic hardships experienced in recent times. Many mining companies have come up with new technologies to fully explore deep sea mining but this has been possible due to the many hardships involved in getting operation permits.

[supanova_question]

Coca-Cola Company’s Product Pricing Essay best essay help

Coca-Cola chief defends pricing strategy By Alan Rappeport in New York The article focuses on Coca-Cola company’s defense of its pricing strategy that has come under heavy criticism by investors who allege that the company’s pricing formula is acting as a ‘spoiler’ in the soft drinks niche of the market. The strategy mentioned in this case is the low prices that have been set by the company in the North American market.

Coca Cola’s investors question why the company has not increased the prices of its products in the home market despite the soaring costs of inputs, and see this as a spoiler strategy. The company’s defends its strategy by arguing that it does not qualify as a spoiler since there had bee an announcement that prices would be increased globally by between 2-3 percent. Besides, the company has adopted other strategies to help it withstand the effects of the inflation (Rappeport, para. 3).

The author mentions that similar to other consumer-packaged goods, Coca Cola has been providing its products in smaller quantities in order to maintain its low prices. It’s rival, PepsiCo, had earlier mentioned that despite the inflation, it would not increase its prices to match the inflation levels. Due to its low prices, Coca Cola’s revenues had risen by 40 percent in the latest quarter (Rappeport, para. 6).

Mr. Kent, the company’s chief executive, mentions that the company has a strategy based on acquisitions but rebuffed suggestions it would make a bid for some energy drink companies. However, the company contends that there is a potential in this category. A second strategy would involve developing ties with the local bottling companies. The previous year, the company bought its largest North American bottler in response to an identical move by PepsiCo.

Comparison of News Article to Text Pricing is one of the strategies that is used by businesses to improve SECONDtheir competitive advantage. The book defines pricing as the procedure through which a company determines the amount of money that its products will sell for. Pricing is affected by various factors and these include competitor prices, cost of inputs, marketing costs and economic factors such as inflation.

In this article, we come across a number of factors that affect Coca Cola’s pricing strategy, these are economic factors such as inflation and the cost of inputs. Further, the investors accuse the company’s pricing formula as being a ‘spoiler’ move, indicating that the company’s prices are influenced by the competitor’s prices.

The book mentions that a low cost strategy will rarely increase the company’s competitive advantage by a significant margin, however, in Coca Cola’s case, the strategy seems to be working as the company’s revenues rose by 40% in the latest quarter.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More However, the article and the book agree on one thing: a low cost strategy is likely to result in a price war. In this case, we see a potential price war between Coca Cola and its North American competitor’s, especially PepsiCo. This is confirmed by PepsiCo’s announcement that even though it has faced an inflation of between 8 to 9.5 percent, it would not increase its prices.

Coca Cola’s strategy of packaging its products in smaller quantities in order to maintain its low prices is a marketing strategy that is also mentioned in the book. The book mentions that packaging is affected by factors such as marketing, quality assurance, shelf life, and regulatory mechanisms.

We see a direct influence of marketing on the packaging method employed by Coca Cola. The strategies adopted by the company to increase its competitive advantage such as acquisitions is mentioned in the book as a corporate strategy that can help a company to grow rapidly.

Personal Reflection The investors’ claims that Coca Cola’s low pricing strategy is acting as a ‘spoiler’ are not well founded. First, Coca Cola is the largest multinational corporation, hence it enjoys huge economies of trade and is able to offer its products at prices significantly lower that its competitors.

To prove its effectiveness, the company has registered growth in its revenues and stock turnover while its competitors also continue to enjoy phenomenal growth. Therefore, the low price strategy has not acted as a ‘spoiler’ as alleged by the investors.

Instead of increasing prices, Coca Cola has adopted other strategies that include acquisitions, expansion into other areas of operation, and improving ties with local bottling partners. Its recent acquisition of its largest North American bottler was a positive move as this will reduce the company’s expenditure and enable it to focus on its core competencies.

High pricing is not the only through which a company can increase its competitive advantage, other strategies include product differentiation, brand name recognition, value added products/ services, improving product quality, customer experience, and adopting innovation.

We will write a custom Essay on Coca-Cola Company’s Product Pricing specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Several of these strategies are plainly working in Coca Cola’s favor and include brand name recognition, product differentiation, innovation, and provision of quality products. The company’s global presence has enabled it to have different strategies for each of the markets, and in North America, its low pricing strategy seems to be effective.

Work Cited Rappeport, Alan. Coca-Cola chief defends pricing strategy. Financial Times, 2 June. 2011. Web.

[supanova_question]

Pelasgus’ Conflict in The Suppliants by Aeschylus Essay a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Matters at stake for Pelasgus

Pelasgus’ Central Conflicts

Resolution of King Pelasgus’ Conflicts

Conclusion

Works Cited

Introduction Pelasgus, the King of Argos, has just had a group of fifty sisters arrive at his shores together with their father Danaus. The sisters are escaping from forced marriage to their cousins, the fifty sons of Danaus’ twin brother Aegyptus (Bakewell 303). The sisters, together with their father, plead with the king to grant them permission to reside within his kingdom to escape the lecherous pursuit of their husbands-to-be and their band of captors, led by Herald of Egypt.

Matters at stake for Pelasgus The first matter that is at stake for Pelasgus is his authority. Pelasgus’ kingdom is a sort of consultative monarchy and Pelasgus seems to draw his right to rule from making decisions that are arrived at consultatively, and are in the best interest of the people within the Argos kingdom. Therefore, although he feels compassion for the group of asylum seekers, he cannot make a unilateral decision because any opposition to such a decision within the ordinary people of the Kingdom might create discontent and thus challenge his authority.

His Kingdom is also at stake. Pelasgus realizes that there is a distinct possibility that were he to grant asylum to the group, their pursuers might very well wage war against his Kingdom in a bid to re-capture the group. Since he has not had the time to asses the strength and weaknesses of the pursuing band, the likelihood that his Kingdom could be overrun in the pretext of re-capturing the girls is eminent.

The band of captures is also in hot pursuit therefore, the decisions he is going to make are hurried, which may not augur well for his kingdom. As king, Pelasgus cannot also wholly trust the word of the asylum seekers, and he needs to consult, because the group may as well be spies sent by enemy Kingdoms. If he grants them asylum and they turn out to be spies or agent provocateurs of sorts, his kingdom is doomed.

Pelasgus’ Central Conflicts Pelasgus’ first point of conflict is that hosting the desperate daughters might eventually bring him or his Kingdom to ruin. Pelasgus realizes that agreeing to host the daughters and their father within the borders of his Kingdom implies guaranteeing their safety from their pursuers.

Hosting them is a simple matter to him, but guaranteeing their safety is a completely different ball game and he feels he might be courting trouble in the whole matter. This creates a dilemma for him. Pelasgus also fears that were he to make a unilateral decision of hosting the desperate group, for whom he seems to feel genuine compassion, there is a small window of some elements in his Kingdom unhappy with his magnanimous act colluding with the pursuers by revealing the location and identity of the group, creating chaos in his Kingdom.

The second conflict involves Pelasgus’ reluctance to enjoin himself in what he perceives as a pure family matter. According to him, he views the group of girls together with their father as members of a different ‘race’, to imply a people whose kinship he does not share, thus would be reluctant to want to help. The girls are fleeing from marrying their cousins anyway, and according to him that qualifies as a family matter that if he were wise he would avoid immersing himself – or his Kingdom – into.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The King therefore wants to be convinced more concerning the risks associated with sheltering a part of a family that is fleeing from the other half of the family under pretences that he has no clue whether to believe or disregard. Ideally, the King feels like he has been ambushed and appointed a judge over family matters that he feels he would best stay away.

Pelasgus as a king is portrayed as having true compassion and sympathy for the group of asylum seekers. He is keen to help the sisters and their father, but a third conflict stirs within him; he realizes that he has to consult with the leadership of his Kingdom before arriving at binding decision on the fate of the group.

However, a furtive thought disturbs him concerning this matter – he realizes that since the decision that will be reached by the governing council will be binding, if the council arrives at a decision to reject the group’s desire for sheltering in the Argon Kingdom, his conscience will be unsettled (Garvie 86).

His conflict therefore arises from his apprehension in handing the fate of a people he genuinely feels compassion for, to a decision-making process that may not necessarily be favorable to the group ultimately. The outcome of a negative decision may create an unnecessary impasse in the activities of the Kingdom because he may overrule the decision of the governing council. The King clearly is in a state of dilemma.

Resolution of King Pelasgus’ Conflicts Pelasgus conflicts eventually get resolved. Pelasgus does this by throwing the ball back on the court of Danaus, the father of the daughters. Pelasgus reasons that by having the father of the daughters plead the case at the various shrines in the Kingdom and directly at the leadership of the Kingdom, together with entreating the masses, the father stands a better chance of gaining a favorable decision from the governing council.

Pelasgus feels that the father is best able to show the agony that he would face if his asylum request were to be rejected. Pelasgus correctly reasons that the best person to plead the case would be the father. Pelasgus gives Danaus permission and tells Danaus to go forth to the Kingdom; the shrines, the public places, and to the leaders, and tell his story.

Pelasgus says that when the people of his Kingdom see his tired and unkempt appearance, perhaps they too will feel pity and grant him and his daughters their request. The King realizes that in this instant, even his word as the sovereign, cannot carry as much weight as the honest appeal of a father would. In the end, the citizens of Argos accede to the wishes of Danaus and his daughters – the suppliants – and grant them asylum, much to the rejoicing and appreciation of the suppliants.

We will write a custom Essay on Pelasgus’ Conflict in The Suppliants by Aeschylus specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Conclusion However, the celebrations are short-lived because soon Herald of Egypt, the leader of the group pursuing the suppliants with the aim of returning them to Egypt, soon arrives on the shores of Argos Kingdom with the sole intent of rounding up Danaus and his daughters and returning them to Egypt for the forced marriages to their cousins. The ensuing chaos, with Herald of Egypt acting superior and giving orders for the group to board the ship quickly, attracts the attention of King Pelasgus.

Demonstrating characteristics that the resolution of his conflicts is accomplished, the King first begins to severely reprimand and caution the band of captors, stating that their lecherous pursuit is barbaric and uncouth behaviors and characteristics that his humane and compassionate citizenry will not tolerate. He further demonstrates that he has overcome his dilemmas by casting his lot with the suppliants, warning Herald of Egypt to touch them at his own peril.

Herald of Egypt, sensing the resolution in the King’s utterances, backs down and the King further tells the suppliants that they will be hosted in a fortified guesthouse near his dwelling, as guests of his Kingdom.

Works Cited Bakewell, Geofrey. “Aeschylus’ Supplices 11-12: Danaus as Pessonomon.” Classical Quarterly 58.1 (2008): 303-307.

Garvie, Frank. Aeschylus’ Supplices, Play, and Trilogy. Cambridge, 1969.

[supanova_question]

Stealing Buddha’s Dinner Analytical Essay cheap essay help: cheap essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Exploring the Concept of Identity

Exploring the Concept of Acceptance

Conclusion

Thesis Statement: The book explores the concept of straddling two cultures, heritage and the struggle for identity most immigrants undergo when they try to integrate themselves into U.S. society.

Introduction In the novel “Stealing Buddha’s Dinner”, author Bich Minh Nguyen explores the concept of identity and how in a desire to “fit in”, be normal and be socially accepted the author shows how she attempts to latch onto American popular culture in the form of brand name packaged food groups (Pringles, Shake

[supanova_question]

THE NATURAL GAS INDUSTRY IN US Research Paper essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Literature

Data

The Study

Summary and Conclusion

Works Cited

Introduction Natural gas is one of the natural fuels that are used by mankind for both commercial and residential purposes. In the United S America it is mainly used for cooking and heating by the largest percentage households although it is applied as a raw material in the industrial sector as well. The usage of natural gas has increased for the past years with many citizens preferring it to other sources of energy.

Other uses of the natural gas that have emerged with the evolution of the energy and the manufacturing industry include, its use as vehicle fuels, powering the industrial furnaces, running air conditioners among others. The research paper looks into the natural gas industry in the US where it analyses its aspects. It also covers the emergence of the natural gas market, its discovery for the industrial, commercial and the residential use.

The evolution of the natural gas market industry is discussed in detail. Other than these, the research main objective is to analyze the effects of natural gas production in the US and imports from other countries. On the determination of the market structure and the evaluation of supply and demand in the future time series data is used. This is also applied to determine the price of the natural gas process.

The paper is organized systematically where there is literature review that looks into materials concerning the natural gas industry and several aspects would be discussed. Series trend data would be used to determine the supply and demand as well as the price determination of natural gas. The main body of the research paper would discuss and analyze the research findings of the data used in the research paper. The summary and conclusion will be based on the findings of the study on natural gas.

Literature This part of the research paper used paper reviewed materials that have connection to the natural gas industry in the United States of America. The use of the natural gas in the United States of America has increased compared to the recent past. Natural gas is used as a burned fuel in the US, where in the 2009; more than 25% of natural gas was consumed.

These areas of consumption include the generation of electricity, fueling vehicles, heating buildings, heating water, baking foods, running air conditioners, and industrial furnace power. According to a report released in December 22, 2010 by Michael Ratner show that emergence of natural gas use has been necessitated by the fact that it is a cleaner because of its low carbon content.

Ratner (1) points that the combustion of natural gas is known to emit two thirds carbon dioxide less compared to coal, and a quarter less compared to oil. This is an explanation why the use of natural gas has been increasing bearing in mind that the environment conservation has been emphasized during the climate change summit over the years. Other reason why it is highly used in the USA is because natural gas combustion produces less particular matter, nitrogen dioxide and sulfur dioxide when compared to carbon (Ratner 1).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More With the discovery of new methods of natural gas extraction like from shale, has encouraged the use of natural gas in the USA. This has been adopted by other countries seeing the demand and supply in the natural gas oil industry increase significantly. Some of the factors that determine the quantity of natural gas demand and the quantities in the market include technical capability, price, environmental concerns, as well as the political considerations in the natural gas producing countries (Ratner 1).

The evolution of the natural gas markets is likely to be determined by the unconventional natural gas reserves the US that is evolving. The USA remains the largest consumer of natural gas with consumption of 22% of the world’s production in 2009. According to Ratner (1) more than 84% of the gas in the USA was used for domestic purpose. This is a large percentage meaning that people have changed their trends in the usage of natural gas in the US.

Usage of natural gas has been there before although it was used in small quantities in the US for only domestic purposes. It has undergone evolution over the years. Over the years the discovery of its usage in industrial and commercial purpose in large quanties has revolutionalised the natural gas market.

According to Nersesian (248) the demand of natural gas has increased with world consuming 24% with the exclusion of bio fuels. US have become the largest importer because of its increased demand for both domestic and industrial consumption. For the residential purpose the natural gas use increase during the winter for the heating purposes. This according to Nersesian (249) has increased the demand for natural gas.

It has also made the prices of the commodity increase with the residential use by residential customers paying the largest bills. This has resulted to the chicken egg syndrome, where the residents depend highly on natural gas in the residential areas for the provision of warm during the winter season. In the industrial sector consumes largest amount of gas with more than 200, 00 consumers forming 35% of the natural gas use. This is less compared to the residential use of natural gas that has more than 60 million users annually.

The demand has continued to increase with the conflict in the Middle East where the oil crisis has affected the oil market. The industrial use includes incineration, waste treatment, dehumidification, petrochemical industries among other industrial uses. The more natural gas is being use the more the effect is relayed to the consumer goods production. This is because it is directly used as raw materials thus affecting the price of these products (Nersesian 249).

According to Roberts (1) the use of the natural gas in the US in the 1970 grew dramatically. He adds that most of the gas produced was a byproduct of the production of the crude oil. This was necessitated by the fact that the oil reserves at that time where lager and would be long lived.

We will write a custom Research Paper on THE NATURAL GAS INDUSTRY IN US specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This has changed over the years making the USA the largest importer of natural gas in the 21st century. Roberts (1) adds that for the past 40 years the usage of natural gas has been cyclical and market intervention by the government has been the reason why the trend has been changing. The regulation of the natural gas prices in the market was initiated by the federal government in the 1950s. This was the beginning of the evolution of the natural gas markets.

Roberts (1) notes that the Federal Power Commission was the predecessor of the Federal Energy Regulatory Commission that encouraged the supply of the natural gas through the pipelines and asserted a certain price for this. This saw an increase in the demand of natural gas after the market prices were regulated to low levels. Consequently the exploration rate declined because the returns were low and prices were low too.

After several laws and Acts were passed in the late 1970s the demand decreased and alternative methods of energy generation were put into place. Economic downturn led to decline in demand for industrial use of natural gas and the price of natural gas increased. The demand for natural gas has since increased after the economy has recovered (Roberts 1).

Production and increased demand for natural gas has had several impacts on US. With higher prices of natural gas, it has become more cheap and economical to import some of the products that are related to natural gas. For example, ammonia based fertilizers are imported, and alternative feed stocks have become attractive like the corn oil and naptha that is used for petrochemicals (Roberts 2). Other plants that don’t use natural gas have been closed because they were not ready for the change.

Data The consumption of natural gas in the United States has been extremely high. This is based on the basis of several data trends on the percentage allocation on its use and demand over the years. The allocation of the use of natural gas in different sectors is also discussed and analyzed.

According to Ratner (3) the world consumption of natural gas in 2009 amounted to more than104, 000 bcf that forms 24%. USA formed the largest consumer with 22,849 bcf which formed a 22%. The economic downturn that resulted from the recession and the War in the Middle East has seen a 2% decline in the consumption of natural oil in the US. Ratner (3) notes that a third of the natural gas consumption in the US is used in the electric power generation, commercial use, industrial use, and residential use.

In 2009 generation of electric power had increased as compared to 2008 usage. It had a consumption of 6,900 bcf of natural gas an increase with 3% (Ratner 3). Te transport sector uses the les amounts of natural gas because of the several logistics involved its usage. Although it has no soot and it is environmentally friendly, the logistic hurdle has been the great problem.

Nersesian (249) notes that the projected figures of the usage of natural gas in the US show that it is clear that more than 20% that is over 60 million residents is used for residential purposes. The purpose of this is drying, cooking, heating, pool heating, and consumer space and water heat as well as gas fire places.

Not sure if you can write a paper on THE NATURAL GAS INDUSTRY IN US by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The residential demand increases to its peak during the winter with a more than 70% annual consumption although it varies depending on the season. The residential gas consumers pay the largest amount with the commercial users paying only 15%.

This sector has more than five million commercial users making them pay the second largest price. The sectors in the commercial that use natural gas include the motels, restaurants, retail establishments, healthcare facilities, hospitals, government buildings and offices (Nersesian 249). Their demand is not determined by the season it’s an all year usage scenario. Industrial sector forms over 35% in the natural gas total demand with more than 200,000 customers.

The industrial sector faces fluctuation in the demand for natural gas usage although it’s not seasonal. The major effect is the fluctuations and variations in the economic activity changes. The impact of increase in the prices in natural gases is that industries can change to other sources like bio fuels. The electricity sector has more than 5,700 users that account to 30% of the total demand (Nersesian 249). The electricity generation sector has more than 5,000 natural gas generating plants.

The Study The demand for natural gas in the United States of America has increased over the years making it the largest user. According to Ratner (1) natural gas plays a great role in the world energy mix because of its growing resource base. This is because of it produces low carbon compared to fossil fuels.

Although US have been ranked as the largest importer of natural gas, report by Ratner (2) indicates that the unconventional gas reserves in the US from the shale gas have increased over the last years. Shale gas reserve has increased to 76% with its production increasing to 47%. This has changed the position of US as a net importer of natural gas to a potential exporter (Ratner 2). With the increase in demand, there has been a decline by 2% because of the economic downturn and the recession.

With increase in demand the market price of natural gas has been low. Natural gas price in Canada, USA and UK is set by the market that is set by the economic activities (Retner 11). There are hubs centers that provide the natural gas sellers and buyers with price data that are competitive.

Some of the hubs in US include the LA, Henry Hub in Erath which form a multiple interstate where most of the natural gas pipelines interconnect (Ratner 11). The demand for natural gas has made itself stand itself wholly; this has made it become uncompetitive with other sources of fuels.

The price of fuels in the US is also determined by the consumer needs. For instance, the residential consumers are the ones that pay the highest prices because of their demand that is determined by season. The commercial users follow in terms of demand and pay because of the economic activities. The demand of natural gas in the US is not likely to reduce because the unconventional gas a reserve that has been found.

In most case, the natural gas use in the US has articulated by the fact because gas in available and not expensive compared to other sources of fuels.

The production of natural gas in the use has its impacts. For one it has revolutionized the manufacturing industry by making use of natural gas a car fuels. This is seen as a way that reducing the amount of carbon, sulfer dioxide and other particular particles that are not environmentally friendly. It production has also made sure that its demand remains high with no reservations of its use getting low.

Production of ammonia has been affected with its production reducing drastically. According to Huang (15) the raw materials for ammonia fertilizers in the natural gas and its production have reduced because of the increased prices associated with natural gas. The production has reduced by 35% and the ammonia production plants have reduced over with 44%. This has reduced the supply of ammonia gas in the US with many companies opting to import ammonia from other countries because it’s cheap.

Other producing countries especially in the Middle East have the lowest prices of natural gas. This is obviously going to have negative impact on the price of natural gas in the US.

According to Huang (11) the imports of natural gas in the Middle East and the North Africa have been limited to low capacity production. With the in prices being low the imports from these countries is more likely to affect the exportation of natural gas to the US. Although these countries do not produce ammonia fertilizers from natural gas, if they did they would have a large market share in Asia and China compared to US. The imports may also reduce because with sustainable natural gas production there is no need to import natural gas.

The countries that export natural gas in the US will have to find another suitable market because the imports will reduce drastically (Gene 138). This is because of the production of natural gas in the US. It is also going to affect the manufacturing industry because increased production would mean more employment and industrial production. Imported natural gas is clean. According to Gene (138) the production of natural gas would see production of by products that would boost the economy.

Summary and Conclusion Natural gas is used in large quantities in the USA with the household consumptions leading the usage followed by electricity generating. Natural gas household consumption include heating water, warming houses, cooking, powering fans, heating pools, ironing among others. For industrial use it is used as raw materials, powering industrial furnaces, running the air conditioners, incineration, waste treatment, dehumidification, petrochemical industries among other industrial use.

In the manufacturing it is as fuel in car, manufacture of ammonia based fertilizers, plastics and other materials. The reason why natural gas is preferred is because its environmentally clean, compared to coal. It also produces less sulfur dioxide gas and carbon and other particular matter. The discovery of unconventional natural gas reserves from shell formation has prompted the demand to increase. The emergence of the use of natural gas can be traced in years back although it was used in small quantities.

Over the years it usage has been increasing with the US being the largest user and importer. It uses natural gas in the residential places, transport sector, the industrial sector and the commercial sector. The increased uses have prompted the demand to increase and importing its gas from natural gas producing states like Russia. The statistics clearly show how US has been using natural gas with the population using natural gas increasing annually.

For residential use natural gas fluctuates seasonally with summer having the highest demand. On the other hand the industrial gas demand is determined by the economic activities. The market for demand of natural gas has evolutionised over the years after several laws governing the productivity, transport and pricing. The pricing is determined by the demand of natural gas in the US and the Middle East political stability.

The demand for natural gas is not likely to reduce over the years because of its environmentally friendly aspect. The United States is now becoming a net exporter as opposed to a net importer of natural gas due to the discovery of unconventional reserves.

The price in the US is determined by the market demand and the economic activity. From the research it is noticeable that because of its various aspects, natural gas is not competitive from other kinds of fuels. The production of natural gas in the US is likely to have effects. The demand is more likely to increase and so are the prices.

This would mean that imports from other countries may be reduced because they have their own sources. In terms of export however, this may reduce because the Middle East and North America produces natural gas that is of low price. The production of ammonia in the US has declined over the years because of its high price. Despite the fact that natural gas is being produced in the US, the price hikes has made it cheap and economical to import ammonia fertilizers from other countries.

Works Cited Gene, Whitney C. E. B. Energy: Natural Gas. S.l.: Thecapitol Net, Inc, 2010. Print.

Huang, Wen-yuan. Impact of Rising Natural Gas Prices on U.S. Ammonia Supply. Agust. 2007. Web. .

Nersesian, Roy L. Energy for the 21st Century: A Comprehensive Guide to Conventional and Alternative Services. M E Sharpe Inc, 2010. Print.

Ratner, Michael. Global Natural Gas: A Growing Resource. 22 Dec. 2010. Web.

Roberts, J. Paul. The Evolution of Natural Gas Markets. n.d. Web.

[supanova_question]

Why People Should Donate Time/Money/Energy to a Particular Organization, Charity, or Cause Argumentative Essay best essay help: best essay help

Introduction In our day to day lives, people are very busy in their careers or jobs and they tend to concentrate too much on them and a bit of personal lives. This is usually at the expense of giving back to the society through various means that are aimed at making the lives of the less fortunate in the society better.

Corporate social responsibility is a very critical aspect that should be emphasized among individuals, groups and organizations so that the lives of the less privileged or those suffering from a particular problem in our communities could be uplifted.

There are various reasons why people should volunteer or donate their energy, time, money and other resources to charities, non-profitable organizations and other causes. This piece of work looks into these reasons with much emphasis being given to why people should invest their energy and resources on Alzheimer’s Association.

Reasons why people should donate time, money and energy to Alzheimer’s Association Alzheimer’s Association is a cause whose main aim is to eradicate Alzheimer disease through combined efforts that aim at providing effective care and support to all those suffering from the disease as well as reducing the risk of dementia by enhancing brain health.

This is achieved through advanced research. Its vision is to have a world that is free from Alzheimer’s disease. “The Alzheimer’s Association is the leading, global voluntary health organization in Alzheimer’s care and support, and the largest private, nonprofit funder of Alzheimer’s research” (Anonymous Para 2).

Like any other charitable non-profit making organization, Alzheimer’s Association is a cause that really needs support from well wishers to keep it going, in its efforts to help individuals who suffer from Alzheimer disease. Disease is a problem that affects everyone in the society and people should therefore take part in helping out those suffering from Alzheimer disease as a way of appreciating the gift of good health.

There are various reasons why people should contribute effortlessly towards the achievement of Alzheimer’s Association’s goals and mission some of them being for individual satisfaction, the victims’ well being while others are for the good of the society at large. One reason is the fact that there is power in giving.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Giving is usually associated with the rich and wealthy but that should not be the case since it is an act that comes from the heart and not the pockets, without any expectations of getting something in return. Time alone is enough for instance sharing with and encouraging the patients suffering from Alzheimer disease and people should therefore donate towards Alzheimer’s Association.

This helps people to enjoy the process of helping as they see their efforts making positive impacts like bringing happiness to a person who is hopeless due to some problems for instance pain and suffering like in the case of Alzheimer illness. Donating to a cause helps build purpose in life and also improves ones sense of well-being through allowing for inner satisfaction. It also strengthens a person’s spiritual life and offer contentment and inner peace.

This is achieved through knowing that one sacrificed something no matter how little, to help people in need (LaMeaux par 4). People would be motivated to donate towards Alzheimer’s Association due to the fact that it carries out very essential activities aimed at helping the sick and in taking part in its activities through donation, people will have the inner satisfaction brought about by seeing positive change/impact they make on less fortunate individuals.

Donating to various causes also help an individual to be well versed with what happens around people who are less fortunate especially on matters of social injustice. This is so because as people think of engaging in charitable work, they tend to gather more information about the particular group for instance through research.

The will for instance know all aspects that surround Alzheimer’s Association more especially the patients. “This keep people informed of the social injustice acts carried out upon people and hence be in a better position to make positive moves by effectively challenging those responsible to take positive changes to situations in an effort to save lives and make life worth living for the affected” (LaMeaux Para 5).

Another good reason why people should support Alzheimer’s Association is because the act of volunteering is linked with various physical as well as social benefits. After people engage in charitable activities, they tend to have the urge to be more involved including devoting most of their time and skills, for instance in helping the people affected by the Alzheimer disease. This is deemed to help in enhancing ones social networks while at the same time gaining social, physical as well as spiritual benefits.

Tax benefit is another reason as to why people should donate to charities and non-profit making organizations such as Alzheimer’s Association. Although this should not be the driving force towards ones decision to donate, it is encouraging. This aspect of tax eviction allow people to pay less for all the monetary and non-monetary contributions and hence they end up providing more and hence helping those involved in a great manner unlike when tax could be imposed (GAO 4).

We will write a custom Essay on Why People Should Donate Time/Money/Energy to a Particular Organization, Charity, or Cause specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Conclusion From the above discussion, it is evident that it is worth donating ones time, money or even energy to a given cause for instance the Alzheimer’s association. People should take part in what is going on around them and support as much as they can. This is because these causes, organizations and charities have got positive moves and they aim at uplifting people’s lives in one way or the other, an effort that would not be possible without them.

There are also many benefits that are associated with volunteering and donations as stated above and people should therefore participate fully. Saving lives or even making lives of people suffering from Alzheimer’s disease worth living is a good act that should be encouraged among all individuals in the society to help eliminate the ordeal.

Works Cited Anonymous. “The Alzheimer’s Association”.

GAO. Vehicle Donations Benefits To Charities And Donors, But Limited Program Oversight. New York; DIANE Publishing, 2003. Print.

LaMeaux E.C. “5 Reasons to Donate to Charity”. GAIAMlife Web.

[supanova_question]

Historical Art: Classical Art and Cubism History and Comparison Essay college application essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Classical Art Period

Cubism Art Epoch

Comparison

Divergence between the Two

Impact of Cubism

Works of Art and Artistes

Conclusion

References

Introduction Art history generally refers to the academic study of objects of art in history and their development styles. This study will examine several methods used by historians to answer questions that help them come up with data on various historical periods.

Art history began in the 19th century but with dating of the ancient past. The reason it had not been perfected earlier was that many people were illiterate. Art history as a discipline is a chronology of advanced styles of an object commissioned by individuals or public bodies in Western Europe. The works of art vary with time and across genres.

For instance, some works were done as a continuation of others using same styles while others were originally done by individuals. The two major ways that historians use to find information on arts are archaeology and the study of source texts such as recordings. The study of these arts played a big role in beginning of history as history means the study of man’s past events. This discussion will be based on two historical periods, classical art period and cubism art period (Harline, 1987).

Classical Art Period The classical period is simply the period of cultural history concerned with old civilizations of ancient Greece and ancient Rome. The artists who were involved in studying this period were Johann Christian Bach, Ledwig Van Beethoven, Franz Joseph Haydn and Wolfgang Amadeus. This period is concerned with the study of music and its developments.

This art has strong linkings connecting the art and philosophy of old Greece and Rome. This style became as an advancement of the prior Baroque style (Murray, 2003).The classical style was mainly dominated by homophonic music whereby the melody and the accompaniment of the melody are studied differently.

This simply means that new forms of composing melodies were discovered to enable the transformation. The most important form of this style was the sonata and it continued evolving and advancing. In this period, the sonatas became different and better. This meant that it was possible for composers to survive in the industry of music without being employees of one party. Concerts were also done publicly as composers organized the concerts featuring their own music.

Cubism Art Epoch Cubism was a very influential art style whose artists were painters Pablo Picasso and Georges Braque in France between 1907 and 1914. This style was mainly embarking on the flat, two-dimensional surface of the picture plane. These painters did not depend on direct copying of objects but they painted paintings that presented fragmented objects.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The cubism period is further divided into two phases as each shows certain advancements. Construction of right angle and straight lines as some parts of the paintings appeared sculptural. Mandolin puts this by quoting Picasso, “At that time I painted a lot of musical instruments, firstly because I was surrounded by them and then because their form, their volume, came into the realm of the still life exactly as I wanted.

I was seeking a tactile, palpable space as I like to call it, and musical instruments, as objects have this characteristic that can bring them to life through touch” (Monod-Fontaine, 1982, p. 65). In the analytical cubism phase, color schemes were made monochromatic to suite the presentation of complex objects.

This also reduced the multiple views to opaque and transparent planes. The forms were also denser at the center of the paintings as they diffused towards the edges of the drawing papers. In the second stage of cubism technique, artificial cubism continued the concluding work and highlighted amalgamation of diverse appearances in the picture.

The new paintings made many people to start doing paintings in their homes as they painted walls. Dancers also used the paintings to decorate themselves and thus look better. The musical instruments were painted and this was mostly in churches and other religious organs that existed then. This style has remained in practice even to date and it was worthy to be continued on

Comparison The two periods, classical and cubism have various differences and similarities although they are all connected to historical art. Firstly, the two periods depended on materials and knowledge from their prior arts. The classical and cubism styles were only advancing on their prior styles. In addition, it is clear that both the artist of classical style and cubism style were in total control over what, when and where they produced.

They could record all what they came up with for future references and use. The two styles also had great impact to the society as people found the new techniques admirable and worthy (Harline, 1987). They also both contributed much to the field of art and made art popular among many people in Greece and other parts of the world. Differently it was seen that the classical period had greater impact on the society than the cubism style.

Many people got interested in music as the public concerts were done and thus classical period had influence on large numbers of people. The classical art was also important to some features in the community like the church were people could sing using the new orchestra instruments and with due time choirs were formed in churches. While the subject matter in classical art was music, the subject matter in cubism style was painting.

We will write a custom Essay on Historical Art: Classical Art and Cubism History and Comparison specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The aim of classical art was to make music better, romantic and publicize it while the aim of cubism art was to make paintings more colorful and admirable. In classical art more knowledge and time was required to make the process a success as compared to cubism period, which required more interest and observations. The classical period required knowledge on music while the cubism period relied on knowledge in paintings (Monod-Fontaine, 1982).

Divergence between the Two Cubism did not deviate from classical art, even though some differences can be observed. The two works of art had more in common as opposed to differences. What had changed was time, place and the influence they had in society. While classical was more promoted by political class, cubism was taken and understood as a major works of trade.

It had a well-established society and a lobby group as well. The lobby group ensured that the rights of artistes were guaranteed and that protection was offered artistes. On the side of influence, Classical art had more impacts to the lives of people because it was integrated to religious and socio-cultural life.

It did not deviate from classical period despite the difference of years between the two periods. This period was greatly appreciated and after it, no other period based on the technique of painting followed. People just did advancements on what had already been got in the cubism period. Other styles like the romantic period concerned with music. The dancers in performing in the concerts also began painting themselves to make good look (Harline, 1987).

Impact of Cubism Cubism had both positive and negative impacts to other works of art. Its styles and architectural designs shed some light to subsequent works, such as those of Surrealists.

Other artistes borrowed heavily from cubism. Another impact is that cubism gave rise to other competing artistic societies, which were determined to overthrow the existing style and establish a fresh design. Generally, in society, it can be concluded that Cubism brought about improved artistic designs and styles. It transformed the older works of art into something fairly simple and clear.

The type of art was later on associated with elites; those who could acquire them in society occupied high positions. Cubism period contributed greatly to the world of art by perfecting the colors and combination of different forms of the picture. The Fauve period that came later after cubism period relied greatly on this period. The Fauve period made more advancement like mixing of colors that were not in the cubism period.

Works of Art and Artistes Cubism was a 20th century ultramodern art faction, founded by Pablo Picasso and Georges Braque, that transformed European painting and figurine, and motivated allied groups in song, writing and structural design. The earliest division of cubism, referred to as critical Cubism, was equally fundamental and dominant as a squat but extremely important art society between 1907 and 1911 in France.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Historical Art: Classical Art and Cubism History and Comparison by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More In its subsequent stage, artificial Cubism, the faction broadened and continued being imperative until about 1919, after the Surrealist group got recognition. In classical period of historical art, animal and human statues were made through carving.

The materials used in carving include the limestone, bronze and wood. Disco bolos which is a sculpture representing a person throwing a discus is an example of work of art in roman by Myron the artist. Other famous artists in classical period include the following Johann Christian Bach, Ledwig Van Beethoven, Franz Joseph Haydn and Wolfgang Amadeus.

Conclusion History art forms a great base of history as it entails ancient activities. As different periods came, better and new techniques were added on the works.

Each period relied on some information from the latter period. The classical era brought out advanced symphonic music that enhanced public concerts. In this period, many people were interested in music due to the concerts and the orchestra grew bigger than in the Baroque’s era. The cubism period perfected on paintings making them more decorative and new shapes that were better than the prior ones.

The two periods were relying on knowledge and materials from their prior periods. The two arts also made great impacts on the art field. Classical period for instance introduced the public concerts that are even valued to date. The two arts had different subjects they were interested in. classical period was interested in music while the cubism period was interested in paintings. The artistes in the two periods were also using different knowledge.

References Harline, C.E. (1987). Pamphlets, printing, and political culture in the early Dutch Republic. London: Springer.

Monod-Fontaine, et al. (1982). Braque, the papiers collés. Washington, DC: National Gallery of Art.

Murray, C. (2003). Key Writers on Art: The twentieth century. London: Routledge.

[supanova_question]

Fastbikes Incorporated Case – OB Problem Solution Essay essay help

Fastbikes incorporation is a company which was doing well but of late it has been facing some serious problems. Joe Brown needs to take some drastic measures to ensure that his company does not close down. The fact that his most experienced mechanic wants to leave the company, clearly indicates the lack of motivation in the company. Motivation is what drives people to do their jobs effectively and this is important for Fastbikes as the employees need to be motivated for them to put more effort in their job.

Fastbikes Inc. needs to motivate its employees for example by increasing their salaries, giving rewards to the best employer of the year, offering hardworking bonuses among others. If the company does, it will encourage them to continue working for the company with dedication without being tempted to go for higher paying companies especially during the difficult economic periods.

In addition to the impending circumstance of lack of motivation, it is worthy acknowledging that most of the employees have been working in this company since it began and this can create a great discouragement particularly if they have been contributive to the growth of the company to the level it is and at some point their grievances are not considered.

This scenario also shows some negligence by the management since it is usually a failure to listen to the grievances of the employees by the management that such effects like the available de-motivation are realized. This point is justified by the fact that salary matters are serious as far as employees are concerned and that most employees particularly those who have been working in such a company for long, would first air out their grievances before they decide to move away from the company.

Joe therefore, as the owner of this company needs to work out a serious assessment and come up with new management criteria in a matter of urgency to ensure that the future of this company is promising.

The sales of Fastbikes have taken a nose dive because the sales people are not motivated well enough. Joe Brown must reward those sales people who are doing exceptionally well in their jobs so that those who work hard will see a tangible evidence of appreciation for work well done.

The act of rewarding employees is a major boost to the employees’ morale and it goes a long way in encouraging people to put an extra effort to their tasks [.], when people are rewarded for their effort they will feel appreciated and in the case of Fastbikes Inc sales people will push sales of motorbikes to a greater levels which will mean more income and consequently more pay for employees and company will meet its obligation with ease (DuBrin

[supanova_question]

Abolish the Death Penalty Essay essay help site:edu: essay help site:edu

The death penalty is a controversial topic that continues to elicit a lot of debate in the contemporary society as it did in ancient civilizations. Several questions have been raised regarding this topic, for example, should we abolish the death penalty? or, does death penalty violate man’s fundamental right to live? Whenever the issue of death penalty comes, opponents and proponents stand up to defend their positions.

One side says deterrence, the other side says the possibility of killing an innocent person. One side says fairness, the other side replies retribution, and punishment claims are met with ‘killing is murder’.

Whatever side of the debate we explore, it is plain that the death penalty is a denial of the basic human rights as it contravenes the right to life as stated in the Universal Declaration of Human Rights as stated by the UN. The death penalty is the ultimate form of cruelty, inhuman, and demeaning act that can ever be perpetuated on an individual.

Since court sentences and punishment are meant to be a disciplinary act, then a death penalty contradicts the law itself as it does not give an offender a second chance at reform. Besides, various studies have proved that the death penalty does not deter future offenders from committing the same crimes that would lead to a similar penalty, therefore, the death should be banned in all countries.

One of the arguments that has always that has always been used to defend death penalty is deterrence. The notion that executing persons who break certain laws will deter persons from engaging in similar crimes sounds convincing, besides, deterring any form of crime is for the good of all of us.

However, the jury is still torn whether this form of punishment actually deters crime as a number of studies have shown that heavy punishment does not necessarily imply deterrence. Should we give the death penalty to prove that we are serious? Does a criminal mind ever consider the existence of a death penalty? No. Studies indicate that unless executions reach a certain level, crimes that warrant the death penalty may continue unabated.

Most death penalties are normally given to persons that commit murder. However, behavioral studies have shown that most murders are normally committed in response to strong feelings of passion or anger, or by persons who are under the influence of alcohol or drugs who act impetuously.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More For this reason, they do not act rationally and do not think of the consequences of their actions. Giving such an individual a life sentence does not really help him and instead amounts to another murder. The Merriam-Webster defines murder as the “unlawful killing of one person by another, especially with premeditated malice”, going by this definition, it becomes plain that a death sentence is in itself another execution. The only section of the definition that supports the court’s act is the unlawful part.

The death sentence is normally full of flaws and inconsistencies, this claim arises from the number of persons that have been released from death row after additional inquiries into their crimes.

Besides, we know from research supported by the strongest and most accurate figures that the death penalty is applied with impartiality. It is a matter of race and socio-economic status; lower-class people are represented by overburdened or incompetent lawyers while rich criminals hire well paid lawyers who present a competent and well organized defense and are frequently let off the hook.

This finding means that innocent persons are executed by various legal systems around the world. Does it not seem if the state takes away an innocent person’s life, then it should also meet the same level of punishment as the criminals? Does this risk not surpass the benefits of death penalty that may exist? Should we permit issues such as the death penalty to harm the very values and beliefs that our dear nation was established on?

As we continues to give death penalties to persons accused of various crimes, we are setting a very bad example for our children. We spend a significant amount of time teaching our children on the sanctity of life at schools or other institutions, yet we justify the death sentence arguing that it will reduce crime levels. This is very hypocritical of society. Evil cannot be an answer to evil. If it wrong to take away a life, why does the state contradict itself by executing others? The death penalty must be abolished immediately.

Conclusion Despite opposition from various quarters, our legal system continues to mete out the death penalty. This must stop since the death is a violation of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights as dictated by the United Nations, besides, the death penalty does not deter offenders from engaging in crimes that would lead to this sentence.

Persons that commit murder, for whom the penalty is frequently given, normally act under the influence of alcohol or drugs or act impetuously and should be given time to reform rather that delivering them to the hangman, the legal system itself is full of flaws and inconsistencies that block the exercise of justice to suspects. Finally, death penalties sends a poor message to our children as they grow up with the notion that evil is paid with evil.

We will write a custom Essay on Abolish the Death Penalty specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More

[supanova_question]

“The Tale of the Wife of Bath” by Geoffrey Chaucer Analytical Essay essay help online

Through the narration of the Canterbury tales, Geoffrey Chaucer, the author, explicitly highlights the private life and behavior of the characters. For instance, from the General prologue and The Tale of the Wife of Bath, the reader is able to describe the Wife’s personality, physical appearance, and biography.

From her body appearance, though at old age, the Wife of Bath appears rich, sexy, and extravagant, which can tell more about her youthful days. Her clothing portrays her wealth; she has expensive footwear and stockings. Therefore, her mode of dressing portrays a modern woman well versed with the current fashion trends in her society.

Furthermore, the coordination or combination of her clothes and the color of the stockings (scarlet), which originates from a very rare dye that is not only expensive, but also extracted from red beetles. Thus, her physical appearance is both attractive and appealing to the eyes. Although age is catching up with her beauty, she tells how she used her body to extract money or gain wealth from men. In addition, her behavioral conduct presents her as a jumpy or cheeky but talented woman who can go an extra mile to achieve her personal goals.

The other most fascinating element about the Wife of Bath is her personality. Her moral character raises eyebrows; besides getting married to five men, she uses their sexual desires or weaknesses to force them accept her proposals. She is both a sadist and a wicked human being because when her fourth husband dies, she pretends to be mourning yet in her heart, she is extremely happy.

Moreover, she is joyful because she has a chance to get married to her fifth husband. When telling her experience, she is neither remorseful nor angry about her previous way of life. Though emotional, she confesses that her lust for wealth and sex always pushes her into seducing rich men. On the other hand, she admits to have loved her last husband who was youthful, abusive, and not rich as the others.

Despite being talkative, she intelligently has a way to succeed in a society that discriminates against women. She uses her wits to access wealth from men eventually becoming independent while her adventurous character enables her to travel all over the world. Therefore, the wife’s of bathe is an all round woman with dynamic attributes like wicked, liar, talkative, successful and intelligent.

Through her tale and prologue, the reader is able to outline denotatively the biography of the Wife of Bath. She was born, brought up, and married in England, a rich country. At a tender age of twelve, she got married to an old man. The marriage did not last because she married the second, third, fourth, and fifth husband. Her talent in dressmaking enabled her to have an expensive wardrobe.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More There is no much description about her family or children but her pilgrimage career enabled her to travel to different parts of the world thus she has current information on different parts of the world. Although she is extensively involved in pilgrimage activities, she has a contradictory view about the patriarchal society especially on the teachings about marriage. Finally, through her husbands, she was able to gain a lot of wealth, which ushered her into success and independence as a woman.

In summary, the Wife of Bath has a diverse personal attributes ranging from intelligent to wickedness with an appealing physical appearance and from her description or autobiography, she is an expensive, independent woman from England.

[supanova_question]

Advocacy: Action, Change and Commitment Essay essay help: essay help

Introduction Advocacy according to the United Nations Population Fund (UNFPA) context is defined as the use of efforts that affect the political climate, plan and programme verdicts, as well as public opinions or social beliefs. This context also defines advocacy as financial determinations, community aid and involvement in an issue.

This is done via a set of well-designed actions carried out through a group of dedicated individuals or corporations working in a performance. It simply entails exploring the environment, identifying the agenda, defining partners, lobbying assistance of decision makers, developing allies and constituent building.

Advocacy according to UNFPA heavily depends on mass media, group and interpersonal communications. The common targets of advocacy include policy makers, several decision makers, spiritual leaders and those managing access to substantial resources such as the media (Henderson

[supanova_question]

Should We Begin to Think About What We Eat? Research Paper essay help: essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Research Findings

Literature Review

Conclusion

Works Cited

Introduction Processed food has existed prehistorically yet in the form of very traditional practices like salt preservation, steaming, and sun dying etc. Countries like America and Europe had persisted in the use of the traditional ingredients originated from the earliest immigrants of England and Scotland.

However, after the industrial revolution these practices metamorphosed and took the form of more sophisticated, technological practices. Increase in the fertilized land in America led the farmers to grow more corn and hence corn became a fodder for the livestock and the by-product started being used for whisky and thereby an era of food processing begun (Steven, Mintz).

With the industrial revolution, new ingredients were being discovered. These included chocolate, sugar and coffee etc and could not be consumed raw. Hence the new techniques of food processing developed including the vacuum bottling technique for tinned food and the concept of canning as proposed by Peter Durand in 1881.

Further, the more significant discovery came from Louis Pasteur in 1862 when he advanced the idea of reducing the amount of harmful pathogens in the food that may cause certain diseases and taken further by introduction of sterilization that aimed at killing this bacteria completely (Steven, Mintz).

Moreover fuelling the chemical processing was globalization, which escalated the early 19th Century. Cultural and ethnic pluralism meant a more diversified variety in the eating patterns hence the emergence of fast food industry and ethnic cuisines became a prerequisite for food processing. Apart from the early immigrants from England and Scotland, more and more Germans, Italians and Africans came to America and so this demanded more varieties in the food being offered.

The changing economic state of Europe and USA in specific and the evolving lifestyles and cultural and political values of these countries contributed towards the emergence of convenience food. Food then became a political and cultural identity. Also, a proliferation of different ethnicities meant that more and more varieties of seasonal fruits had to be made available in all seasons.

Hence food processing took the form of spray drying, freeze drying, artificial sweeteners, and colouring agents. Therefore, the dried soups, tinned vegetables and canned fruit juices became common ration items on the American kitchen shelves. The trend has had a tickle down effect globally whereby a stage was set for massive trade in convenience food.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The study aims to examine and closely scrutinize the proposed advantages of processed foods and the concerns that outweigh these possible advantages.

Pasteurizing and (UHT) Ultra Heat Treatment with the use of preservatives and antioxidants has brought about a new era of food sustainability and the food colorants and artificial sweeteners have introduced massive variety in food, incorporating the previous era of mass production and at the same time facilitating mass customization in modern era of individualization in demand.

Marketers have massively benefited from the introduction of such genetically modified foods. However, the social and personal costs to the human body and society are unprecedented.

According to the British watchdog, National Institute for Health and Clinical Excellence (NICE), processed food causes 4000 deaths annually in Britain alone. The damages to organs in animals and in humans include cancers, allergic reactions, nervous and immune system discrepancies and behavioral problems amongst many (Szwarc).

The study aims to identify and analyze these challenges of food processing and the concerns that have plagued the society since they have been practiced. The purpose of the study is to incorporate the advantages and disadvantages of food processing and refine my current understanding of processed foods and its detrimental consequences on the users. Hence the topic under study holds relevance to our society and will further strengthen the case against processed food.

Research Findings This convenience has measurable benefits which extend to both the consumers and the marketers, in the form of increased sustainability of the food which enables perishable items to be marketed, distributed and used over a longer period of time and the incorporation of modern lifestyles to the meal preparation allows individuals to face less stress. Thus as mentioned above, it allows for mass customization to achieve competitive advantage in the food industry.

For example, the use of food processing has allowed producers to incorporate and produce various varieties of the same food to target certain niches in the market. The removal of toxins ensures that the food remain fresh and does not become stale as quickly as fresh food does especially in the case of baked items. The use of salt and sugar as preservatives avoids foods from growing moulds or bacteria and hence the increase usability of tinned and canned dried food items (Szwarc).

We will write a custom Research Paper on Should We Begin to Think About What We Eat? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Food processing also includes heat treatments like UHT (Ultra Heat Treatment), spray drying, simmering and baking etc. The heat treatment makes proteins more digestible and food healthier for those with weak immune systems and also the elderly. Hence the UHT milk, despite its potential disadvantages, is healthier for those who want to gain weight and similarly, heat treatment helps kill bacteria which maybe otherwise harmful (Szwarc).

Moreover, the FDA (Food and Drug Administration) in USA claims that the food which is canned or frozen as soon as it is harvested, can be have more nutrient value than fresh foods (Szwarc). This is to say, that these food items, if frozen or canned immediately after harvest, have less chance of contamination or of catching bacteria in the air. Further, research also shows that Lycopene present in tomatoes are better digested when cooked, and so are carotenoids in colored vegetables which make the case for processed foods much stronger.

Doctors also medically recommend them as part of the anti ageing treatment in women (Puristat). Furthermore, cooking foods like poultry, minced beef and eggs is essential to remove the most dangerous bacteria of all, salmonella. This bacterium is known to cause severe food poisoning, allergic reactions and even death. Most prone to these dangers are pregnant women, children and the elderly (World Health Organization).

Further extending the debate is the dangers of genetically modified food, which is also a form of food processing. The distortion of DNA in natural foods not only harms their nutrient content but also the taste of products. This process was initiated in the early 1900’s to address the food shortages. However, it involves certain ethical issues as well. The genetically modified potatoes contain lectin, which is dangerous for the intestines. However, efforts have been made to mitigate the effects of these GM crops and seeds (Puristat).

However, on the other hand, processed food has gained considerable criticism because of its detrimental consequences on human health. Processed foods typically contain Trans fats which are declared by a nutritionist from Harvard, as “the biggest food processing disaster in the US history” (Reader’s Digest). Trans fats alone have caused 30,000 to 100,000 deaths due to heart diseases each year in the USA and the reduction of trans fat in the diet can reduce the risk for heart diseases by 53%.

They are essential ingredients for coconut oils, lard etc. (Reader’s Digest). Another harmful ingredient is the refined grains which can increase the risk of heart diseases by 30%. Processed foods like soups, soya sauce, and fries contain high amounts of sodium, access of which can be detrimental for the health (Reader’s Digest).

Furthermore, the use of certain preservatives like nitrates causes asthma, vomiting, and headaches. Nitrous acid can be cancerous and the use of benzoic acid in carbonated drinks, margarine etc is known to cause severe allergies and even death.

The use of sulfur dioxide reduces Vitamin B and hence the nutrient content of apples and bananas or any other fruits that have the tendency to become brown when exposed to air. Antioxidants like BHT (Butylated Hydroxytoluene) and BHA are also harmful for the nervous system and major organs including the liver (Puristat).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Should We Begin to Think About What We Eat? by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More In case of artificial colourings that are used most extensively in food industry are derived from coal tars. There are more than a thousand flavourings used in the world today and al of them is originated from the coal tars. Hence countries like Norway have banned the use of food colourings in food industry because of the debilitating nature of its origin.

While on the other hand, artificial sweeteners are known to cause hyperactivity and bladder cancer. They are also known to cause behavioral discrepancy as shown in the study in the literature review. The use of emulsifiers like propylene glycol is skin toxic. Flavorings including monosodium glutamate cause frequent mood swings depression and chest pains (Mayo clinic Staff).

Hence this shows the amount of psychological and physiological damage that processed food can cause harm to humans and animals. So from an ethical perspective, I believe processed food should be banned or at least some components used in it like Trans fats should be banned and the world should go back to organic food.

Literature Review The use of red colored dyes in foods has been researched and analyzed by Shuji Tsuda, who talks about the toxic nature of this colorant in food industry. The study aimed to experiment on 4 groups of pregnant mice and male mice in Japan and their organs including liver, kidney, and stomach were closely scrutinized for study after the use of amaranth. It showed a considerable amount of DNA damage in the bladder, stomach and colon of these mice.

Although, the nature if the study is controversial in terms of the experiment conducted on animals, yet the study provides valuable insight. The use of these colorants in foods including jelly, custard, biscuits, and strawberry mousses or beverages is commonly consumed my masses. Hence the prolonged use of this colorant can cause damage to the vital organs of human body which stipulates the harmful nature of processed foods.

The article, Chemical Food Additive Exposure during Pregnancy, composed by Richard Pressinger in 1997 further illustrates the drawbacks of processed foods.

The article highlights the traditional use of food colorings through natural plant and vegetable components prior to 1950’s and how this has changed intensely to include an augmented use of chemicals, which are detrimental to human body after the industrial revolution. Apart from the measurable harm caused to human body, these chemicals are known to cause behavioral disorders as well.

Children develop attention deficits and hyperactivity with the prolonged use of such colorants and hence 20-50% of the children developed improvements in these two behavioral aspects after the removal of these colorants in their food intake. The use of all colorants, not just the red colorant as proposed by previous research, is known to cause learning difficulties in children if taken excessively during pregnancy (Pressinger).

The Study by Mayo Clinic Staff discusses the various advantages and concerns of using artificial sweeteners as part of the processed foods. Whereas one gram of tabular sugar has about 4 calories, artificial sweeteners have no calorie content. Hence it is an important proponent for loosing weight especially in the case of diabetic patients.

As these are not carbohydrates, they do not cause the sugar level to rise. Further, they do not cause tooth decay as compared to tabular sugar. However, they also have certain disadvantages. Research has been conducted on rats, as mentioned and explained above, and resulted in the positive relationship between artificial sweeteners and bladder cancers.

Thus for decades, they have been a cause of concern of general population as well as the health institutions like the WHO. However, newer study negates this relationship and makes artificial sweeteners safe to consumer, because of the controversial nature of these sweeteners, the use must be regulated by the FDA in USA (Mayo clinic Staff).

The research paper on the adverse effects of acryl amide in processed foods shows the amount of danger these products so readily available in the markets have. This antioxidant is present in fried chips, breakfast cereals, and potato chips etc, products, which are easily available in all supermarkets and are highly consumed by the people. The concentration of this antioxidant in foods has been a source of concern for the international health institutions like WHO (World Health Organization), Swedish National Food and the European Union.

The research demonstrated that this antioxidant is known to cause cancer on the experimented animals and so posed the same threat to human body as well. Individuals consuming high amounts of it are more prone to cancer than individuals whose intake is less. Further, research showed that turmeric, which is a natural traditional ingredient in many foods, acts as an emulsifier to acryl amide. It neutralizes its harmful effects.

And so the traditional Indian dish “Aloo Paratha” which contained acryl amide in potatoes and also contained high amount of turmeric, was found to be very healthy as with the introduction of turmeric, the adverse effect got eliminated. So it shows that the traditional ingredients are far healthier than the processed food and it makes my case against processed food stronger (Nadu).

Conclusion Considering the above given argument, I believe that processed food should be banned or at least some of its most harmful ingredients should be prohibited. The harmful components in processed foods including the Trans fats and excessive sodium inflict a social cost to the entire society, and the harm inflicted to a human life is unprecedented.

Hence it is not an ethical practice to allow processed food industry to thrive as one of the most profitable businesses around the globe, despite a wide awareness of its detrimental consequences. Alternative ways of food preparation should be incorporated and organic food should be made more readily available to adapt to the changed life styles and food patterns of modern day consumers.

Works Cited Mayo clinic Staff. Artificial Sweeteners: Understanding these and other sugar substitutes. 2010. Web.

Pressinger, W, Richard. “Chemical Food Additive Exposure during Pregnancy.” Pediatric Neurology (1978).

Puristat. Digestive Wellness Center. 2006-2011. Web.

Reader’s Digest. Health: 4 Most Harmful Ingredients in Packaged Foods. 2011.

Steven, Mintz. Food in America. 2011. Web.

Szwarc, Sandy. Junkfood Science. Processed foods aren’t real food. 2007. Web.

World Health Organization. Salmonella. 2011. Web.

[supanova_question]

Management and Organizational Behavior Essay (Critical Writing) college essay help online

Table of Contents Emotional terms

Group and decision-making

Motivation and Job satisfaction

Impact of emotions and moods on customer service

Group formation models

Decision-making strengths and weaknesses

Teams in organizations

Managers and teams

Emotional terms The three major emotional terms incorporate “affect, emotions, and moods”. Affect refers to assortment of feelings people experience. Emotions are deep feelings directed to some source. Conversely, mood refers to prevailing general attitudes. It is usually less intense contrasted to emotions and may usually lack contextual stimulus.

Affect is evident in the form of emotions or moods. Emotions culminate from specific events and last shortly, whereas the cause of moods is unclear but last for moments, or infinitely. These phenomena are similar since they involve body arousal with an influence on behavior. On differences, emotions are usually action oriented while moods are cognitive. Moods differ from emotions in magnitude and sources realms.

Group and decision-making The last group formed was in a biology project. Class members had to segregate themselves into groups and decide on which projects to undertake. The lecturer required each group to investigate and emerge with a single useful biological project. The techniques involved in coming up with a desirable project initially started by proposing several feasible projects. Each affiliate researched on a project of interest. Secondly, each project was reviewed from all aspects.

Consequently, elimination based on feasibility, importance, cost, and ultimate impact on the coursework was done. Finally, decision occurred on the project, which appeared lucrative enough. My input to the group helped in forming devoted group mates. Concurrently, it helped in the aspect review of each project proposal with a great influence on decision-making.

Motivation and Job satisfaction Managers should emphasize staff motivation more than job satisfaction. This is because motivated employees execute better than their non-motivated fellows do. The ensuing productivity is improved leading to elevated job contentment. Motivated employees strive to perform better with positivity.

Their creativity and self-esteem is boosted leading more desire to offer their best. Job satisfaction depicts the exact output of workforce. It thus pegged on the real performance elicited by the workers. If managers can strive to motivate their subjects, the job satisfaction they aspire will obviously knock.

Impact of emotions and moods on customer service Emotions, which purchasers relate to the available services, enhance pleasure. People availing consumer services usually focus on influencing clients’ emotions optimistically. Notably, this is tenable when customer service providers develop tactics to improve the emotions of purchasers.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Moods together with emotions impinge service delivery and capability of clients to memorize the services. Affirmative feelings and emotions enhance satisfaction whereas the less constructive ones hinder happiness with services provided. Emotional comments relates to this concept since individuals sentiments and disposition regularly manipulate others when they share surroundings. Emotional, behavioral, and public phenomenon amplify opportunities for transmitting one’s emotions to others.

Group formation models Group creation in any entity follows five models. The first is “Forming,” which incorporates the group members joining themselves with relentless efforts to know each other. Consequently, they form the desired group, which is destined to construct a single objective. Second in the list is “Storming.” At this phase, the group lacks organization with members focusing on various posts while sabotaging group processes.

The characteristics of the stage involve silent chaos with every group affiliate holding divergent opinions. Formation of sub-groups is also rampant at this stage, where gangs emerge against one another. The third is “Norming,” where group cohesion comes arises; furthermore, each affiliate agrees on how the group will operate. There is undisputed concurrence on the group issues as differences diminish.

Fourth is “Performing,” which entails the group’s affectivity and determination to complete goals. Every affiliate participates in the group’s activities with full devotion. This stage indicates the triumphs of group’s destiny. “Adjourning” is the end phase, which incorporates a planned termination of the faction engagement. The warnings against the use of these models include the inability to measure the socialization process. Equally, they only describe typical individuals but neglect people with extreme traits.

Decision-making strengths and weaknesses In groups, complete ideas and understanding, which are necessary for making better judgments, arise. Regularly, participants conform to the solutions attained thus encouraging collective implementation of the solutions. Further, commitment and inspiration by participants in judgment process escalates the ownership of resolutions thus easy execution of plans. Additionally, authenticity of decisions made is encouraged and persons will adhere to solutions.

Conversely, group decision making consumes significant proportion of time as participants engage in lengthy discussions to arrive at resolutions. Again, participants face demands from others thus buy their opinions while reducing opportunities for weaker people to speak. Notably, decisions made in groups also suffer from ambiguity since participants share responsibility in implementing resolutions without identifying persons answerable for the outcomes.

Teams in organizations The use of teams in firms is popular due to lucrative outcomes attainable. Individuals vary in numerous aspects and when converged, each entity will donate a distinctive contribution, which could have been missing if they were operating alone.

We will write a custom Critical Writing on Management and Organizational Behavior specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More This incorporates varied talents, innovations, and many virtues that augment the organizations performance. Concurrently, teams always commit to certain goals, which become everyone’s prerogative to ensure its accomplishment. In this context, each member endures to offer his/her best to meet the desired goals.

Additionally, tasks are handled enthusiastically while embracing specialization and dissection of labor. Lastly, an organization can easily unveil the distinctiveness in each individual for proper utilization. It is imperative to assert that triumphant organizations emerge due diverse efforts contributed by employees; however, embracing teamwork is evident to uphold prompt results and improved turnovers.

Managers and teams Managers require skills to uplift their subjects to become team participants. They can show their strong passion for teamwork by making it a norm for employees to execute their duties. This increases the likelihood of individuals recognizing the norms of their organization. They can organize workshops to train workers on teamwork benefits. This means that each employee acquires the self-esteem required to embrace teamwork.

Having informal sessions with employees to explain that they must support one another is not an exception. Additionally, managers also need to identify behaviors, which undermine teamwork and streamline activities. They should direct the firm by example through participating in teamwork without prejudice. Each employee can partake, and feel the unity of the workforce through organized forums. Concurrently managers can also guarantee incentives to enthusiastic team players.

[supanova_question]

The March to the Monteria’ and ‘The Factory ship’ Essay best college essay help: best college essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Worker based

The worker’s plight

Style

Conclusion

Introduction There are various platforms that are created by art for the various artists to give their view. One of such platforms is the novel writing. Like in many other artistic products, the themes, styles and topics in different novels are comparable. This is due to common forces that push ands inspire the author into production of the various works. An ideal example is the comparison between The March to the Monteria and The Factory ship. This paper is a brief analysis of the various common themes and styles that these two novels have.

Worker based The basic common agenda that is possessed by these two novels is the use of the worker as the base of argument. The two authors have chosen their characters well with the main characters being persons in the employment industry being either the employers or the employees.

However, the plight of the worker is more dealt with the daily pains that he has to endure being brought out. The march to the Monteria has chosen characters from the plantations. The daily ups and downs that the workers in plantations go through are brought out. On the other hand, The Factory ship has got its characters being chosen from the marine workers. The author explains the life of a marine worker with the challenges that he endures.

The worker’s plight A man has to go through many struggles in an effort to make ends meet. This is the point that is being delivered through Celso the main character in the march to the Monteria. The hardworking character hardly gets to enjoy the fruit of his labor. First his tenure savings in one plantation goes without his enjoyment as he gives it to his father’s creditor.

He does not give up but rather moves to yet another contract where malicious claims are laid against him so as to bind him in the working environment. He is bailed out yet he is entitled to lifetime labor to cleat out the debt. All these are things that are beyond the control of Celso.

On the other hand, the life of the marine workers in The Factory ship is a tragic. The maneuvers of the merchants and the vessel owners leave the marine workers with les to do to lift themselves out of the harsh conditions.

Style The other common item in these two novels is the styles that the authors have used. Both the authors have carefully chosen the words that are used in the novels to include the terminology that is common in the fields that the novels are based in. the march to the monteria has a lot of jargon that is common in agriculture while and The Factory ship has words that are specifically meant for the marine life.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Also the sequence of activities is in order. This is against the tradition that many authors take of presenting recent information before the historical information. While the march to the Monteria was written in English, The Factory ship English copy is a translation.

Conclusion The two books have a lot of item that are common and others that are different. However, it is evident that the many themes that are presented in the novel have a lot of common agenda that make them comparable. To be precise, the plight of workers is clearly brought out in both the novels.

[supanova_question]

Fiscal and Monetary Policies Term Paper college essay help near me

Table of Contents Introduction

Monetary and fiscal policies in the USA during great recession

Conclusion

Works Cited

Introduction Fiscal policy is defined as “government’s program with respect to the purchase of goods and services and spending on transfer payments and also with respect to the amount and types of taxes” (Samuelson and Nordhaus 3). The difference between monetary and fiscal policy is that monetary policy is implemented by the government whereas fiscal policies are designed by the national government.

The government of the United State of America is tasked with the responsibility of managing the economic pace, stabilizing of prices and provision of employment. This is achieved mainly through fiscal and monetary policy. Fiscal policy involves the determination of taxes and monetary policy involves regulation of money supply.

Monetary and fiscal policies in the USA during great recession The government of the USA since the great depression of 1930 has been constantly involved in efforts to find suitable monetary and fiscal policy that will stimulate growth and contribute towards the stabilization of prices.

Monetary policy in the USA is the jurisdiction of the Federal Reserve Bank. It is achieved through the varying of interest rates to either reduce or increases demand. During periods of recession, the interest rate is reduced by the relevant authority to trigger an increased money supply.

Monetary policy is a significant tool widely used during times of recession. Unlike the fiscal policy that is directly under the armpits of serving government, the monetary policy is an independent action of the Federal Reserve which is an independent entity (Policies 1).

The impact of fiscal and monetary policies during the period of recession can be analyzed using the duration analysis. This (duration analysis) models the probability that an event is likely to occur like recession (IMF 116).

Among the monetary measures undertaken during recessions are the interest rate cuts. This however might have limited impact in the times of financial crisis like the one experience during the 2008 unlike fiscal policy which is likely to reduce durations of recession that emanate from financial crisis.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More This fiscal policy is achieved through government acting as the last spender. The 2008 recession led to large decrease in consumption rate in households. The fact that the recession was synchronized left limited chance of recovery. The decrease in the consumption rate in the USA resulted to decline in external demand for other countries.

Fiscal policies have been considered the best measure that can cure recession. According to Keynes, fiscal policy solves the real problem. Among the fiscal policies implemented during the great recession are;

Boosting aggregate demand; despite this being identified as one of the policies to be implemented, during the great recession, there has been lack of unanimity on how the aggregate demand can be pushed. During this period the government enlarges its spending with increase in unemployment, cushioning of the jobless and the poor.

This period is characterized by the decrease in tax revenue due to the limited economic activity. Increasing the aggregate demand among the households and the businesses is also another measure that the government undertakes to curb recession. To increase investment the government of the USA provided direct aid to states and firms in form of grants and loans (Tcherneva 4).

In 2008, the government of the USA increased its expenditure, in the era of G. Bush; the injection of government spending was in the purchasing of non performing assets from the balance sheet of ailing banks, despite being carried by the Federal Reserve it was a fiscal policy since Federal Reserve can not purchase private sector liabilities unless ordered by the congress.

The government also injected a lot of cash to the general Motors and the Citigroup besides nationalizing the insurance company AIG. This was aimed at stabilizing the balance sheets of these banks.

President Obama also implemented another fiscal policy referred as American recovery and Reinvestment Act of 2009 (ARRA). This program appropriated $787 billion and $288billion in tax cuts and benefits to both individuals and families. It also supplemented temporary assistance to poor families with emergency funds.

We will write a custom Term Paper on Fiscal and Monetary Policies specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The above policies could not effectively deal with the recession. This is because the measures by the government where not in tandem with what other players did. It happened that when the government increased spending, firms, household and states reduced their spending. Also this had the short term effect of solving the recession since it did not boost the net output.

This government measure was short term since it did not fulfill the desire of the policy makers which was to create employment. The short term effects of these policies were that they helped solve the economic recession by achieving the short term intentions (Tcherneva 5).

The long term effect of ARRA was the creation of employment. It was argued in the Romer-Bernstein report that without the ARRA, the unemployment rate could be as high has 9% and with a strong fiscal policy it could have made it 8%. The reality on the ground was that unemployment was hovering around 10% which was a record high and exceeded the (natural) rate.

The ARRA helped the economy get out of the crisis since it enhanced spending on health care, unemployment and infrastructure. The stimulus package as it is known was aimed at promoting investment and consumer spending

These fiscal policies have not targeted creation of employment but instead interested with the economic growth which is argued could have been the other way round. This was contrary to what Keynes advocated for; this was a direct job creation and not government spending which was short term (Baumol and Blinder 31). The following graph indicates how the global recessions led to massive unemployment in the USA.

Figure 1

Among the monetary rates implemented by the USA during the recession included the following

Cutting the interest rate; the federal reserves’ response to the inflation was to cut the interest rate by up to 500 percentage point. This was implemented by the federal open market committee (FOMC). Although this was unconventional way but it was considered a viable option for cutting the inflation.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Fiscal and Monetary Policies by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Increasing liquidity in banks; this was done after the collapse of the Lehman brothers. This however was not substantial to curb the crisis since despite the presence of ample liquidity in banks, there were still concerns about bank capital and its assets and hence credit risk could limit the ability of banks to extend credit, this left companies without any specific sources of funding.

This was implemented through the introduction of exceptional long term operations and also through modified discount window. This was aimed at breaking the shortfall of money supply and also to lengthen refinancing operations (Katkov 27)

The Federal Reserve also introduced the policy of term action (TAF) and the term securities lending facility (TSLF). This was aimed at providing liquidity to wider parties. Lastly, the Federal Reserve introduced the policy communication which was aimed at improving its communication with the markets.

The effects of these policies were that banks improved their lending capacity; this had the effect of creating a higher risk of defaulting and two banks could charge a high interest rate to enable them offset this risk (Janus 17).

The increased supply of credit would prove dangerous to the economy. The practice of commercial banks lowering interest rates led to an increase in money supply in the market and also increase demand for investment goods. The fall in interest rate is only a temporary measure, Ricardo also argued that increased domestic money will act as an austerity measure that will excite the common citizens but will not provide a solution to the problem of recession (Ricardo 266)

Conclusion The policies that were used by the Federal Reserve were considered unconventional and were only aimed at achieving short term objectives and quickly arresting the recession. The long term measures were not considered and hence still places the United States at a higher risk of experiencing a recession due to its inability to overcome another recession. There is a need for long term solutions.

Regarding to the fiscal policy, several scholar and economic commentators have described them as just austerity measures which were formulated to solve the short term issues. The provision of employment which is considered a long term issue was not adequately addressed.

The increased government spending can not in any way contribute to economic growth. The creation of employment is considered the long term plan which can provide permanent solution. Yes both policies helped mitigate the recession but they did not factor in the long term solutions.

Works Cited Baumol, William and Blinder, Alan. Macroeconomics: Principles and Policy. New York: Cengage Learning, 2010. Print.

IMF. Crisis and recovery: World economic and financial surveys, World economic outlook. New York: Prentice Hall, 2009. Print.

Janus, Jakub. The monetary policy response to the late 2000s recession in the United States. Macroeconomy, 2010. Web.

Katkov, Alexander. The great recession of 2008-2009 and Government’s role. Johnson

[supanova_question]

Odysseus Heroism Essay essay help online free

Table of Contents Faith and Religion in “The Wife of Bath”

The Prince: Machiavellian Philosophy

Similarities between Quran and Analects

Works Cited

Wily Odysseus emerged as a hero in the poem, “Odysseus Strings His Bow”. He fought in many battles that cost him separation from his family. He did not give up until he was re-united with his family. At first, he was the king of Ithaca, an implication that he possessed excellent leadership skills.

In the course of his life at one time Odysseus fell in love with Helen’s cousin Penelope. Penelope bore him a son whom they named Telemachus. He was afraid that this would be known and to cover for the same he pretended to be insane. His scheme was discovered by Palamedes who placed his child (Palamedes’) to find out if really Odysseus was insane. It was expected that he (Odysseus), being insane, could harm the child but he did not. This led to a conclusion by the others that he was not insane (Historylink 1).

Odysseus was also a brave and clever warrior. He formulated the trick of the great wooden horse to give victory to the Greeks. This idea brought an end to the war of Trojans and Greeks which had taken a period of ten years (Historylink 1).

Odysseus had left his wife Penelope who had faithfully waited for him till he came back. She had made promises to him that she would wait for him. Penelope had made all efforts to avoid marrying another man. At the time of his return, many people believed that Odysseus was dead (McIlvain 1). He was a hero because he had for himself a very faithful wife.

More about This Topic What prevents Odysseus from killing the sleeping Cyclops? 5 242 Which events are part of the road of trials in Odysseus’s heroic quest? 5 77 What motivated Odysseus to reveal his name and put his men in more danger? 5 38 What does Odysseus do on the island of Cicones that best shows the trait of leadership? 5 132 The long away stay of Odysseus made people think that he was dead. A group of men took over his palace and had even tried to date his wife. One of the suitors, Antinous wanted to kill Odysseus’s son who was meant to be the next prince. Telemachus had made efforts to get these people out of the palace but they overpowered him (Notes 1).

On his way home, Odysseus encountered many gods on the way. Some of the gods such as Poseidon had issues with Odysseus. Athena was the one who pleaded with Poseidon to let him go to his home Ithaca. Odysseus was famous even to the gods who had heard of his victories: “When he identifies himself as Odysseus, his hosts, who have heard of his exploits at Troy are stunned” (Notes 1).

Odysseus finally made it to his home. Surprisingly, not even his wife could recognize him, apart from his nurse, Eurycleia. Odysseus was angered by the condition of his palace. Maids went to sleep with suitors at night. Athena a god asked him to stop his anger and appreciate what he had: wife Penelope, son Telemachus and the palace (McIlvain 20).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Odysseus made a long conversation with his wife Penelope who could not recognize him. She told him of how much she missed her husband. This was where the nurse recognized him as he cleaned his feet. The nurse recognized a scar that was on his feet but Odysseus’ look stopped her from telling Penelope (McIlvain 19). He was a hero because he made it to have a long conversation with his wife ensuring that she did not recognize him.

Penelope then decided to put up a contest. She said that the man who would be able to string Odysseus’ great bow and fire it through a row of twelve axes would become his husband. She chose this contest because only his husband Odysseus had been able to do it. Odysseus had not revealed his identity. He looked like a beggar all this time. The beggar, Odysseus asked for the bow to try. Antinous mocked him. Surprisingly, he effortlessly stringed the bow and sent it through the axes (McIlvain 21). This skill was a character of a hero as well as outdoing all other men.

More about Odysseus Heroism Why Does the Cyclops Invite Odysseus Back to the Island? 5 165 Who is Tiresias in the Odyssey? 5 80 What are the major conflicts in the Odyssey? 5 777 How many suitors in the Odyssey have taken over the house? 5 26 Odysseus in anger turned against Antinous and the maids and killed them. Finally, Penelope was reunited with her husband after revealing to her that he was Odysseus. He was a hero because he could do anything to achieve his goal (McIlvain 22). He was re-united with his wife because of one special skill of using a bow. He convinced his wife Penelope that he was Odysseus by telling her about the bed he had made from a still rooted olive tree which was only known to him (McIlvain 24).

Faith and Religion in “The Wife of Bath” This poem was based on Christian values in marriage. The poem was derived from the Bible; 1Corinthaians 7:1-9. Behaviour of women was described and outlined by Christian traditions. Christianity guided morals in the society. The speaker told of how marriage was for her. Since she was 12 years of age she had been married five times in church. All the men she married were well up and had inherited wealth (McIlvain 1).

Marriage in this context was based on Christian values. One was only supposed to wed once: “That since Christ went never but once, to a wedding, in the Cana of Galilee, that by that same example he taught me, that I should be wedded but once” (Benson 1).

The tale teller also used the Bible to justify her multiple marriages. She used some examples like that of Jacob, and Abraham and claimed that they were saints but never had more than one wife. She said this in a tone of persuasion. The tale teller narrated her experiences using Biblical quotes:

Lo, here the wise king, dan Solomon, I believe he had wives more than one, As would God it were lawful unto me, To be refreshed half so often as he! What a gift of God had he because of all his wives! (Benson 1)

We will write a custom Essay on Odysseus Heroism specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Christianity was the basis of morality. Those who were able to uphold the moral standards were very few. There were two characters that played different roles in the church, the pardoner and the Summoner. They were corrupt. The pardoner was the one received those who had sinned while the summoner was responsible bringing the sinner to the church. The summoner had committed a crime that he accused others for.

The poem was made of instances of preaching so it could teach on faith. The preaching was made of rules and texts from the Bible. The preacher could explain the Biblical principles to the audience who had little knowledge about the scriptures. These teachings could thus explain the moral theories of this society.

Further Research What’s the Role of Phemius in the Odyssey? 5 264 Which excerpt from part 2 of the Odyssey best supports the conclusion that Odysseus is clever? 5 238 Who is Calypso? 5 48 Why Telemachus murdered the maids and Melanthius? 5 31 In this story, the pilgrims were knowledgeable in that they knew the basic rules that are laid by the Bible from the sermons they heard in church. The pardoner used many supporting scriptures to justify immoral behaviours of the drunks. He quoted people from the Bible such as Herod, Lot and the sins they committed in their drunkenness. The pardoner was very corrupt in that he used scriptures to justify his immoral actions.

The tale described faith in Christianity. It said that those who lived in chastity were following Christian teachings. Those people would always sing a new hymn. This was a call to perseverance in whatever one went through. The most important thing was to obey God’s commands so as to make it to heaven.

The Prince: Machiavellian Philosophy “The Prince” story was written by Niccolo Machiavelli. He dedicated his writings to his grandson on how to maintain power as a leader. His advice was his philosophy. He had previously been a leader of Florence in Italy. His experiences with Politician Cesare Borgia were ruthless.

He drew his writings from his leadership skills. This was because the tactics he used in to rule people at that time worked out for them. His message was on how his grandson could protect himself as a Prince. Maintenance of power was his main interest. Machiavelli had been accused of conspiracy which led to his imprisonment. This was when he wrote this story, “The Prince” (Amazon 1).

Firstly, Machiavellian offered his philosophies on how to retain power as a prince. In the first chapter, he recommended imitation of the style and techniques of rulers who had previously made it to rule over their territories (Amazon 1). He described two types of states, Republics or Principalities.

Principalities included new and hereditary principalities. His perspective was that it was easier to govern hereditary states because those who were ruled by the state family were familiar with the ruling of the prince family and the subjects would always love the ruling family unless they misbehaved (Notes 1).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Odysseus Heroism by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Secondly, as a Prince one was supposed to limit the freedom of citizens (Amazon 1). Princes were supposed to have dominion over weak surrounding states. The prince was also supposed to weaken the strong states. He believed that the weaker states would always naturally support the stronger side and thus the prince power would not be at threat (Notes 1).

The prince was supposed to have a strong military force that was made of local people and not foreigners. He thought that foreigners could not be trusted. Skills in leading the troops were very essential for the prince (Amazon 1). This would secure the Prince’s power.

He also believed that a prince was supposed to use violence, trickery and insincerity to gain his political interests. On this, he recommended that a prince was not supposed to use these tactics unnecessarily (Amazon 1): “It makes him (ruler) hated above all things, as I have said, to be rapacious, and to be a violator of the property and women of his subjects, from both of which he must abstain” (Amazon 1).

He said that a prince was supposed to increase the wealth of the state by whichever means whether good or bad. The reason for this was so as to ease the burden of paying taxes to his citizens (Amazon 1). Plundering of enemy’s money or treasury was one of the tactics if an opportunity presented itself to him. However, his advice to the prince was to increase taxes if need arose to maintain his state.

The prince was also supposed to strike a balance of generosity to the citizens. Doing according to the will of citizens was an important tactic of maintaining ruler ship; but the prince was not supposed to always follow their wish (Amazon 1). To guard against crime in his state, the prince was supposed to have punishments which could suit the criminals fairly.

More on the Topic What Excerpt from Part 2 of the Odyssey Best Establishes Odysseus’s Weakness? 5 461 Which Greek values are found in The Odyssey? 5 487 Why The Odyssey is an epic poem? 5 38 In the Odyssey – Amphimedon, what motivates Odysseus to dress as a beggar? 5 144 Very harsh punishments were not recommended because they could trigger hatred of citizens to the prince. On the other hand, if little punishment was given to great criminals, people would complain and probably overthrow his kingdom. He put it that it was better for people to hate the prince other than to love him, but his actions was supposed to avoid people’s hatred (Amazon 1).

The Prince was supposed to appoint court officials who were trustworthy and able to tell the truth without fear of offending the ruler. However, they were supposed to serve for the ruler’s interest (Amazon 1).

Similarities between Quran and Analects The Quran and The Analects are used to guide moral principles in societies. Quran is used as a holy book for the Muslims and Analects of Confucius are used by the Chinese. The two books guide the believers on how to live a good fulfilling life.

The two books uphold good morals. Everyone who follows the rules and guidelines set by them gets a reward. The Qur’an recommends moral values including “genuineness, sincerity, modesty, peacefulness, compassion, justness, tolerance and forgiveness” (Yahya 1). Analects of Confucius have moral teachings. The Analects encourage people to love each other. People are not supposed to mistreat each other. Leaders are not allowed to show selfishness to other people (Ross 1).

The two books encourage people to treat each other in a fair manner. People are supposed to treat others as they would like to be treated. The Analects advocates for the following:

If what you don’t want for yourself, you shouldn’t do to others, and then you would like others to do for you what you would indeed like for yourself…If you desire to establish yourself, then establish others. (Ross 1)

In Qur’an, righteousness demands one to spend for the sake of love of other people. The Qur’an encourages that people should treat each other with respect irrespective of their social standing (Ipaki 1).

Good things follow those who obey the rules and laws set by the two books. In Analects, a good leader was easily obeyed even without having to use force on the people. The bad leader without good morals could not be obeyed even if he gave orders to the people (Ross 1).

Both books honour human life. Violence is discouraged in both the Quran and Analects. Killing of the innocent is prohibited in the Quran.

If someone kills another person, unless it is in retaliation for someone else or for causing corruption in the earth- it is as if he had murdered all mankind. And if anyone gives life to another person, it is as if he had given life to all mankind. (Ipaki 1)

More about This Topic What does Mentor do for Odysseus in the Odyssey? 5 63 Which excerpt from The Odyssey best shows that the ancient Greeks greatly valued the idea of home? 5 268 Which excerpt from the Odyssey best demonstrates the importance of perseverance in Greek society? 5 119 What are some of the apparent values in the Iliad and the Odyssey? 5 98 Confucius said that a good government does not need to kill. Having good example in leadership would help people to obey the rules (Ross 1).

The two books uphold morality above all other things. The conditions and situations in which one is subjected to should never corrupt his moral values. In Analects, “The Gentleman doesn’t worry about pay, profit, or poverty in comparison to Morality” (Ross 1). In Quran the emphasis is on avoiding the wrong, “A good action and a bad action are not the same. Repel the bad with something better” (Ipaki 1).

Goodness is connected to ritual in Analects (Ross 1). In Quran, if any deed is not for Gods pleasure, the deed becomes unrighteous. All good things done for other people should have their intensions in pleasing God (Ipaki 1).

The two books condemn stealing and support acquisition of wealth in the right way. Analects say, “Everyone wants wealth and rank, but can only get them in the right way” (Ross 1). Violence was never supposed to be the means of wealth acquisition. The Quran condemns mischief and the corrupt people are subject to a curse (Ipaki 1).

Works Cited Amazon. The Prince. Cumming study Guides. Web.

Benson, Larry. The wife of Bath’s Prologue and Tale.Harvard, 2008. Web.

Historylink. Odysseus. History, 2004. Web.

Ipaki. Righteous Deeds. Ipak. Web.

McIlvain, John. The Odyssey. Leasttern, 2004. Web.

Notes, Spark. The Prince. Spark Notes, 2011. Web.

Ross, Kelley. Confucius. Friesian, 2011. Web.

Yahya, Harun. True wisdom described in the Qur’an. Harunyahya, 2011. Web.

[supanova_question]

“Picture This” the Novel by Joseph Heller Analytical Essay best college essay help: best college essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Joseph Heller’s implications

Conclusion

Introduction The novel “picture this” by Joseph Heller is more or less written in relation to Rembrandt’s painting the Aristotle Contemplating the Bust of Homer which in1961 was sold to the Metropolitan Museum of Art. The themes that Heller actually focuses on are those of war, money and government. Another important aspect that he looks at is that of justice and just how much it lacks in the ancient democracies.

Joseph Heller’s implications Heller however mentions that Pericles was intolerant of written critism just like all the great leaders of democracies who were proud of their freedom of expression. He goes on to say that, he would have excoriated the press had it been there.

This in other words implied that given the role of the media which to this day is to monitor the activities of the government, Pericles having initiated a war did not want the interference of the media in his affairs. The Peloponnesian war which he initiated and made inevitable is what the media was shedding light on hence infuriating Pericles.

The writer, given the era in which this novel was written viewed war as a rather in inevitable act. The more land a nation conquered the better, since this was a way through which they could create an empire. Towards the end though, Joseph Heller tries to bring out the moral of the story which is that wars are pointless as well as destructive.

This is according to the previous experiences in wars which in most cases led to the loss of a huge number of lives as well as property. This loss of property in a particular nation would lead to an escalation of another war for it to be able to steal enough from its victims. He also tries to illustrate that very little can be solved via violence and war, in other words he proposes that diplomacy should be applied in order to avoid unnecessary loss of lives and property.

If Pericles had the audacity to mention that he would do something irritating had the press been there, clearly shows that this leader was rather irrational. More so, it seems like war and violence was a way of life during the seventeenth century all the way to the Second World War.

Significantly, we get to note that diplomacy did not have a chance of taking root during this time given the “culture” of violence that these ancient societies were used to. It was only after the devastating Second World War that the stupidity of violence was eradicated by the introduction of diplomacy amongst nations.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In his novel, Joseph Heller tries to bring out the aspect that most of the leaders of the then “democracies” did not abide by the principles of the democracy. Principles such as every individual has a right to life and that everyone within a territory had a right to freedom of expression were just but a fallacy to win over leadership positions.

Therefore, Pericles was following on the footsteps of his neighboring nation’s leaders as well as his predecessors in suppressing the rights of the individuals in his territory. According to Joseph, he did this by barring the media from criticizing his actions which included his fuelling of the Peloponnesian war.

From the above quotation, Joseph reveals that history has a way of repeating itself. This is as a result of the various wars that have been taking place from time to time over the same reasons. Hence, he goes ahead and mentions that this must be stupidity given the consequences of war are never positive.

Heller in his novel discloses that there have been pointless cycles of greed by the previous as well as the current leaders in the various democratic states. This is somehow accurate given that he was comparing in writing the different periods in history when these activities were taking place.

In another instance, Joseph is explains just how these leaders are proud of being heads of democracies yet they do not implement the principles. “Excoriating the press” are such strong words which mean that the leaders would do anything possible to do away with them which in most cases will be getting rid of them entirely.

We should also bare in mind that the barring by Pericles and other democratic leaders of the media to voice out their concerns or publicize their activities is more like denying the citizens their right to information. The media represented the voice of the millions and therefore, the leaders of these democracies were rather too greedy and ignorant to let the media do their work.

Conclusion In brief, Joseph tries to imply that democracy is an ancient ideology that only became dominant with the fall of the Berlin wall. But in ancient times, the leaders did not care at all about the principles that democracy upheld given that most of them inherited power anyway. Therefore, important institutions such as the media had no or very little to contribute in the politics of the day.

We will write a custom Essay on “Picture This” the Novel by Joseph Heller specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More

[supanova_question]

United States’ Foreign Policies to Egypt and Libya Foreign Policies before Uprisings Essay essay help free

Table of Contents Foreign Policies before Uprisings

Foreign Policies after the Uprising

Differences between Previous and Current Policies

Future Foreign Policies

Works Cited

Foreign Policies before Uprisings The United States have always enjoyed a cordial relationship with Libya and Egypt before the turmoil. The previous administrations the U.S. had very sound policies towards the two States, which were meant to strengthen ties.

The U.S. government never came up with policies projected to force the leaders of the two States to be accountable. Insisting on things like democracy and liberalization of the economy could anger the leaders of these States and hence straining the economic ties. The U.S. supported Libya in its endeavors while the United States benefited from reduced fuel prices.

The U.S. government protected Libya from the angers of the reformists and other aggressions from outside. The autocratic leaders were supplied with weapons from the American arms industries. The American engineering industry benefited from the relations because it reaped maximally. The government of the U.S. avoided any conflicts with the two States since such conflicts can interfere with the multilateral relations.

The U.S. companies marketed the products from Libya and supplied the Egyptian industries with facilities such as machinery needed for production. The relations between the U.S. and the embattled States before the uprisings can therefore be termed as peaceful and cooperative. The relations were mutual since the two parties benefited, though the U.S. benefited more.

It is argued that there is no common government at the international system. States are more concerned with their self-interests. The U.S. supported the two countries because it benefited from such support. States at the international system exist according to the Hobbestian state of nature.

The international system is anarchic meaning that the mighty States, such as the U.S. subjugates the lesser ones. States at the international system have not yet formed a Leviathan, which is a common authority in charge of overseeing the affairs of all States. Libya and Egypt were supported by the U.S. only because of one reason, oil. After the uprisings, things changed.

The U.S. swiftly changed and demanded accountability from the leaders of the two States. This was aimed at preserving its image at the international system. The United States is always depicted as the image of democracy. It is not surprising that the U.S. voted for the decision at the U.N. Security Council authorizing the imposition of the no-fly zone to Libya. The U.S. foreign policies towards these states were inspired by economic motives.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Foreign Policies after the Uprising The U.S. can bear Mubarak’s and Kaddafi’s defeat because it is uncertain Egyptian ruling leaders as well as Libyan autocrats will refuse to continue operating within the American precincts. Certainly, they will grip to the Washington’s lap. It is equally cynical that the military council managing Egypt at the command of the ruling class will lead the state in a way acceptable to the employees and students who ousted Mubarak.

It was sending a warning to the leader of the military council, Field Marshal Mohamed Tantawi, who served faithfully at Mubarak’s regime in ruling Egypt for years. The insurgents observe that while the tyrant is departed, vital features of the stretched repression are expected to stay put.

Washington is contented with the progress so far. What the United States cannot accept is a public rebellion in a State inferior to the U.S. that demolishes the established state machinery and starts edifying a fresh radical government devoted to throwing out the entire traces of the previous imperialist authority.

When Nicaragua attempted it, Uncle Sam instigated the Contras. After Cuba made it, the U.S. is still harsh to its little neighbor for proclaiming sovereignty from its Yankee overlord, 52 years afterward (Grimmett 76). The concern is whether the Egyptian citizens will be contended when fresh provisions are made in some months to come.

In Libya, the U.S. of late has taken a more active position as opposed to the time when the uprising started. It has joined other major powers in condemning the outraged Libyan government for assaulting innocent citizens and committing crimes against humanity. The U.S. forces have so far been deployed to the region to check any terror activities that might crop up in the course of the uprising.

Differences between Previous and Current Policies The U.S. before the uprisings had friendly policies that were meant to entice the leaders to dispose of oil products at fair prices to the people of America. The U.S. supported all forms of governments in the region without considering their political responsibilities. Things have so far changed.

Every leader wishing to take over power is assessed carefully to determine whether he will abide by the rules and regulations of the United Nations (Bret 21). The current governments must be accountable and responsive to the needs of the people. It can be summarized that, while the policies before the uprisings were cooperative in nature, the policies after the uprisings are full of conflicts.

We will write a custom Essay on United States’ Foreign Policies to Egypt and Libya Foreign Policies before Uprisings specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More The Libyan autocrats are no longer protected because the whole world is now keen on the activities taking place. Supporting totalitarianism will be contradictory to the U.S. principles. For that reason, the U.S. is calling upon the leaders to liberalize the economy and ensure that basic human rights are adhered.

Future Foreign Policies The U.S. policies in future will have to be tactful since the incoming governments may come up with new strategies to lockout the U.S. from oil proceeds. The secret agents are working out a formula to ensure that friendly leaders take over power in the two States. The leaders are expected to support the United States in the U.N. Security Council and its quest to achieving national interests.

The future foreign policies will be all encompassing and inclusive. The U.S. will come up with future policies after scrutinizing the idiosyncratic variables, that is the behavior of leaders and the institutional or governmental variables, implying the governmental institutions such as the civil service and the executive.

Future foreign policies will be shaped by the aftermath of the uprising. Should governmental powers land to the hands of the Islamic radicals, the U.S. will be forced to come up with more radical policies to counter the influence of the group. This could be one of the setbacks for the U.S. government.

Works Cited Adams, Chris. “Libyan rebel leader spent much of past 20 years in suburban Virginia.” McClatchy Newspapers, 2011. Web.

Bret, Stephens. “The Libya mission was never about regime change.” Wall Street Journal, March 2011. Web.

Grimmett, Richard. “The War Powers Resolution: After Thirty-Six Years.” Fas.org, 2010. Web.

Gutterman, Steve. “No UN mandate to attack Gaddafi forces: Russia.” Reuters, 2011. Web.

Not sure if you can write a paper on United States’ Foreign Policies to Egypt and Libya Foreign Policies before Uprisings by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Kareem, Fahim. “Rebel leadership shows signs of strain in Libya.” New York Times, 2011. Web.

Youssef, May. “Anti-Gaddafists Rally in London.” Al Ahram Weekly, AlJazeera, 2005. Web.

[supanova_question]

Colorism as an Act of Discrimination in the United States Research Paper a level english language essay help: a level english language essay help

Introduction Colorism is an act of discrimination in which people are treated differently in accordance to their skin color. This practice began during the slavery period where dark skinned blacks were forced to work in fields while the lighter-skinned blacks were forced to work as house helps. Many years down the line, it is true to everyone that the lighter skinned were thought to be the best and got better treatment in different fields of life such as at work and in school.

Colorism is then a situation whereby one color is considered first while others follow. Many people believe that the light-skinned people discriminate against the dark skinned people. It is unbelievable that color means a lot in jobs, education, and income and in relationships. In addition, the light-skinned females are considered first in any offer all other persons. Consequently, it comes that the upper class are the light-skinned, mostly women and the lower class are the darker skinned, mostly men.

In the United States, colorism is one of the practices that have remained since centuries ago in the slavery period. The blacks were discriminated against the whites. In the United States, colorism has resulted to different classes of people. Colorism has advanced since then and it can now be seen happening between different colors in the society. In addition, this practice has grown in the whole world and each human being has the fate of colorism but the big problem remains on whom to blame (Hall, 2008).

Discussion History of colorism

Skin color discrimination began during the slave trade. Slaves were transported from West Africa through the Atlantic Ocean to America where they worked in farms of the Europeans. This in its own was a form of color discrimination as the light skinned Americans could not be engaged in the hard labor.

The dark skinned Africans who were enslaved and were the ones to do the heavy duties on the farms. The Europeans did not want to make the Americans work since they looked at them as being closer to them in terms of skin color. This kind of colorism traced to a number of centuries ago (Hall, 2003).

Africans suffered a lot because of the whites. At that time, the Americas were under control of the Europeans. It is very clear that colorism began in America and that is the reason it is in real practice in the U.S. to date. In the fields, there was specialization of labor.

The Specialization led to the categorization of workers into two groups where we had the field workers who remained in the fields cultivating and digging and the house-helps who worked in the houses of the field owners (Johnson, 2003). The fieldwork was considered more hectic than any other work in the farms.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More While assigning employees different works, color was the key factor that was utilized. The dark skinned Africans had to work the hard way in the white farms as the light skinned worked as house helps. The reason for the latter was that the light-skinned Africans were more similar to the slave owners while the dark skinned Africans were thought to be threatening. As time went by, the light skinned Africans had a better socio-economic life as compared to the dark skinned Africans who remained poor (Hall, 2008).

Colorism in America (light versus the dark) As seen earlier, it is evident that the United States is one of the nations that have a long history on colorism. This began with the slave trade and slavery. Blacks were captured from Africa and taken to the U.S to work in the farms of the Europeans. In the “brown paper bag test,” that was used to examine discrimination, Africans and Americans were examined and it was revealed that the blacks were discriminated against.

It was found out from the research that in the job market, colorism was highly prevalent. The results of the research showed that a light-skinned woman with a bachelor’s degree is likely to be shortlisted for a typical job than a dark-skinned woman with a master’s degree in a given field and with long experience in the job.

The criterion followed in this case is not expertise but which color. In colleges and universities, leaders in the organizations are mostly light skinned and even as selection of those joining various institutions is conducted, color plays a key role as the light skinned join the best colleges and universities. The dark skinned with no option join lower class institutions that experience racial differences (Shrage

[supanova_question]

Race in Ancient Egypt Essay college essay help near me: college essay help near me

Race describes classification of human into distinct groups by considering factors such as heritable phenotypic characteristics or geographic ancestry. It is influenced by such traits as appearance, culture, ethnicity, and socio-economic status of individuals.

Race in ancient Egypt In the Ancient Egypt, there was minimal consideration in terms of race. Majority of population were black individuals, while the entire world was devoid of racism. Importantly, the dark skin was never seen as a sign of being inferior, this being depicted by the entire artworks from the ancient Egypt, Greece, and Rome.

Civilization originated from Western countries, when the European powers colonized Africa in the nineteenth century. This resulted to the introduction of numerous adverse effects within the black community.

The black pharaohs sprang from African civilization that had flourished on the southern banks of the Nile, and reunified and filled the landscape with glorious monuments. Western scholars began to pay attention to the skin tone of Egyptian individuals, as they viewed the blacks as being primitive and inferior compared to the white explorers.

It is believed that all ancient Egyptians, from King Tut to Cleopatra, were black Africans. They ruled Ancient Egypt for thousands of years, after conquering non-black rule and accomplishing numerous tasks. Moreover, the stability of Egypt was always restored by the black leaders from the south.

Ancient Egyptians had no racial distinctions between their populations, and they acknowledged and depicted the distinct differences that existed between themselves and the Libyans, Asiatic, Persians, Greeks, and Romans. Due to race infiltration in Egypt, majority of the black people were under-educated and denied the facts that spelled out the true history of Ancient Egypt, achievements of the black population, and their original works and practices.

This was being spearheaded and promoted by the Europeans and Arab invaders. Racism affected the research process and findings, as most of the findings were only attributed to the whites, including their works. Moreover, various artifacts and certain achievements by the blacks were changed to depict the whites as being supreme.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The black population was regarded as having no influence on development of early civilization in Egypt, although they had the greatest influence in majority of the developments that had taken place in the ancient times. Racism was distributed across generations of teachers, students, and the public through misinformation of various known facts that described true black Africans. Ancient Egypt was full of numerous artifacts that existed from the ancient times.

These were made and designed by native Africans and later discovered by the white explorers who came as a result of colonization within Ancient Egypt, including the discovery of seven large stone statues of Nubian pharaohs, various portraits of blacks that were changed to depict white supremacists and so on. Majority of the occurrences, artifacts, and discoveries were turned round because of the existing racism to depict the strengths and achievements of the whites at the expense of the black population in ancient Egypt.

Conclusion Ancient Egypt faced racism because of the introduction of civilization after the process of colonization in the nineteenth century, when the whites promoted oppression of the black population in terms of education, information, and the general achievements that had been brought by the black Africans. This led to majority of the achievements, works, and artifacts and so on, that were done and accomplished by the blacks being linked and notated to the whites.

[supanova_question]

Should Cigarette Smoking be Banned? Argumentative Essay essay help site:edu

Table of Contents Introduction

Arguments against the Issue

Arguments for the Issue

Discussion

Conclusion

References

Introduction Cigarettes are made from tobacco leaves. Use of tobacco started in Central America around 6,000 B.C. After 5,000 BC, the Mayan community started chewing and smoking tobacco leaves. They also used it for medicinal purposes in healing of wounds. Later on people invented pipe smoking which was followed by manufacturing of cigarettes in the mid 1800’s (Smoking, 2010).

Many people smoke cigarettes to lighten up and enhance their concentration at places of work. This essay will discuss why smoking of cigarettes should be banned from the society.

Arguments against the Issue Smoking cigarettes helps people to relax and get better concentration. Mental illness symptoms such as anxiety and Schizophrenia are alleviated by smoking (Russo, 2011); this has been medically proven. Smoking cigarettes helps in socialization as it sets the mood of a smoker into being jovial.

Governments obtain huge amount of money from cigarette manufacturing industries in form of taxes. These industries also create employment opportunities for many people. Banning of cigarette smoking would mean loss of thousands of jobs as well as revenue for the government (Fix, n.d.).

Smoking cigarettes helps in weight management due to the reduced appetite induced in the body by cigarettes. Therefore, smoking is a good and effective weight loss aid (Auctions, 2010).

Arguments for the Issue Smoking cigarettes is one of the major causes of deaths. About 443, 000 people die out of cigarette smoking related illnesses in the U.S. every year (CDC, 2011 ). Cigarettes contain many harmful chemicals; it was found that cigarettes have more than 4,000 chemicals. Most of these components are known to cause cancer.

Smoking is known to cause lung cancer, bladder cancer, stomach Cancer, kidney cancer, cancer of oral cavity and cancer of the cervix. Ammonia, Tar and Carbon Monoxide are found in cigarettes and are very harmful to human body (Society, 2010).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Cigarette smoking has great effects on reproductive health. It is known to cause infertility, still births, low birth weight and sudden infant death syndrome (SIDS). In addition, it affects the bones by reducing their densities. Hip fractures in female cigarette smokers are higher than in female non smokers (CDC, 2011 ).

Discussion Banning of cigarette smoking would come with many benefits. First people’s health would be improved. Health benefits of stopping to smoke are more than the emotional or psychological comfort that are brought by smoking. Banning cigarette smoking would be of great benefit to the young people.

Those in their thirties, in terms of age in years, would still benefit from the reduced risks caused by cigarettes. Old people who would wish stop smoking cigarettes would not be late to do so. Banning of cigarette smoking will be beneficial to all smokers regardless of their age (Society, 2010).

Many cigarette smokers are at higher risk of being infected with different types of cancer. These include: “Lung, Larynx, Oral cavity, Esophagus, Kidney, Cervix, Bladder, stomach among other cancers” (Society, 2010, p. 1).

Smoking induces stress. A research in London showed that a group of people who stopped smoking had reduced stress than those who had continued to smoke after one year; this was because those who continued to smoke greatly depended on cigarettes.

A smoker is more prone to be stressed if he/she is not in a position to quench a thirst for smoking therefore failure to smoke will subjected smokers to stress (Benson, 2010). Banning of cigarette smoking would therefore reduce stress levels in people. Peer groups will be made of non smokers. People will look for other ways to cope with stress and anxiety other than smoking.

Economic burden on countries will be reduced by banning of cigarette smoking: “in the year 2000, 8.6 million people in U.S suffered from at least one chronic disease that was associated with cigarette smoking” (CDC, 2011, p. 1). Majority of these people ailed from more than one of the diseases caused by cigarette smoking (Society, 2010).

We will write a custom Essay on Should Cigarette Smoking be Banned? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Though smoking cigarettes creates employment and contributes to government’s revenues, it causes more harm than good. The quality of life led by cigarette smokers is lowered. Furthermore, their quality of work is decreased because they might not attend to their duties regularly in extreme cases of being affected by ailments caused by cigarettes (Society, 2010).

Banning of cigarette smoking would eliminate exposure of the human body to harmful substances. Tar is carcinogenic. Nicotine is the addictive substance in cigarette that causes mental and emotional dependence on cigarettes (Society, 2010). Nicotine also elevates cholesterol levels in the body.

Carbon Monoxide takes oxygen from the body of the user and this may cause Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary Disorder (Netdoctor, 2005). Banning of cigarette smoking will reduce the above risks which are the main causes of poor health in cigarette smokers.

Reproductive health of people will to some extent be guaranteed by banning of cigarette smoking. Tobacco related infertility in women and impotence in men would be no more. Risks of miscarriage, premature births and still births would be reduced thus saving lives of babies (Society, 2010).

Conclusion Cigarette smoking is a major health challenge. It causes many health problems including reproductive disorders, cancer, stress, heart diseases and stroke. Banning of cigarette smoking would largely benefit people’s health.

References Auctions, G. (2010). Advantages and Disadvantages of Smokinng. Web.

Benson, J. (2010). Smoking increases stress levels. Web.

CDC. (2011). Smoking and Tobacco Use. Web.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Should Cigarette Smoking be Banned? by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Fix, W. Should Smoking be Banned. Web.

Netdoctor. (2005). Smoking Health Risks. Web.

Russo, J. (2011). Health Benefits of Smoking Cigarettes. Web.

Smoking, H. (2010). The History of Smoking. Web.

Society, A. C. (2010). Cigarette Smoking. Web.

[supanova_question]

How Realism Is Brought Out In “Slumdog Millionaire” A Novel by Vikas Swarup Essay custom essay help: custom essay help

Introduction “Slumdog Millionaire” is a novel that was written by Vikas Swarup. The novel was later filmed because many people had showed a lot of interest in the book. Swarup in his novel portrays the adventures of Ram Mohammad Thomas, an orphaned and uneducated waiter from one of the biggest slums in Asia.

Ram was found piled up with clothes that had been donated at the Delhi church in Mumbai. He was adopted and raised up by the priest who was later murdered. Ram wins a billion rupees on a quiz show where he answers twelve questions. He later ends up being taken to jail accused of cheating in the concert. Ram meets a lawyer, Smita Shah to whom he explains his fortune in answering the twelve questions.

He says that all questions were based on his own experience in life and that is why he found it easy answering all the twelve questions. Ram portrays how the best man wins with only little luck. All the adventures of Ram are seen to be real as they can be depicted in real life situations.

Some of the aspects making the novel to seem real are its connection to the Indian society and the story fairy tale elements. There are other ways in which realism has been brought out and with this the discussion shall be aimed at proving the reality in the novel (Singh 68).

Discussion Vikas Swarup has used various styles in his work that make it realistic. His way of organizing his work is also in a way that brings out realism in a very clear and simple way. His descriptions of the characters are also supporting factors to bring out realism in his novel. This realism in the novel is what made it popular and made it to be filmed so that many could access the written work. The ways in which realism is brought out in the novel are as analyzed below (Smith 50).

(I) Realistic fiction Setting and half truths

Setting of the novel makes it seem real. The story begins in jail cell in Mumbai, India, where Ram Mohammad Thomas is a hostage after he was arrested by the police with accusations of cheating. Ram has never been in school and yet he is a position to answer the twelve questions with prowess.

Although later he explains to the lawyer how daily life experiences played a role in helping him answer the questions. It is not easy to belief that Ram is uneducated and yet he can answer the questions and outdo educated people in the concert. The author reflects Ram’s history which is so amazing. It began when Ram was found in a clothes donation box rolled in the clothes and he was a small baby. The clothes were in the Delhi church (Dammer and Albanese 90). He was adapted then and orphaned until he was a grown up.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More He was later employed by a Bollywood star and later he also worked as tour guide at the Taj Mahal. These episodes seem to be half true to be believed as they often happen in real life situation. This makes the story interesting and makes it seem more real than creative. The setting as seen earlier is also depicting real life scenes that people know and thus makes the work of Vikas Swarup seem more real (Connerney 78).

Plot twists and coincidences

The plot of the story is twisted as Ram was a young child and his future life and how he misses education. Ram recounts his entire prior story before going next to another episode.

Also the bad encounters are brought after the good episodes that seem to brighten Ram’s life. For instance, when he is raised up by the priest, he hopes that the priest will help him to get a job. The priest later is murdered and Ram hopes are to avail. When Ram was found rolled in donated clothes in the church, this was a coincidence because maybe the clothes would have been taken to other destinations.

Later it is a coincidence that Ram Mohammad Thomas is a position to answer questions just because he had experienced a life that would make him knowledgeable enough. It is a big coincidence that all the twelve questions in the concert are known by Ram who missed out on formal education. These coincidences and the plot twists on Ram’s life make the story to be perceived as more real rather than creative (Singh 67).

Theme of good versus evil Whenever Ram opts to meet a better life a catastrophe strikes contrary to his expectations. Ram hopes that he will be helped by the priest who raised him as a young child. The pastor was too good for Ram and he views him as his savior. The worst happens when the priest is murdered by a person who was hired to do so.

This makes Ram’s future doomed and he loses focus. Later when he is working as a waiter, he participates in the concert and answers the twelve questions (Smith 137). He is very happy that he has won large sums of money but to his worry, he is arrested and accused of cheating as the police even accept that such a young and uneducated teenager could not answer the questions (Bruyn, Allardice and Shonar 54).

This good scenes and evil scenes as they are brought out in the novel make it seem more realistic. Some people are good like the priest who adopted Ram and catered for his needs until he was a grown up. The police and the concert organizers are bad people as they deny Ram his right and even cause accusations against him. The person who murdered the priest is also an evil person. The use of good versus evil people in the story also makes it seem more real than imaginary (Daniel 98).

We will write a custom Essay on How Realism Is Brought Out In “Slumdog Millionaire” A Novel by Vikas Swarup specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More (II) Modern day life in India Urban myths

Urban myths are part of the devices the author uses. Ram is brought up in a slum and maybe the biggest one in the Asian continent. Clothes are donated to the people in the slum and as they are been dispersed, they find Ram, a small baby enrolled in them. He is then adopted and he grows up under care of the priest who is later murdered by a person who had been paid to do so. Later life gives Ram experiences that make him answer the twelve questions in the concert.

In the modern India, most of the episode in the novel are real as in urban life and more so in the slums. It is believed that in slums cases of murder and also uneducated but experienced teenagers are truly there. Just like in the story, the episodes depict what is really happening in urban centers in India. This makes readers of the story to perceive it as real (Connerney 124).

Narrative style

The author uses first person narrative style to connect to Ram. Ram Mohammad Thomas tells his story in a chronological order from his adoption. Before going to the next episode, Ram recounts his prior episodes to show how the events and his adventures have been coming out. He narrates his story with good episodes coming first and then as time goes by a catastrophe strikes.

This is done orderly for instance, where he answers the twelve questions in the concert and then he feels great having won a lot of money. This is a very good moment for Ram. All of a sudden, Ram is arrested by the police and taken to a jail cell and accused of cheating in the concert. The episodes are narrated in a way that is believable. This makes the adventures of Ram Mohammad Thomas to seem real (Collins 34).

Conclusion The novel “Slumdog Millionaire” by Vikas Swarup is seen to be more real than imaginative. This is because of the different styles and ways that have been used in the novel. The story is set in Mumbai in India a place that is not imaginative. The tales are half true and this makes it seem real.

Also the author uses first person narrative style where the voice of the narrator is brought out. He also uses urban myths like slums that are there in the modern India. The coincidences in the episodes also make it to seem more real. The author is also using the theme of good and evil to make it realistic. The events are in a chronological order and the bad episodes come after the good episodes.

Works Cited Bruyn, Pippa, Allardice, David and Joshi, Shonar. Frommer’s India: Casa nova. Mumbai: Frommer’s, 2010.Print.

Collins, Jim. Bring on the books for everybody: How literary culture became popular culture. Durham: Duke University Press, 2010.Print.

Not sure if you can write a paper on How Realism Is Brought Out In “Slumdog Millionaire” A Novel by Vikas Swarup by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Connerney, Richard. The upside down tree: India’s changing culture. Washington: Algora Publishing, 2009.Print.

Dammer, Harry and Albanese, Jay. Comparative criminal justice systems. London: Cengage Learning, 2010.Print.

Daniel, John. Mega-schools, technology and teachers: Achieving education for all. London: Taylor

[supanova_question]

Change Proposal for Sales Department Essay college admission essay help

Introduction Naturally, human beings resist change for the fear of the unknown among other reasons. This is why it would take a lot to maneuver through the ups and downs associated with bringing change and making sure that the organization embraces it and successfully walks through the transitions.

Kudler Fine Foods Virtual Organization has been giving its customers the best they can and that is why the organization has been so successful in creating lasting relationships with its clientele. However, our market share has not been increasing substantially due to the steep competition in the market.

It is sad to realize that after some research that was conducted in the market, our products were found not to be famous. We have been in the business for a period long enough to be able to cut down our advertising and promotional expenses and still enjoy leading the market but unfortunately, we are as threatened as in our first two year of business. This brings us to what we are not doing; this business should invest more in advertising through the web.

According to Leban

[supanova_question]

Duty of wordsmiths to speak reality Essay college admissions essay help

Professional wordsmiths have mastered the art of articulating and using words in the right context. This has enabled them to command significant authority from passionate readers. They have the ability to make the reader feel, see and experience a situation by their choice of words. Consequently, they capture and fascinate the mind of the reader. For this reason, they are required to have professional ethics and moral standards to match the expectations of the reader.

Wordsmiths should operate under a framework provided by a regulatory body in order to uphold moral integrity. The regulatory body such as the society of professional journalists (SPJ) provides a platform of controlling and promoting equality among wordsmiths for instance the Society of Professional Journalists.

The body also provides an assurance to readers that they will get quality work and that are up to standard. In line with the mandate of this regulatory body, wordsmiths should champion for truth, dignity and integrity in their work hence keeping in mind that they are working in the public interest of the readers. They should act fearlessly even if they are of the unpopular view (Collins 155).

They should be unbiased and independent. Additionally, they should seek primary sources of information and be accountable for any collected information. Wordsmiths should avoid misinterpretation of facts and should not distort information. When wordsmiths submit their work for consumption by the readers, they subject themselves to public scrutiny in terms of standards, quality of work and moral integrity.

They, therefore, should diligently consider these factors when they are executing their work. Wordsmiths face a dilemma between speaking the truth and reducing harm i.e. if wordsmiths speak the whole truth, then harm is inevitable. Essentially, there is a delicate balance between the two factors. Due to the freedom of speech and press, wordsmiths have a leeway on the choice of their words.

The public has put emphasis on publicizing as the best enforcement mode. Streamlining the wordsmiths is purely at the discretion of the public. Wordsmiths should carry out dissemination of information cautiously and in a modest manner. Moreover, putting a spotlight on the wordsmiths regarding their ethical conduct and integrity is a key component in fostering truth and holding them accountable for their reporting.

Wordsmiths should also assess the impact of their work on the public and act diligently when undertaking their work. This, in turn, affirms assurance to the reader that his or her concerns are considered. Additionally, the wordsmiths should avoid misinterpretation of facts at all costs and provide the correct context. This will enable the reader restore confidence on information disseminated by wordsmiths.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Wordsmiths should not be controversial and should avoid lurid curiosity. They should also be creative thinkers and provide an independent opinion. Wordsmiths command a following of readers; this gives them a heavy load and responsibility of both entertaining the readers by being relevant and writing facts without any misinterpretation.

For instance, in the book “The Veil of Heaven” the wordsmith has skillfully selected a choice of words, which vividly bring out his line of thought (Collings 7). He has also employed figurative speech to describe the prevailing situation. Most of the readers never question the integrity of the wordsmith; they consider them to have mastered the art of writing. Readers never understand that sometimes wordsmiths also document their own positions or interests regarding a particular issue.

This may lead to partial examination of situations to suit particular segment of readers. This impairs the interpretation of facts hence giving distorted information to readers. The wordsmith’s stand should not be realized when he or she is writing. This gives that article neutrality and allows readers to draw their own opinions and in accordance with their individual understanding.

However, various issues pose a challenge to wordsmiths first; some principles may cause conflict for instance accountability and independence. The wordsmith is required by the readers to be independent and at the same time accountable. This poses a great challenge to strike a balance between the two. By being independent means, no one should influence the wordsmith when writing to give a true and honest opinion and on the other hand, he or she should accountable on sources of information and claim responsibility.

Secondly, the wordsmith should provide true reporting and should minimize harm that the information may cause. This is also a major limitation because providing true information and at the same time, minimizing harm is very difficult. Achieving this is hard without compromising one of the two factors.

Thirdly, wordsmiths face a lot of pressure from the public in regards to writing topics that are favorable and soothing at the expense of writing real and inevitable facts that are unpopular. This can make their articles not sell and lower their public admiration and popularity. Due to this, wordsmiths tend to avoid controversial topics and issues in the society so as not to damage the public image.

In conclusion, wordsmiths should be individuals of high moral integrity and should take responsibility in all their articles, materials and publications. They should be fair, neutral and unbiased. Readers rely on the honesty, independency and accountability of the wordsmiths when reading their work and they put a lot of trust that the wordsmith was free and fair when he or she was critically examining the subject in question. This in turn will enhance readership and popularity of the wordsmith.

We will write a custom Essay on Duty of wordsmiths to speak reality specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Works Cited Collings, M. Wordsmith: A Science-Fantasy Novel, Volume One: The Veil of Heaven. Maryland, MD: Wildside Press LLC, 2009. Print.

Collins, T. Wordsmith — Writing a Way Home. Virginia, VA: Ravens Yard Publishing, 2003. Print.

[supanova_question]

Influence of Western Culture on Business Research Paper argumentative essay help: argumentative essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Summary of findings and Analysis of the Situation

Prevention of the Problems

Conclusion

References

Introduction Presently, universal interactions affect businesses differently thus causing extensive results. Nevertheless, companies need to investigate and focus on aspects, which may give them openings in enhancing market control.

Certainly, culture is such an attribute in business. It is important in enterprise administration together with merchandise marketing. Culture determines views, behaviors, judgment of persons on business outputs and operations. Thus, it remains crucial for western businesses venturing into other countries, particularly those with fully diverse cultures.

An article by Barboza David under World Business in “The New York Times” will gain usage in exploring this business feature. As reported by Barboza (2007) French company Groupe Danone, which makes animal and drink products expanded into the Chinese marketplace.

It attained this through a common venture with a local firm named Wahaha, which operates in a similar industry. Apparently, the JV was failing because of certain quarrels. The disagreements emerged from issues surrounding creation, operation, anticipations, and commerce culture of the association as regards to conducting production in China (Barboza, 2007). Unquestionably, this resulted into Danone failing to establish in the Chinese market strongly.

Summary of findings and Analysis of the Situation The initial predicament for the failure of the JV entailed its ownership alignment and administration. Further, legal issues as regards to brand name check also emerged. Again, there were problems concerning the company administrative formation.

Apparently, circumstances surrounding “Danone and Wahaha” JV ownership and leadership misunderstandings originated from western culture in business (Barboza, 2007). While bargaining the JV accord, Wahaha gained 49% part. “Danone and Peregrine” equally shared the remaining part (Barboza, 2007).

Effectively, Wahaha assumed full control of the company under the headship of Mr. Zong. Danone later acquired Peregrine accumulating greater part of the venture than Wahaha. Thus, Danone hypothetically assumed leadership of the venture. Wahaha concluded that, the action amounts to purchase by Danone. Consequently, Wahaha argued that, mistrust and rivalry had intruded the association (Barboza, 2007).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Trademark control also emerged as a debatable matter in the joint venture. Wahaha then a “state owned company” entered the association with the determination of reassigning the label to the new venture (Barboza, 2007). Resolving the issue generated legal actions intending to manipulate the Chinese legal techniques. Danone employed western legal tricks and standards in seeking justice, an action that further strained the alliance (Barboza, 2007).

While drafting the agreement, Wahaha gained control of every day activities since they had first capacity to manage the venture. Danone participated in the JV as “board of directors” (Barboza, 2007). Danone employed their western ways of empowering others in this venture without comprehension on its likely consequences.

Frustrations emerged as Wahaha felt overburdened with the JV operations noting Danone would still draw massive profits with negligible contribution (Barboza, 2007). Conversely, Danone noted that, it knew extremely little as regards to the JV.

Prevention of the Problems Perhaps, it was possible to prevent the unprecedented occurrences within the JV. Danone would have resisted the predicaments by acknowledging their unfamiliarity with the Chinese enterprise operations.

Thus, they ought to consider adapting to Chinese business culture with time as opposed to implementing their western culture (Campbell, Netzer,

[supanova_question]

Aging, Culture, Ethnicity and Family Care Essay custom essay help

Bringing Culture Back Home: Aging, Ethnicity and Family Support, Jay Sokolovsky

The author conducts a literature review on the capability of the ethnic community to take care of its aging community. He aims to test the hypothesis that the ethnic community is more than able to take care of its elderly sufficiently. His reviews of the studies that have been conducted by other anthropologists indicate otherwise. In the Hispanic community, the culture was one of close family interaction and profound family loyalty. It has been perceived that the

Hispanic elderly receive the highest level of emotional family support. Sokolovsky highlights studies that have shown the levels of obligation and an expectation of kin support was declining in the Hispanic society. The elderly were not turning to family for assistance preferring to suffer in silence. The research by the author shows the limitations of the informal structures in dealing with the elderly. He proposes that the voluntary agencies should stop putting so much pressure on families to take care of their elderly kin.

Age of Wisdom: Elderly Black Women in Family and Church, Jane W. Peterson

The author sought to understand fully the role of elderly black women in the family and church. Relevant literature appreciated the role of black as wise women in the community. They helped in rearing the grandchildren and gave great advice to the adults. She participates in great decision making.

She is the organizer of the family reunions and the custodian of the family history. The author conducted her own research and spent time with an elderly woman called Lottie. Her experiences reinforced the findings of other studies on the role and importance of elderly black women.

The author spent time in the Refugee Church of God in Christ where she saw the elderly black woman regarded as highly. They are referred as mothers and deemed to be wise. This is due to their experiences in child birth and rearing, illness, death and other challenges in life. This shows the overwhelming support they will get in the family and church due to their age.

The Social and Cultural Context of Adaptive Aging by Southeast Asian Elders, Barbara W. K. Yee

The author over a period of twenty years has conducted mental health workshops. He examines the cultural transformation of the Southeast Asians in America over time from the perspective of the elderly generation. He researches on the coping and adaptive strategies used by the elderly Asians to the different culture in their current resident country.

He highlights his experiences with four elderly Asians in the article. The results showed there were cases of positive and negative adaptation. In America, the elderly advice is not treasured as the younger generation is embracing a whole new culture. These Asians were rescued from their countries by the families so they are totally dependent on their families for financial support.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More They have lost their high status in terms of providing for their families and inheritance. The elderly who lived far from the family, by themselves had a tougher time adjusting to their new life. Yet in houses with teenagers there were high levels of intergenerational conflicts on culture. In some families there have been suicides, deaths and even murders in the elderly generation. Those who have successfully adapted had to learn English, compromise and adapt to the new cultures.

The Dynamics of Ethnic Identity and Bereavement among Older Widowers, Mark R. Luborsky and Robert L. Rubinstein

The authors studied the impact the ethnicity of an elderly individual assisted him or her to deal with bereavement. They found that the ethnic identity and practices in different cultures such as in the Irish, Jewish and Italian communities greatly assisted them to deal positively with the loss of a spouse in old age. It assisted them to adapt to life after the great loss.

The researchers found certain themes in adaptive and non-adaptive or destructive behavior in elderly that could assist the psychotherapists deal with the mourning elderly. They found out that culture was powerful. It connected the people biologically as they sought to know their family lineage (Luborsky, Rubinstein, 1997, p 305). Culture shaped their belief system giving them an ethnic identity. The strong link to culture and ethnicity assisted the aged to cope with life after the loss of a loved one.

Social Support Systems of Rural Older Women: A Comparison of the United States and Denmark, Dena Shenk and Kitter Christiansen

The authors sought to research on the perception of the use of formal services by elderly people in the rural areas. Case studies on elderly conducted in Minnesota and Denmark revealed that the Danish people viewed the use of formal services favorably. They saw that in choosing the formal services they could use, it gave them independence and decision making power. The Americans however viewed informal services negatively.

Formal services are perceived to be used when the individual’s informal network of family, friends and relatives have failed to support the elderly adequately. The elderly therefore tend to turn to the informal network first. They see the use of formal services as the loss of independence. The Danish links however with the formal service providers however were not as close or strong as the American links, for those who sought for formal services.

An Organization for the Elderly, by the Elderly: A Senior Center in the United States, Yohko Tsuji

The author sought to investigate how elderly people in the Lake District Senior Centre dealt with the culture. In America the elderly find themselves in a cultural dilemma since the dominant American cultural value are based on the pillars of independence, productivity and strength. The centre has gone against the societal norms that the elderly should be disengaged or isolated. The centre has shown otherwise, the day to day running of activities is carried out by the elderliness.

The board of directors and other committees that is involved in decision making is also mostly composed of the elderly. The elderly also self-finance themselves as a third of the budget is financed by the elders. During the day, there are workshops, seminars, group meetings of a recreational and educational nature. The elderly have a system of social network, exchange and support. They have learnt to assimilate the American culture in their everyday lives.

We will write a custom Essay on Aging, Culture, Ethnicity and Family Care specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More History, Community Context and the Perception of Old Age in a Rural Irish Town, Jeanette Dickerson-Putman

The author interviewed several people in Clifden and Blessington, Ireland to hear their perception of old age. The respondents viewed old age as the signal or signs of declining health and the lack of the ability to continue contributing to the society in terms of work due to frailty. The social life of the individual starts declining and even dies. Soon, the aged need a great support network in order to make it in life. The respondents noted that in old age, the people had a certain level of material security.

The government gave the old people good pension and other benefits. If the elderly did not have access to money, they would have a difficult old age. In terms of support, the family did not play a central role in taking care of the aged rather it was the close friends and confidants that took physical care of the individual. If the aged experience the loss of their spouses or had strained relationships with their children, they would receive very little emotional support.

The Irish respondents noted that in old age, one experienced contentment, peace, rest and a relaxed mind. However, at the old age, a downside was that there were individuals who experienced high levels of loneliness and bitterness. The project showed what the people considered as successful and unsuccessful aging.

Uncle Ed, Super Runner and the Fry Cook: Old Men on the Street, Jay Sokolovsky and Carl Cohen

The authors conducted a study in the New York, the Bowery, on the survival and experiences of the aging men in the streets. The society focuses on the plight of the homeless mainly in the winter however in spring, it stops being hot news. The homeless on the streets are still there and going through various hardships.

They found out that the hardships of living in the streets had the greatest impact on the old men who were more than 50 years and above. These were men who had lived on the streets for years, some even decades. They conducted case studies on three elderly homeless Their fieldwork results showed that despite the poverty experienced by the men on the streets they shared food, cash and cigarettes.

They also shared tips on how to survive on the streets. The friendship developed on the street served as a survival tactic. The old homeless people took to constant drinking to deal with the trauma of homelessness that brings desperation and hopelessness. They will continue drinking even if it endangers their health.

One Thousand Points of Blight: Old, Female and Homeless in New York City, Jay Sokolovsky

There was a study conducted by the National Institute of Mental Health on the experiences of homeless women on the streets of America. The author participated in the study and highlights a session he had with an elderly woman in her sixties in a women’s shelter located in the U.S Army armory. The elderly American male is able to handle the public shelters better than the female due to their experiences in jail, military and boarding houses.

The elderly female experiences a cultural and psychological trauma as she tries to adjust to the shelter environment. The conditions are rough as it is an environment where the toughest and abrasive survive. They have exhausted their kin resources. There is a perception that the number of homeless women has been decreasing however it is not true. The count has been decreasing since they shun the big shelters preferring the streets, small charity shelters and drop in shelters. The absolute count has been increasing.

Not sure if you can write a paper on Aging, Culture, Ethnicity and Family Care by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Between Humans and Ghosts: The Decrepit Elderly in a Polynesian Society, Judith C. Barker

The author carries out research on the treatment that was given to elderly people in the Polynesian society. In the society, the old people were perceived to be mediators of the people between the world and the next world. They were regarded as being spiritually higher and they assumed the roles of witchdoctors and priests. The number of the elderly people was not high since the people used to die around the age of 35.

The people become mature and died quickly as they were living in very harsh environments. However, at that time they still existed non-supportive attitudes towards the people who had reached the critical area of their life. Since, they were no longer able to contribute to the society or look after themselves, they were perceived to be useless or already dead. There were reports that some of them were treated brutally.

They were seen to be a burden in the society. There was neglect of the old people who were physically impaired and it was acceptable in the society. There was a discrepancy in the status of older people in good health and the ones who were too weak to take care of themselves. Families did not call the doctors or nurses to treat the infected sores and painful joints of frail elders.

Dementia in Cultural Context: Development and Decline of a Caregiver Support Group in a Latin Population, J. Neil Henderson

The article highlights the phases that a caregiver support group went through in a Latin population. The author came up with a plan for the implementation of an Alzheimer disease support group for ethnic communities after observing that the existing groups in place had a predominantly white population.

The group was started in 1986. The group received funding from the government and the caregivers went through a thorough training on dementia and related diseases. Six months later, the aged in Latino community had joined the group and there was an aggressive system of follow up and support by the caregivers.

The group however died after two years. They could not support themselves after the project funding was cut off. The project showed the challenges faced by ethnic support groups since the project died due to lack of funds, overburdened care givers, the volunteer nature of the group and the lack of support by private and public organizations.

Aging, Disability and Ethnicity: An African-American Woman’s Story , Monika Deppen-Wood, Mark Luborsky and Jessica Scheer

The author interviewed an African-American woman to find out how she was dealing with old age and disability and whether her ethnicity aided her in any way in dealing with the challenges in old age. She relied heavily on her family members to take care of her and provide for her financially which they did. From her ethnicity she drew great courage to overcome the challenges in life. The transition stage in accepting her role as a nourisher, advisor and disciplinarian to her children was okay. She is regarded highly by her family members and considered a wise woman.

Long-Term Care and the Disabled Elderly in Urban China, Charlotte Ikels

The author conducted a research in China on the perception of dementia in old people and the long-term care of these individuals. He noted that in some Asian cultures such as India, Japan and Polynesia, dementia did not have an alarming impact on the family members.

The individual is seen as though he is cutting links with the natural world and connecting with the supernatural world. In the western world, however, the emphasis of the medical aspects of the disease made people not appreciate the way the cultural and social factors would mediate the impact of the disease.

In China, they had a culture of promoting the taking care of the elderly by the family. The children and relatives were relied on to take care of their parents and grandparents. The elderly parents lived close to the children’s residence. Overall the elders who were disabled were well taken care in the Chinese culture.

Liminality in an American Nursing Home: The Endless Transition, Renee Rose Shield

The author conducted a study in an American nursing home to investigate the experiences of the old people in the nursing homes. She observed the residents and the staff as they conducted their daily activities. She had the perception that the elderly in the nursing home were a close knit community sharing jokes and stories on the events in their lives.

They would tell each other of the engagements, weddings and birth experiences in their life. However she discovered it was not so. Life in the nursing home was marked by loneliness and dependencies. It was a solitary transition for the elderly.

The community did not support and rally around them unlike other stages in life. The residents were provided with the best medical and nursing care however they still faced the last days of their lives with inadequate emotional support, isolated from the world. She found that the society was unwilling to involve the elderly in opportunities to contribute to society, treating them like children. The society, fearful of death, is quick to transfer the care of the elderly to an institution instead of providing the warmth and support of a community.

Understanding Life Backwards, Joel Savishinsky

The author interviewed individuals who had just retired in order to find out how they were adjusting to life after retirement. He found out that the identities that individuals had before retirement affected their attitudes to retirement and their self esteem.

These identities affected the rate at which the individual would adjust to life after retirement. Even though the study revealed that there was no great impact of gender differences on the rate of adjustment, the individual’s identity and social background influenced the adjustment rate differently in the men and women.

Conclusion On review of the mentioned articles, it is clear there is a great need in most societies to come up with better structures both in the informal and formal structures to take care of the elderly. The old people people play an important role as Jane Peterson in her article. They represent the wise in the community who are able to advise the younger generations on handling the bittersweet experiences in life. It is not good for family members to neglect taking care of them.

The aged experience high levels of loneliness, depression and isolation as they try to adjust to this new phase in their life where they have to be taken care of and depend financially on their children. The society should especially follow up on the homeless who are elderly. They have exhausted their kin resources and in their age cannot handle the harsh difficulties of life in the streets.

References Luborsky, M

[supanova_question]

Poem Analysis: I Wondered Lonely as a Cloud Essay essay help online free: essay help online free

In his poem, I wondered lonely as a cloud, William Wordsworth applies different elements of poetry to highlight his themes. For instance, he uses symbolism to connect human beings with their immediate environment (nature). A symbol is an object either living or non-living that represents something else in reality; therefore, the reader has to think carefully to unravel the hidden meaning. Wordsworth use of symbolism in his poem reveals his observatory skills and his ability to appreciate the nature around him.

The title and the first stanza of the poem highlight the first symbol in the poem. The persona likens himself with a cloud yet naturally, the cloud is a non-living object located many miles away from the earth.

The cloud is a symbol, which represents loneliness. Moreover, the cloud is naturally incompatible with the earth surface or human beings but the poet’s close identification with the cloud reveals his loneliness, isolation, and desolation from the world around him. In the second stanza, he compares the distance between the clouds, valleys, and hills, which means he is aware but not happy with his separation from the immediate world.

Through the personification of the clouds, the speaker is able to express the extent or impact of his loneliness. Besides being under emotional turmoil, he has nobody to talk to, associate with, or assist him in solving his personal problems, which hurls him into depressed. Just like the clouds, he finds remedy in roaming around, with a sole aim of trying the luck of stumbling upon something to fill up his loneliness.

In the fourth line of the first stanza, the persona identifies the daffodils at the lake, which symbolize love/happiness. He calls the daffodils a ‘crowd’, which is a word only used to identify human beings (Cummings Para. 3).

The dancing prowess of the daffodils especially the movement of their heads symbolizes the happiness the persona is yearning to experience one day. Although he is lonely and sad, the observation of the flowers puts a smile on his face. Thus, the daffodils (flowers) are a symbol or source of happiness, which is the heart’s desire of the persona. In addition, the speaker observes that the daffodils dance better than the waves, which confirms that when he is happy, he is automatically connected to the world.

The high number of daffodils the speaker observes grows naturally and they symbolize the rich environment or soils he lives in; therefore, probably the source of his unhappiness is not economical but maybe social oriented. Additionally, when the speaker is unhappy he only remembers the daffodils to alter his somber mood, the daffodils offer him company; they cheer him up.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The use of natural objects like the stars, plants (flower), the cloud, valley, hills, lakes, and the breeze/waves symbolizes that the nature is the only source of inspiration in the speaker’s life. He derives his emotional nourishment from remembering the beauty and dancing of the flowers.

He connects the random arrangement of the flowers to the stars, which cheers him. Wordsworth also proves the realistic side of his work when he uses the natural rather synthetic objects. Moreover, his use of nature may have a hidden meaning whereby he might be calling for the emotional or spiritual malnourished persons to preserve and adapt the nature as the source of happiness in their lives. Therefore, through the connection to the nature, the speaker symbolizes the unity that exists between human beings with the nature.

Due to the power of the nature, the speaker strengthens the need of living in a community. When he describes the daffodils, he associates the flowers with a crowd flourishing in their natural habitat. Thus, the word ‘crowd’ here symbolizes the unity people have to explore in the world in that, the crowd of daffodils takes away his loneliness.

For instance in the second stanza he says, “Ten thousands saw I at glance/” (Wordsworth line 11), which reveals the large number of the daffodils. Similarly, due to their large number, the flowers not only dance well, but also shine. In addition, he also calls the flowers a ‘host’, which means despite being large in number they make him happy.

Therefore, Wordsworth poem aims at calling for peace, love, unity, and togetherness in his community because he associates words in collective form with his own happiness. The flower, as a symbol, represents the people in his community who are not only supposed to live together, but also to stay happily or in harmony with each other.

In summary, symbolism is an element of writing especially in poetry. Symbols have hidden meanings, which need the reader to unravel intelligently. Wordsworth uses natural objects to express the theme of nature. He uses the natural objects like flowers to both inspire him and promote unity in the society.

The distance between the clouds and the earth is large yet the persona identifies with the cloud, therefore his identification symbolizes the retraction or loneliness between him and the surrounding people. Finally, the author uses symbols to promote peace and togetherness in his society.

We will write a custom Essay on Poem Analysis: I Wondered Lonely as a Cloud specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Works Cited Cummings, Michael. I wandered lonely as a cloud: A study guide, 2008. Web.

Wordsworth, Williams. “I Wandered Lonely as a Cloud.” Poemhunter, 2002. Web.

[supanova_question]

The Major Failure of the Apollo 13 Essay best college essay help: best college essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Identification of the project and Source of the Project Failure

Solution to the problem

Reference List

Introduction The failure of Apollo 13 has left many people with various arguments. There are some arguments about what was the major cause of the Apollo 13 failure. The failure of the Apollo 13 was a big blow to the man in his attempt to explore the surface of the moon. This failure was a big blow bearing in the mind the effort that was dedicated in order to promote its performance. The failure of Apollo 13 posed a great threat to loss of human life and also led to failure of the lunar mission.

The Apollo system is one of the most complicated engineering which consists one of the most demanding engineering exercises which has been done by the man. The mission’s success is very demanding and requires a very high level of accuracy. Although Apollo 13 failed, there have been at least two successful lunar explorations.

Such success required the men and women who were involved in designing, building, and flying it to practice a high level of accuracy. It is important to know the exact cause (or causes) of the failure of Apollo 13 in order to be able to prevent any such losses or failures in the future.

In order to understand the real cause of the problem, there is need to look at the events involved in the launching of the space craft in question. Research has been carried out in an effort to give a clear report on the major mission failures that occurs. Such findings play a very significant role in development of appropriate recommendations based on them.

Identification of the project and Source of the Project Failure The main objective of this project was to explore the surface of the moon. This was in attempt to carry out selenological inspection and sampling of material in a specific part in Fra Mauro Formation. This project was also aimed at deployment and activation of an Apollo Lunar Surface experiments package (ALSEP) (Anonymous. 2006). All this information was of great significance in man’s attempt to better understand the space. Many photographs on unique places were also expected from the journey.

According to previous reviews, oxygen Tank can be seen as the major cause of the failure of Apollo 13. The problem was initiated by the service module cryogenic oxygen tank no. 2 (National Aeronautics and Space Administration, 1970). In other words, the tank was the major cause of the failure of Apollo 13.

Over the past, oxygen tanks that are identical to the oxygen no. 2 on Apollo 13 operated successfully in previous flights. This included the Apollo 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 and 12 (National Aeronautics and Space Administration, 1970). Therefore, there is a big question on why the tank in Apollo 13 failed despite the fact those similar tanks had succeeded earlier.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More In order to identify the exact cause that made the tank for Apollo 13 a failure, these tanks were compared in order to see whether there were any differences. This comparison was emphasized on the assembly, design, reviewing as well as test history.

Although Apollo 13 was not successful, it was successfully launched on the schedule. This was at Florida on April 11, 1970 (National Aeronautics and Space Administration, 1970). According to report by National Aeronautics and Space Administration (1970), the launch vehicle stages inserted the S-IVB instrument unit with apogee of 100.2 nautical miles as well as perigee of 98.0 nautical miles. The take of stage went as expected.

However, the second stage boost devoted a little from what was expected. That is, the engine at the center of S-11 cut off about 132 seconds early than what was expected. As a result of this, the remaining four engines burnt 34 seconds longer than what was expected. This could be one of the major factors which could be attributed to the failure of Apollo 13. This technical problem also led to mismatch in other areas, which led to slight deviations from what was expected. Similarly, this led to deviation of the Space vehicle from what was expected.

That is, space vehicle speed after S-11 boost was 223 feet per second lower than what was planned and expected (National Aeronautics and Space Administration, 1970). This implies that the speed of Apollo 13 was affected. Since the speed was lower than expected, this implies that the space craft would take more time than expected in order to reach the destination. The prolonged time duration could also have led to the failure of the cooling system which leads to excessive heating hence bursting from extremely high pressure.

Since the space vehicle velocity was lower than what was expected, the S-IVN orbital insertion burn was about 9 seconds longer than what was predicted (National Aeronautics and Space Administration, 1970). This extended heating means that the temperature of the body was going to be greater that what was expected.

This may interfere with the working condition of the wires and even causing others to get charred. This increased length in heating also implies that the pressure was higher than expected. The higher the body got heated, the higher was the pressure. This could have led to explosion.

As a result of these problems, thee total launch vehicle was about 44 seconds longer that what was predicted (National Aeronautics and Space Administration, 1970). The probability of reaching translunar injection still existed at a probability of greater than 2-sigma (National Aeronautics and Space Administration, 1970).

We will write a custom Essay on The Major Failure of the Apollo 13 specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More All the launch vehicle and spacecraft systems were verified after the orbital insertion after which the necessary arrangements were made for the translunar injection. This was followed by initiation of the onboard television at 01.35 ground elapsed time (National Aeronautics and Space Administration, 1970). This was done for about 5 and half minutes. Later, the second S-IVB burn was initiated on schedule. According to the report by the National Aeronautics and Space Administration (1970), all other main system operated as required.

The next stage also started well as expected. The S-IVB APS was initiated at 04:18 g.e.t as expected and went on as in the right manner. This was completed without even a slight deviation from what was expected. Similarly, the liquid oxygen dump was successfully initiated some times late (04:39 g.e.t). According to the report given by National Aeronautics and Space Administration (1970), the first S-IVB ALPS burn for lunar target point was later initiated at 06.00 g.e.t.

In summary, the main source of the accident was from the oxygen tank. Specifically, the ignition in the oxygen tank number 2 was the main root cause of the problem. This was as a result of extended heater operation at VKSC which led to destruction of the insulation on wiring. This caused short circuiting which resulted into combustion in oxygen tank.

The space craft was faced by several deviations of heating duration’s in various parts which were slightly higher than what was expected. This could have been the major source of the problem which led to overheating of the space craft to the extent of bursting from extremely high pressure.

Solution to the problem From the above discussion, it is clear that the major failure of the Apollo 13 can be rectified to avoid such future complications. This discussion has clearly shown than the oxygen tank was the major cause of the failure of the Apollo 13. The drain tube was misaligned in such a way that it could not be able to drain after being filled.

Due to these misalignments during the assembly, the tank was caught with a very high level of temperature. When Apollo 13 reached at the height of around 200, 000 miles, its insulation wire charred off from extremely high temperatures. This also led to short-circuit which led to ignition in the oxygen tank.

Therefore, it is clear that the problem was propagated from one point to another. Therefore, one of the possible solutions is to improve on safety precautions at this point. For instance, there is need to avoid any contact between the oxygen tanks all wires and motors which may have no seals (Sweesy, 1996). By so doing, the possibility of short-circuiting is resolved. In case the current was cut off from the oxygen tank before short-circuit, then combustion in tank 2 which led to complications in other parts could have been avoided.

It is also necessary to have modifications in the oxygen storage tanks. More attention should be paid on upgrading the oxygen system to make it less susceptible to combustion which will most likely lead to unnecessary combustion in the space craft. The general operations of the system need to be modified.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The Major Failure of the Apollo 13 by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More From this analysis, it can be said that this deviations especially in temperatures could have been one of the possible causes of the failure of Apollo 13. The problem led to a series of unexpected deviations. The deviations from the normal could have propagated the extent of leading to the failure of Apollo 13.

For instance, the heating duration in various parts increased significantly from what was expected. Increase in heat could have led to an increase in pressure consequently leading to explosion. Increased heat could also have led to damages in wires consequently leading to a series of failure (Sweesy, 1996).

In order to avoid such increase in pressure, which leads to explosion hence magnifying the whole problem, there is need to have a way in which pressure can be reduced from the system in case of anything. This will improve on the security level of the flying crew albeit it will not help in solving the general problem.

There is also a need to have modifications in the insulation system. It is necessary to have adequate insulation in order to avoid unnecessary wire damages from such temperature deviations.

The alarm system was also having some complications. There is need to modify the Alarm system in order to avoid unnecessary alarms in the system. This can be rectified by increasing the differential between master alarm trip levels and the normally expected operating ranges (Anonymous, 2006).

There is also the need to modify the alarm system in order to avoid unnecessary blockage of alarms. It is also necessary to have independent talk back indicators. This will facilitate clear identification of any problem early enough before it propagates from one part to another.

Reference List Anonymous. (2006). Actual cause of Apollo 13 failure. Web.

National Aeronautics and Space Administration. (1970). Report of Apollo 13 Review Board. Web.

Sweesy, I. (1996). Apollo 13 Failure. Web.

[supanova_question]

Where Do I Belong? What Makes Identity Essay essay help site:edu

One of the most complicated notions in the modern world, identity is the most crucial aspect of a human’s existence. Once losing his/her identity, a human being cannot live the full life and practically becomes deprived of an essence of life. Because of its versatility and the number of issues it touches on, identity must be considered from various viewpoints.

Embarking upon this investigation, one should start with the physical aspect of human nature. From a biological point of view, identity is predetermined by the gender of a given person. Indeed, in the clichéd society where men and women bear different social roles, the gender aspect is what makes the core of identity. Further on, developing into grown-up, mature people with shaped personalities, we bear certain social role predetermined mostly by our gender.

In addition, the large variety of social roles that we have changed throughout our lives was also intertwined with our genders closely. It is quite peculiar that a child obtains his/her sexual identity at certain age, but not from the day of his/her birth. Thus, it is logical to suggest that the quest for identity begins right with acknowledgement of one’s own gender. An important step in learning one’s identity, the physical aspect makes the foundation of the future searches.

Next comes the aspect of one’s religious belief – or its absence. Something that is completely sacred for a human being, religion must be another important part of identity – its core and the backbone of one’s philosophy, moral principles and the world picture. When needing to turn to someone for help, one usually resorts to his/her religious beliefs, which discloses the most secret aspects of his/her personality.

This means that religion must be another significant part of human identity. Helping people to find the intrinsic value of their lies and look for the enlightenment that comes with serving God and following His behests makes another important part of one’s identity. Even atheists still have certain religious position – the position of denial.

The last, but not the least comes such aspect of one’s identity as culture. In contrast to the previous aspects, this one appears to be the most mysterious one. Unlike the religious beliefs, it can change considerably, being rather subject to the influence of the other cultures.

Yet it makes the stem of one’s identity and helps one to define his/her identity. Embracing the experience of the ancestors, with all their traditions and customs, and at the same time involving the novelties that convey the flair of the epoch, culture is another essential notion that identity involves.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Therefore, identity is a blend of one’s cultural background and gender specifics. In his/her search of the identity, one has to consider all the abovementioned spheres of his/her life.

Though certain element of scientism in this search might dim the excitement of the process, one still has to admit that identity is the crossroads of all the peculiarities of the given person, from the most essential ones like the nationality and the religious denomination up to the things that might seem complete trifle.

Still it is obvious that identity is the blend of the cultural and the natural – the two elements that make a human being. Developing and enriching them every day, one can cognize him-/herself and reveal the places uncharted of one’s own soul.

[supanova_question]

Should Guns be Limited? Argumentative Essay best essay help: best essay help

Nowadays, it became a commonplace practice among leftist journalists and politicians to popularize the idea that restricting gun control laws even further will necessarily lead to decline of violent crime rates. Again and again, we get to hear that the reason why guns should be banned nationwide is that ‘guns kill’.

Apparently, the perceptional simple mindedness, on the part of advocates of gun control, prevents them from realizing the conceptual fallaciousness of such their suggestion. After all, according to criminal statistics, particularly heavy frying pans, hammers, axes and kitchen knives kill even more people then privately owned guns (murders committed in the state of affect) – and yet, no sober-minded person would ever suggest that citizens should be banned from owning these items.

In this paper, we will aim to expose the advocates of strict gun control as utterly irrational individuals, who should not even be placed in position of lending their ‘valuable’ views on the subject matter. We will also aim to show that, contrary to what the majority of naïve people believe, the introduction of more and more gun control laws results in the drastic increase of violent crime rates, which is why politicians should think twice, before outlawing guns.

Let us imagine a scene – there is a dead salesperson laying on covered with blood store’s floor. Being unable to defend himself (he believed that guns are ‘evil’), he was shot in the head, during the course of an armed robbery. The police officers finally arrive, take photos of a crime-scene, place the corpse into a body-bag and take him to the morgue.

While conducting these procedures, police officers never ceased carrying guns in their holsters – and yet, they never needed to use their guns, but pens, cameras, radios, etc. The salesperson, however, could have saved his property and his life, had he owned the gun – despite being a peaceful civilian. This addresses the sheer stupidity of a statement, contained in Gopnik’s (2007) article: “There is no reason that any private citizen in a democracy should own a handgun”.

Despite the fact that wackos as Gopnik believe in otherwise, there is a good reason for private citizens in democratic countries to be allowed to own and to carry guns – this is because they cannot be carrying police officers on their shoulders at all times, in order to feel secure. And, as practice shows, criminals strike exactly in time when there is no police anywhere near.

In order to prove the soundness of an idea that society will only benefit from tightening the gun control laws, people like Gopnik resort to particularly cheap emotional tricks – they mention mass shootings in schools: “In Dunblane, Scotland, in 1996, a gunman killed sixteen children and a teacher at their school”.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More By doing it, however, they prove their arrogance even further, as this portrays them as individuals who had never questioned themselves why mass shootings occur specifically in places swarmed with unarmed people, such as schools, malls, etc.

Why there has not been even a single incident in history of an armed maniac having stormed a shooting range, police headquarters, or the branch of American Rifle Association? This is because those armed criminals who decide in favor of committing a particularly gruesome act, such as robbery, gang-rape, mass-shooting or ‘initiation killing’, never look into being faced with victims who may put up any resistance.

It is one thing to go about committing rape, for example, while experiencing a vicious thrill due to victim’s unprotectiveness, and it is altogether another thing to go about committing rape, while experiencing a fear that the potential victim may pull out the gun and kick victimizer’s brains out.

Therefore, ‘no guns permitted’ signs, which can now be seen in the places of public gathering, are nothing but gun-magnets. Apparently, Gopnik-types are simply unable to realize this simple fact – one can only wonder why they are being allowed to write articles to credible newspapers, in the first place, instead of socializing with mind-likes in the kindergarten.

In his article, Gopnik blabbers a lot about the fact that countries with particularly restrictive gun control laws are being more secure to live in, as compared to those where law obeying citizens are assumed mature enough to own and to carry guns, as the most effective instrument of protecting their lives and the lives of their loved ones: “Nations with tight gun laws have, on the whole, less gun violence”.

It is needless to mention, of course, that Gopnik never bothers to substantiate such his claims with references to peer reviewed academic studies.

The reason for this is simple – these studies reveal an undeniable fact that it is namely Western countries (U.S. States) with most liberal gun control laws, which appear to be the safest to live in. For example, as it was pointed out by Scott (1994): “States and cities with restrictive gun laws are usually those with the most crime, and vice versa.

We will write a custom Essay on Should Guns be Limited? specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More In 1987… Florida passed a law permitting its citizens not only to own, but to carry weapons. Despite the doom-sayers’ predictions of a bloodbath in the streets, Florida’s murder rate has fallen 80% since then” (25). Apparently, individuals as Gopnik are being endowed with irrational/infantile mentality, which partially explains author’s earlier exposed willingness to deliberately mislead readers as to the actual implications of gun control laws.

Besides being clearly unable to understand the dialectically predetermined essence of a relationship between causes and effects, these people also lack the courage to act as responsible citizens – hence, their continuous whining about guns’ ‘evilness’.

And yet, it is not guns that kill people, but those people who pull guns’ triggers. Therefore, we can only agree with Casteen (2004) when he states: “Firearms are no more inherently destructive or worthy of criminalization than alcoholic beverages, ammonium nitrate fertilizer, or the public performance of opera” (212). Therefore, if Gopnik does believes that it is morally repugnant and ‘dangerous’ to own gun, he is at liberty not to own one.

Hopefully, giving lecture about ‘moral inappropriateness of robbery’ to a robber, will allow this potential inmate of a mental asylum to get away unrobbed. Yet, he is in no position to impose his nonsensical views upon the rest of mature and responsible citizens.

We believe that the earlier provided line of argumentation fully substantiates the soundness of an idea that there can be no beneficence, whatsoever, in tightening already tight gun control laws. On the contrary – the more there will be challenges, on the way of law-obeying citizens gaining access to guns, the higher are going to be the chances for these citizens to realize the sheer extent of their defenselessness, while faced by violent criminals.

As the consequence, this will necessarily result in drastic increase of violent-crime-related rates. Therefore, only deliberately malicious or simply outright stupid individuals (such as Gopnik) may continue holding on to a belief that the introduction of more and more gun control laws ensures society’s safety.

References Atwan, Robert

[supanova_question]

Liability and Accountability- Discussion Post Essay essay help site:edu

Discussion Board Post Introduction

Liability and accountability are a vital requirement for any profession in order to ensure that activities are done in a required manner, and that people can be held accountable in cases whereby such activities are not done in a required manner. Specifically, liability implies that an individual should rightly incur the costs associated with adverse effects of his/her actions on other people.

Most of the technical risks and failures are caused by lack of proper responsibility assignment (Hartman, 2010). This implies that liability and accountability can be used to establish an approach for the responsibility of actions undertaken by individuals. In addition, liability and accountability should vary in accordance to the effects associated with actions and decisions of professionals.

The assignment of liability and accountability should vary in different professions. This is because of the variations of the subjects of their decisions and actions that they undertake.

For instance, owing to the fact that a mistake done by a healthcare personnel can result to the death of a patient implies that they require high standards of legal responsibility and accountability (Gaylin

[supanova_question]

Idioms in “A Piece of Cake” Essay essay help free

Idioms are words, phrases or sentences that have figurative meaning (Gibbs 288). They are commonly used in linguistics as expressions to give out a hidden meaning of a message that is being conveyed. The interpretation of idioms are completely different with the direct interpretation the words that make the phrase or sentence. Idioms are therefore viewed as figures of speech since they contradict the principle of compositionality (Gibbs 301). An example of an idiom that is widely used in speech and literature is A Piece of Cake.

The idiom A piece of Cake is used commonly in speech and literature in the modern world. It is used to refer to a task that can easily be done easily. The idiom used the word cake to show how pleasant the task is thus making it easy to complete. This is because cakes are sweet and many people love to eat cakes.

The idiom is of American origin. It can be traced back to the 1930`s when it was first seen in the work of a poet named Ogden Nash. The poet used it in his poem entitled promise path in 1936. Here he used the idiom to show that life is easy as a result of a success that was highly anticipated. He therefore referred to life as being a piece of cake.

This term is easy to understand and apply in the everyday language. The idiom is straight forward since it does not need a deeper explanation or an in-depth analysis to understand its meaning. It can therefore be used by any one at any time. Due to its simplicity, the phrase can be used by people of different ages, cultures and backgrounds.

One does not need to be learned to understand and apply its meaning in the everyday language or literature. The phrase can also be applied in several situations which an individual needs to express the simplicity of the task in hand. Due to this fact therefore, the phrase has found a lot of application in the speech and English literature all around the world.

The term tells a lot about our culture and society. First, the term like many other idioms is used to give an indirect meaning of a message. This therefore enriches the language by making it to be somewhat sophisticated. The phrase also gives an impression of literacy and learnedness in the culture of the people who use it.

The use of a sophisticated language is always related to those individuals who are learned thus gaining a lot of respect in the society. Furthermore, idioms are colloquial metaphors they indicate a foundation of knowledge, information and experience (Gibbs 288). That is why such a phrase can only be applied in a given culture and not the whole world. This is because it was developed by people who have common experience and understanding. It is therefore rendered as meaningless outside the culture of origin.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The phrase is not detrimental in any way. In fact, it has developed language by giving it a stronger base. The fact that it has no harm to the society or anything in general has made it to have a wide application even outside its culture of origin. That is why the phrase has been adopted and used by many other cultures all around the world.

Works Cited Gibbs, R.W. The poetics of mind: figurative thought, language, and understanding. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1994

[supanova_question]

Health Indicators Essay essay help: essay help

‘Healthy People 2010’ is a 10-year health strategic plan of the United States, which aims at promoting healthy lifestyles and prevention of diseases. The health strategic plan has it basis from Healthy People 2000 health agenda, which emanated from collaborative efforts of the United States government, citizens, and public health organizations.

Culmination of the Healthy People 2000 objectives did set stage for the formulation of Healthy People 2010 healthy strategic plan of the United States. The Healthy People 2010 has two major objectives: to improve the quality and length of healthy life, and eliminate healthy disparities in the society that has been very unequal.

To achieve its objective, the Healthy People 2010 identified 28 healthy indicators that are critical in assessing progress of health, but health experts identified 10 leading health indicators. The 10 leading health indicators give enough information regarding health status or issues in the population for policymakers to make appropriate policies. Obesity is one of the health issues with indicators such as physical activity, environmental quality, and access to healthcare falling in the 10 leading indicators of Healthy People 2010.

Physical activity is one of the leading health indicators according to Healthy People 2010 for it determines prevalence of obesity in the society. Physical activity intricately links with nutrition because the health status of a body does not only depend on physical activity, but also intake of nutritious diet and subsequent assimilation and utilization of the nutrients.

Since a healthy diet supplies the essential nutrients to the body, proper and optimum physical activity is necessary to enhance their assimilation and utilization, hence preventing the accumulation of the excess nutrients into toxic levels or causing obesity in the case of carbohydrates.

According to Centers for Disease Control [CDC] and Prevention (2009), enhanced physical activity and modification of diet are effective measures of reducing incidences of obesity in the society with health disparities and inequality (p.1). Thus, healthy body requires nutrients and physical activity to improve physiological and biochemical processes of the body, hence prevents occurrence of the obesity.

Social and physical environment is also another leading health indicator that determines predisposition to obesity. Series of studies have confirmed that social and physical environments influence eating and exercising habits of individuals.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Some environments such as workplaces and schools discourage physical exercises because people eat well yet they become preoccupied with other issues and neglect healthy lifestyles such as physical exercise. Due to lack of enough exercise in such environments, people gain weight and become obese. Social behaviors such as unhealthy eating habits have significant influence on the eating lifestyles of the people in certain social environments.

According to Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (2009), abundance of food, lack of exercising facilities and contemporary occupations that do not provide time for physical activities have contributed significantly to the development of obesity (p.2). Palatable and innutritious diets that are conveniently available in social places coupled with the lack of physical exercises degenerate into weight gain and obesity.

Accessibility to health care services is one of the 10 leading indicators of health that determines prevalence of obesity in the society. Since health status of the body depends on the nutritional and physical fitness, inaccessibility to health care services and vital information necessary for healthful lifestyles means that the population will neither eat nutritiously nor exercise well.

Satcher (2000) argues that, accessibility to health care is critical in enhancing measures of public health such as prevention, treatment, and management of diseases through provision of health information (p.2864). The inaccessibility to information concerning nutrition and physical activity increases prevalence of obesity in the population. Thus, to reverse increasing trends of obesity, accessibility to vital information in the healthcare institutions by the public is imperative.

References Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, (2009). Healthy People 2010. National Center for Health Statistics. Web.

Satcher, D. (2000). Eliminating Global Health Disparities. The Journal of the American Medical Association, 284(22), 2864.

[supanova_question]

The Rocking-Horse Winner Essay college essay help

Book Summary The Rocking-Horse Winner describes a young boy’s search for luck and love in a world with no love. Paul has a gift of picking the winning horse in horse races. His mother, Hester, in contrary, has no luck and even though she is outwardly successful, she is troubled by a feeling of failure.

The family’s expenditure exceeds its income and creates unspoken tension and this affects the relationships in the family. Paul and his two sisters recognize this tension and Paul even alleges that he can hear the house whispering, “There must be more money” (Lawrence, 1926).

Paul informs his uncle (Oscar) and Bassett, the gardener, about his luck on betting in horses: he has been betting using his pocket money and has won and accumulated some money. Both men place huge bets on the horse Paul identifies to be a potential winner. After their win, Paul and Bassett give Paul’s mother a very expensive gift, but this makes her spend more money, this upsets Paul and he works harder to be lucky.

As a Derby race nears, Paul strives to know the name of the winning horse. He does this by riding his rocking horse so that he can get to a state in which he can be sure about the winning horse. He remains sick on the day of the Derby but Bassett places bets on the horse that was identified by Paul, and even places a bet for Paul. The horse wins and Paul wins eighty thousand pounds, however, he dies at night.

Analysis The Rocking-Horse Winner presents a society in search of love and luck and this is evident from a number of characters. The main characters in the short story, Paul and Hester, are in search of love. Paul’s mother, Hester, entered marriage with a handsome man because of love, but the love died. Even though she has three children out of the marriage, she could not love them, and does not even love herself for she is troubled by a feeling of failure.

The closest she ever comes to finding love is through her son, Paul, but she rejects him too. Indeed, her lack of love for her children is shown when the author writes, “only she herself knew that at the centre of her heart was a hard little place that could not feel love, no, not for anybody” (Lawrence, 1926). While everyone thinks of her as a great parent, only she knows that her heart is hard and cannot love, not even her children who need it very much. To her, success and happiness means getting more money.

Hester’s desire for material wealth surpasses that of other important things such as love and self-knowledge. Her desire for money is insatiable, instead, they lead to disastrous results when she confuses money with love. In her pursuit of more money, Hester loses some basic family values.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Her main aim is to bring up her children in a flamboyant lifestyle, as a result, her relationship with her children and husband dies. Whenever she gets money, she overspends it. Although the family lives in a “pleasant house” complete with servants and a nurse, they take them as show off objects. Hester’s uncontrollable spending creates tensions inside the household and this is personified by the whispering sounds that seem to come out the house and say “there must be more money” (Lawrence, 1926).

Paul’s talk with his mother about luck makes him believe that her mother’s love can only be won with money and luck. She makes a strong connection with luck and money. When Paul asks her whether luck was money, she replies, “It’s what causes you to have money” (Lawrence, 1926). From this talk, Paul concludes that his luck would make her happy, and this would translate to love. In contrary, she becomes greedier and is more concerned about money than loving her son (Snodgrass, pp. 196).

Paul’s ability to identify the winning horse pulls Oscar and Bassett into the betting business. Paul would get onto a rocking boat and rock continuously, like he was part of the race, until he got into a state in which he was sure of the winning horse. At the final race, Paul drives himself harder and harder to identify the winning horse.

His mother’s insatiability and whispering house drives him to try more and more as he knew that he would achieve two important things if he identified the winning horse: make his mother happy, and win her love. Paul’s desperate actions are an attempt to win love from his hard-hearted mother.

These efforts leave him sick and weak. After Bassett tells him that he had won eighty thousand pounds from the derby race, he tells his mother, “…did I ever tell you? I am lucky!” to which the mother replies, “No, you never did” (Lawrence, 1926), this proves that Hester never loved her children, especially Paul. Paul dies that night after failing to win his mother’s love.

Works Cited Lawrence, David Herbert Richards. The Rocking-Horse Winner. In The Norton

Introduction to Literature. Alison Booth and Kelly J. Mays, eds. Portable 10th ed. New York: Norton, 2011. Print.

We will write a custom Essay on The Rocking-Horse Winner specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Snodgrass, William de Witt. A Rocking-Horse: The Symbol, the Pattern, the Way to Live. The Hudson Review, Vol. 11, No. 2, 1958, pp. 191-200

[supanova_question]

Polo Ralph Lauren Research Paper college admission essay help: college admission essay help

Table of Contents Introduction

Strategy and Management

Market Mix

Financial Analysis

Conclusion

References

Introduction Polo Ralph Lauren is a clothing company started by Ralph Lauren and specializes in semi-formal casual wear for men, women and children (not as a unique specialization because the company also produces accessories, fragrances and other home clothing, such as home towels).

Its products are however high-end and are well known throughout America and certain parts of Europe and Asia (Kent, 2003, p. 111). The company’s impact in the American fashion industry is profound, and this is the reason most of the company’s products are well known throughout the country. The company’s headquarter is in Manhattan, New York, but it has several outlets in Europe (in locations such as London) and Asia (in locations such as Japan).

Polo Ralph Lauren is an appropriate company for this analysis because it has been in existence for a long time (since 1967) and therefore, there is an immense body of information regarding its strategies and goals.

Emphasis on strategies and goals is made in this case because this study focuses on how the company’s current strategies are designed to meet the company’s goals and objectives. As mentioned earlier in this study, Polo Ralph Lauren was started in 1967 by Ralph Lauren, who only specialized in men’s wear, and more specifically, men’s ties (Kent, 2003, p. 111).

The first store was opened in Manhattan, but in 1971, the company ventured into women’s clothing by starting another store in Beverly Hills, California (Kent, 2003, p. 111). In the early 80s, the company opened its first global store out of America (London), and by 1997, the company had already been listed in the New York stock exchange.

In 2009, the company boasted of having more than 160 stores around the globe, with more than 24,000 employees in 31 countries (Wright, 2011). The company’s current threats are: competition, increase in counterfeit goods and the shaky world economy, which is significantly affecting the company’s sales because recent global financial downturns have eroded customer’s buying power, and more especially, the demand for high-end goods.

Strategy and Management Polo Ralph Lauren’s business strategy is a mix of several strategies aimed at improving the company’s brand presence in the global map, and strengthening the competitiveness of the brand. These strategies are intertwined in a flexible brand strategy, developed along the lines of retail, wholesale and licensing, although the brand has still remained true to its identity) (Lauren, 2011, p. 1).

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The company’s mission statement is to “Redefine American style, provide quality products, create worlds, and invite people to take part in our dreams” (ChaCha Search, Inc., 2011, p. 1). The company’s strategic goals are however firmly designed to expand the company’s global presence because one core pillar of the company’s strategy is to continue building and extending the Polo Ralph Lauren brand, by improving the brand’s unique luxury design and quality.

The company also expects to expand its brand strategy by focusing on its advertising and marketing strategies, and through this effort, the company expects to empower its retail stores to further uphold the brand strengthening strategy. This strategy is expected to be further complemented by excellent customer service, merchandize mixing, and visual presentation, which are meant to attract more customers and build on a strong brand strategy, designed to come up with new products (Lauren, 2011, p. 1).

The second pillar in the company’s core strategy is to focus on specialty brand retail, where brand differentiation and position stand out to elevate the Polo Ralph Lauren brand above the competitors’.

The company’s third pillar is closely associated with the first, because it is based on expanding the brand’s international presence. This strategy is based on expanding the brand’s operations through new product developments, sensitive to the host’s culture.

The company’s managerial structure is also a strong pillar of the company’s operations. At the top of the managerial structure is the company’s chief executive office, assisted by the company’s vice president.

The company’s chief executive officer has always been Polo Ralph Lauren and since the brand was personally built, the company has been subject to a hierarchical structure of management, where most of the decisions are made by the CEO (Lauren, 2011, p. 1).

The management team is also comprised of other highly qualified individuals, with an impeccable academic qualification and sufficient experience in the fashion industry.

We will write a custom Research Paper on Polo Ralph Lauren specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Employee recruitment and selection is undertaken by an independent human resource team, but the employees undergo a thorough vetting process to assess the potential candidates’ experience in the fashion world, and how best they can be of value to the organization. A great part of the hiring process is normally undertaken online and candidates are sourced in the same manner.

After selection, employees are taken through a training and development program, where they are oriented with how the organization works. The company’s internship program is also another strategy the company uses to nurture new talent through training and development.

Market Mix Polo Ralph Lauren’s marketing mix entails the company’s distribution, promotion, competitive and product and price strategies. As mentioned earlier in this study, the company majorly deals in high-end clothing products for men, women and children, but on the side, the company also produces fragrances accessories, towels, and similar house ware materials, which are of exemplary quality, but priced relatively higher than normal brands.

The company’s distribution strategy is characterized by a strong emphasis on the company’s retail outlets, although some of the company’s products are also moved through the wholesale channel. Depending on the market in question, the company majorly uses the two strategies.

With regards to the company’s promotion strategy, a lot of emphasis is laid on advertising and branding, as opposed to public relations, direct selling or similar sales approaches. However, there is also a strong emphasis by the company to enrich its customer experience by guaranteeing high quality customer services.

This is the core strategy used to retain its customers. However, the company majorly relies on its advertising and branding strategies to attract customers. Polo Ralph Lauren’s major competitor in the high-end clothing business is Louis Vuitton. Louis Vuitton’s strategy is also focused on international expansion, but its focus is majorly centered on reaching out to the growing number of wealthy customers in emerging markets such as China and India (Bloomberg, 2007).

Financial Analysis Polo Ralph Lauren’s financial performance has been on a positive increasing trend, considering the company has experienced an increase in revenues over the past two years. With regards to the net income, Wright (2011) affirms that, “The fiscal 2011 net income was $568 million, or $5.75 per diluted share, compared to net income of $480 million, or $4.73 per diluted share, for Fiscal 2010” (p. 2).

When the company’s performance, in terms of net revenues, for the fourth quarter of the final 2011 fiscal period, compared to the same fourth quarter fiscal period, in the year 2010, it is affirmed that, there was a significant increase in net revenue of 7% from ($1.3 billion to $1.4billion) (Wright, 2011).

Not sure if you can write a paper on Polo Ralph Lauren by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More The company’s profits are determined using the above parameters, it is affirmed that, there was a 3% increase in profit from the year 2010 to 2011. The company’s stock price is also on the upward trend, with the year 2011 witnessing an increased share price margin of 0.09%. The following chart shows the increase in the company’s stock prices:

From this trend, the company seems to be making a positive growth, with regards to its financial performance

Conclusion Polo Ralph Lauren’s strategies are very diverse and dynamic. Though most of the company’s strategies are forthright and tailored to deal with today’s competitive business environment, the company seems to be significantly diverting from its core mission, which is to improve the American style of life and provide an enriching experience to its customers, by providing high quality goods.

However, the company seems to focus more on an international strategy aimed at increasing its profitability and expanding its brand presence. This seems to be a strategy adopted to overcome its competitive challenges.

In other words, it is more outward oriented, than internally motivated. Regardless, the company seems to be doing well, with regards to its financial performance and marketing mix, because it has been able to experience increased profitability in recent financial postings. Comprehensively, the company needs to put more effort in merging its strategies with its core business goals.

References Bloomberg. (2007). Louis Vuitton’s Life of Luxury. Web.

ChaCha Search, Inc. (2011). What Is Polo Ralph Lauren’s Mission Statement? Web.

Kent, J. (2003). Business Builders in Fashion. New York: The Oliver Press, Inc.

Lauren, R. (2011). Growth Strategies. Web.

Wright, K. (2011). Polo Ralph Lauren Corporation Reports Financial Results for Fourth Quarter

[supanova_question]

Organizational Behavior for Manager Expository Essay online essay help: online essay help

Human beings have a tendency to interact with each other by means of communication. It is this interaction that molds behaviors in organizations. Organizational behavior can therefore be demystified as the manner in which humans behave while interacting with colleagues at their work places; this includes how communication takes place in the different levels of management in an organization DuBrin and Young (2007).

The knowledge of this kind of information is a requirement to managers if an organization is to perform optimally and enjoy a competitive edge. In fact, taking the trouble to understand appropriate organizational behavior pays off with; enhanced employees’ expertise in terms of ones technical and interpersonal skills. Also some form of self development is achieved through the fulfillment associated with people getting along and self knowledge achieved.

Besides, efficiency in the organization is boosted and the organization is placed in a better state to provide for its clients in a satisfactory manner. Eventually, a sense of rationality is enhanced by widening the boundaries of what is generally perceived and accepted as common sense. DuBrin and Young (2007) These are some of the rewards Peter Flagstaff and Lindsay Gibson are aiming at to redeem their firm.

Apparently, Flagstaff marketing group is experiencing trouble dispensing and sharing knowledge from within; if this situation goes on unchecked for long then the effects could be catastrophic for the organization. For this reason, Peter Flagstaff and Lindsay Gibson have no otherwise than get back on the drawing board to strategize. At the dinner/focus group the firm’s performance is questioned and it is clear there are a number of issues that need to be addressed.

Flagstaff suggests the main problem as the inability of the firm to keep and maintain record. Documentation of transactions is mandatory for future references in the event that the organization lacks automated systems to do that.

In the likely event that the demands of a client are similar to those already available in the records then it would be wise to borrow the idea and a little modification gives it a whole new perception and the ingenuity of the firm’s creativity is preserved. Alternatively, firms can share ideas through outsourcing.

This is the process through which an organization’s tasks are delegated to the staff in other firms whose expertise overshadows what is locally available. Better yet, the firm’s staff, which should be quick to learn, should tap some of the knowledge and experience practiced by competitors to enhance better performance. DuBrin and Young (2007)

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More The senior managers should cultivate a culture of experimentation through which staff members are at liberty to practice their innovative skills without the fear of failure. Managers should promote this through rewarding successful proposals and funding of such ventures. This kind of spirit drives the firm into territories no one else has been before and attracts fulfillment that comes with enhanced efficiency. Also, new Ideas in the organization create a sense of change which breaks the monotony of routine thus motivating the staff members.

While at the combination dinner and focus group several issues were raised by the professional staff. Garry was concerned with ideas leaking away to competitors when a member of staff leaves the team. Well this argument is not valid since most states have laws which protect the inventions and innovations of organizations.

The firm is given exclusive rights to implement its invention for a specified duration, after which it is expected that the firm has recovered the cost of its invention and the idea can be borrowed by others. On the other hand, Brenda’s argument seems valid as bureaucracies in some firms intimidate inventors once they are aware of the agony they will undergo to put their ideas across. Therefore, if Brenda was to be assisted with that then she would open up and share more.

Sharon’s argument is not quite valid as it does not have the best interest of the organization. No one can completely depend on himself fully for creativity. The essence of teamwork is basically to allow team members to learn and borrow from each other. Over the years teamwork in organizations has proved to be a strong link towards achieving efficiency. Lastly, Jason and Ann should ensure their creativity is at an all time high even if it means modifying their early ingenious creations.

In conclusion to improve knowledge sharing some changes need to be effected at the flagstaff such as the way in which people in the different management levels interact with each other. The best possible way would be to network their information systems such that information is conveyed freely and fairly. Also, the culture of operating at the comfort zone should seize and everything should be questioned whenever there is room for improvement to enhance efficiency.

Reference List DuBrin, A. J.,

[supanova_question]

The recuperation of a generation Research Paper essay help

Introduction Oral history is one of the best ancient or traditional methods used to pass information from one generation to another. Aspects of cultural change, education especially on sexuality or health, gender identification and the roles of each individual in the family relied on oral history.

Due to lack of recorded material on critical subjects, oral history becomes the best way to get first hand information. Thus, by use of oral history and narrative/report analysis, my paper critically analyses the way poor people or indigenous communities like those of the aborigine descent are struggling to recuperate from a deteriorating health in their subsequent generations.

Culture erosion, negligence, traumatic past experiences, racism, and colonialism are some of the elements that interplay to hinder the progression of health in the indigenous communities in Taiwan and Canada. The traumatic impact of the colonialists not only eroded the cultural practices, but also altered the health status of the subsequent generations.

Why is health disparity an issue in the western world or Europe especially to those people living in Canada like Aborigines? Which issues contribute to the poor health status the community experience? Mitchell and Maracle cite colonialism as one of the major factors that have led to the deterioration of the health status of the indigenous communities (aborigines) (20).

Due to the invasion of the colonialists, the indigenous people had to succumb to their demands. They also mention Cultural assimilation of the whites as one of the other major issue that had a negative impact on the colonized communities. Unfortunately, the aborigines were not ready to accept the assimilation, which led to conflicts.

Consequently, the colonialists tortured and pressured them to abandon their social or cultural practices and adapt a new culture, which was not only hectic, but also very diverse. Using force and threats, the colonial government was able to establish a uniform cultural practice. Therefore, the traumatic experience inflicted on the minority groups like the aborigines affects the psychology of the subsequent generations.

Mental instability or illness is one of the health crises that the people of most minorities or indigenous communities’ experience. For instance, Mitchell and Maracle expose the deteriorating mental health of the Aborigines in Canada when they say, “mental health issues or issues of imbalance are reflected in high level of depression, additions, and suicides” (15). In addition, the psychological problems have persisted in different generations.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Additionally, Mitchell and Maracle put the blame of mental illness to the cultural erosion that the indigenous communities undergo. They also mention that the long-term impact of deculturation or diachronic trauma may integrate in the next generations, thereby leaving behind a disturbing legacy (15). The indigenous/minority groups abandoned their traditional healing methods and lifestyle, which could have solved the current emerging health issues.

The adaptation of a new lifestyle, which consists of different eating habit or human diets, leads to lifestyle diseases like cancer, diabetes, and hypertension among others. Colonialism led to adaptation of new cultural practices. The new generation therefore live this adapted culture; they do not have a chance to learn/know about their cultural practices. Therefore, they not only adapt to foreign culture, which is in the school curriculum, but also practice a culture of a society that overlooks their health.

Therefore, the indigenous communities in the west have a task to seek for their forgotten cultural practices, which may also be a remedy to their deteriorating health status. Besides being cheaper, the practices may also be a form of recuperation of the generations that undergo psychological instability.

According to Drew and Godlewska, the colonial perpetrators separated women from men or girls from boys, which denied the indigenous communities an opportunity to appreciate their familial environment (449). They assert that the segregation not only contributed to the erosion of family/moral values, but also led to racism, an issue that currently contributes to health disparity in the affected community.

Due to racial discrimination, the health priority of the minority groups is not an agenda in most government forums. The minority or indigenous people lack proper health care or facilities because of their skin color. Racism leads to discrimination or isolation in social institutions like hospital and schools.

Thus, the inaccessibility of the hospitals is the reason why the people succumb to ailments, which are treatable. Racism has led to isolation of social amenities in the society, which becomes both traumatic and painful to the indigenous communities and sometimes the psychological consequences culminates into mental instability. Moreover, children who live in racially segregated communities end up developing mental disorders, which can affect the many generations to come.

Racism denies the minority groups to access the higher education facilities of their choice, therefore making them to lag behind on the matters of health. Statistical analysis carried out in Canada comparing the health status of the aboriginal and the non-aboriginals reveal that the whites have a stable health record. Therefore, the impacts of the colonialists are the major issues that need remedy to ensure the healing of the indigenous communities.

We will write a custom Research Paper on The recuperation of a generation specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Furthermore, Mitchell and Maracle cite the lack of formal education to the indigenous communities that not only locks them out from accessing good jobs, but also denies them adequate information concerning health issues. Health information is critical.

The two scholars call for psychological education to the indigenous people to arm them up incase any member of their families experiences a traumatic event. Most of the higher institutions scrutinize the origin of their students while others bluntly refuse to accept non-white students. On the other hand, the institution that accepts them may lack vital courses within the health sectors, which leaves the communities to depend on the white people in their society.

The menial jobs do not give them a chance to access a good health package. With financial constrains, the indigenous/minority groups are unable to access health insurance systems. Consequently, the treatment cost of chronic diseases like cancer or diabetes among others is extremely high.

Racism promotes inequality, discrimination, and oppression of the minorities/indigenous communities in Europe. The inequality that prevails in Europe is because of the racial segregation. While the whites or the majority enjoy good health, jobs, education and an admirable lifestyle, the minority thrive under impoverished conditions and languish in poverty. The minority are unable to enjoy similar rights in equal quantity hence the poverty.

Although Mitchell and Maracle are unable to unravel the mystery behind the inequality in their society, they intellectually think that the answer may lie within the political docket or sector (14). Besides racial segregation, the politicians want to ensure the minor communities are ‘under their feet’. Therefore, the continuous oppression and discrimination ranges from the health, education to the economic issues. The white community fears for their position incase the minor community elevate their status beyond that of the whites.

Thusly, to keep them under control, oppression and discrimination are some of the tactics that politicians apply. Unfortunately, their uncouth tactic eventually denies the indigenous society right to health because they are unable to either access funds or social amenities concerned with their health. Additionally, the role of politicians is to control the economic and social wellbeing of their nation and therefore, when all citizens are unable to have equal rights, the problem definitely originates from the political sector.

Despite the devastating state of the health sector in the indigenous community, Mitchell and Maracle give remedies to the problem. First, the two scholars from the Aborigine community call for assistance from the health providers/sectors to heal the continually ailing community. Scientists, researchers, historians, and philosophers should converge to form a transformation system that will ensure the community recuperates.

Historians, psychologists, and philosophers should research on the ancient cultural practices especially the cultural degeneration of the indigenous communities like the aborigines since the invasion of the whites. Additionally, the ancient political, social, and economical practices should be under scrutiny as a way to ensure their health problems do not originate from the three elements. Furthermore, psychologists should educate adults from the indigenous communities on how to deal with mental illness.

Not sure if you can write a paper on The recuperation of a generation by yourself? We can help you for only $16.05 $11/page Learn More Therefore, psychological education will assist in the healing of the unborn generations because parents will have first hand information on how to deal with their mentally challenged children/infants (Mitchell and Maracle1). Nevertheless, the healing of the community will not occur overnight but it will be a long process with effective results.

Moreover, Mitchell and Maracle insist on the healing of the trauma that occurred during the colonial times (18). The two writers recommend the study of the emotional and spiritual status of the psychologically challenged individuals. The physical stress and wounds will also lead to a clean or healthy generation free of psychological trauma. The psychological and physical therapy will ensure the indigenous people accept the horrific and terrific incidents, events that occurred in their lives.

The third recommendation is that the education system should include the social, cultural, political, and economic practices of the indigenous communities in their curriculum. Consequently, the people will appreciate their origin therefore learning the effect of the elements on their health.

Similarly, the remedy will enable the community to design an effective methodology on how to heal their generations. Additionally, equal educational opportunities will give the communities a chance to learn on the different emerging diseases or disorders in the health sector or human body.

Therefore, they will be able to not only deal with the disease, but also put up preventive measures against the occurrence of the disease. Communal groups should practice unity, which will enable them to support each other, incase of traumatic event, or stress in an individual. The groups will also enlighten each other on the current issues affecting them in their community.

Finally, according to Mitchell and Maracle “the racism that remains a barrier to progress in (the) of indigenous people(s)” needs abolishment whence all the citizens especially the government or leaders should preach equality (20). Equality will not only lead to eradication of oppression, discrimination, and racism in the society, but also promote good health in the indigenous community. Besides, racism denying the minority communities their rights, it also culminates into hatred in the society, which hinders peace. Establishment of policies will ensure all generations practice equality, which will curb health disparities in the communities or western society.

On the other hand, Geertje asses the impact of mental instability on the family issues and values. For instance, with the use of oral history, he is able to investigate and give the negative effects of psychological instability, which ranges from break down of family ties like marriage, financial instability to lack of peace in the entire or extended families (Geertje 268). Therefore, linking Geertje and Mitchell’s articles, the two write-ups, confirm that familial psychological trauma is possibly transferable to the next generations.

In summary, using oral history, different articles have been able to produce social issues that never existed in records. These issues negatively affect communities, especially in matters of health. Colonialism forcefully altered the social and cultural practices of indigenous communities specifically, the aborigines. Unfortunately, the psychological, emotional, spiritual, and physical traumas persist in the subsequent generations despite colonialism having ended several decades ago.

Drew and Godlewska, and Mitchell and Maracle among others discuss the health disparities that colonialism caused while Boschma explains through oral history how emotional instability affect generations subsequently. Mitchell and Maracle outline the remedies of the health inequality in western society especially for the indigenous communities.

The two scholars recommend psychological treatment, education, and guidance to parents from these indigenous communities. They also call for unity among community members to solve and cater for the health of their fellow people. Finally, the leaders in the West should work hard to eliminate racism and discrimination in their society.

Works Cited Drew, Bednasek, and Godlewska, Anne.”The influence of betterment discourses on

Canadian Aboriginal peoples in the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries.” Canadian Geographer 53.4(2009): 444-461. Print

Geertje, Boschma. “Accommodation and resistance to the dominant cultural discourse on psychiatric mental health: Oral history accounts of family members.” Nursing Inquiry 14.4 (2007): 266-278. Print

Giltrow, Janet. Academic Writing: An Introduction. Peterborough, ON: Broadview Press, 2009.

Mitchell, Terry, and Maracle, Dawn. “Healing the Generations: Post-Traumatic Stress and the Health Status of Aboriginal Populations in Canada.” Journal of aboriginal health 4.12 (2005): 1-20.

[supanova_question]

Health Indicators Essay best essay help: best essay help

‘Healthy People 2010’ is a 10-year health strategic plan of the United States, which aims at promoting healthy lifestyles and prevention of diseases. The health strategic plan has it basis from Healthy People 2000 health agenda, which emanated from collaborative efforts of the United States government, citizens, and public health organizations.

Culmination of the Healthy People 2000 objectives did set stage for the formulation of Healthy People 2010 healthy strategic plan of the United States. The Healthy People 2010 has two major objectives: to improve the quality and length of healthy life, and eliminate healthy disparities in the society that has been very unequal.

To achieve its objective, the Healthy People 2010 identified 28 healthy indicators that are critical in assessing progress of health, but health experts identified 10 leading health indicators. The 10 leading health indicators give enough information regarding health status or issues in the population for policymakers to make appropriate policies. Obesity is one of the health issues with indicators such as physical activity, environmental quality, and access to healthcare falling in the 10 leading indicators of Healthy People 2010.

Physical activity is one of the leading health indicators according to Healthy People 2010 for it determines prevalence of obesity in the society. Physical activity intricately links with nutrition because the health status of a body does not only depend on physical activity, but also intake of nutritious diet and subsequent assimilation and utilization of the nutrients.

Since a healthy diet supplies the essential nutrients to the body, proper and optimum physical activity is necessary to enhance their assimilation and utilization, hence preventing the accumulation of the excess nutrients into toxic levels or causing obesity in the case of carbohydrates.

According to Centers for Disease Control [CDC] and Prevention (2009), enhanced physical activity and modification of diet are effective measures of reducing incidences of obesity in the society with health disparities and inequality (p.1). Thus, healthy body requires nutrients and physical activity to improve physiological and biochemical processes of the body, hence prevents occurrence of the obesity.

Social and physical environment is also another leading health indicator that determines predisposition to obesity. Series of studies have confirmed that social and physical environments influence eating and exercising habits of individuals.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Some environments such as workplaces and schools discourage physical exercises because people eat well yet they become preoccupied with other issues and neglect healthy lifestyles such as physical exercise. Due to lack of enough exercise in such environments, people gain weight and become obese. Social behaviors such as unhealthy eating habits have significant influence on the eating lifestyles of the people in certain social environments.

According to Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (2009), abundance of food, lack of exercising facilities and contemporary occupations that do not provide time for physical activities have contributed significantly to the development of obesity (p.2). Palatable and innutritious diets that are conveniently available in social places coupled with the lack of physical exercises degenerate into weight gain and obesity.

Accessibility to health care services is one of the 10 leading indicators of health that determines prevalence of obesity in the society. Since health status of the body depends on the nutritional and physical fitness, inaccessibility to health care services and vital information necessary for healthful lifestyles means that the population will neither eat nutritiously nor exercise well.

Satcher (2000) argues that, accessibility to health care is critical in enhancing measures of public health such as prevention, treatment, and management of diseases through provision of health information (p.2864). The inaccessibility to information concerning nutrition and physical activity increases prevalence of obesity in the population. Thus, to reverse increasing trends of obesity, accessibility to vital information in the healthcare institutions by the public is imperative.

References Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, (2009). Healthy People 2010. National Center for Health Statistics. Web.

Satcher, D. (2000). Eliminating Global Health Disparities. The Journal of the American Medical Association, 284(22), 2864.

[supanova_question]

The Rocking-Horse Winner Essay essay help online

Book Summary The Rocking-Horse Winner describes a young boy’s search for luck and love in a world with no love. Paul has a gift of picking the winning horse in horse races. His mother, Hester, in contrary, has no luck and even though she is outwardly successful, she is troubled by a feeling of failure.

The family’s expenditure exceeds its income and creates unspoken tension and this affects the relationships in the family. Paul and his two sisters recognize this tension and Paul even alleges that he can hear the house whispering, “There must be more money” (Lawrence, 1926).

Paul informs his uncle (Oscar) and Bassett, the gardener, about his luck on betting in horses: he has been betting using his pocket money and has won and accumulated some money. Both men place huge bets on the horse Paul identifies to be a potential winner. After their win, Paul and Bassett give Paul’s mother a very expensive gift, but this makes her spend more money, this upsets Paul and he works harder to be lucky.

As a Derby race nears, Paul strives to know the name of the winning horse. He does this by riding his rocking horse so that he can get to a state in which he can be sure about the winning horse. He remains sick on the day of the Derby but Bassett places bets on the horse that was identified by Paul, and even places a bet for Paul. The horse wins and Paul wins eighty thousand pounds, however, he dies at night.

Analysis The Rocking-Horse Winner presents a society in search of love and luck and this is evident from a number of characters. The main characters in the short story, Paul and Hester, are in search of love. Paul’s mother, Hester, entered marriage with a handsome man because of love, but the love died. Even though she has three children out of the marriage, she could not love them, and does not even love herself for she is troubled by a feeling of failure.

The closest she ever comes to finding love is through her son, Paul, but she rejects him too. Indeed, her lack of love for her children is shown when the author writes, “only she herself knew that at the centre of her heart was a hard little place that could not feel love, no, not for anybody” (Lawrence, 1926). While everyone thinks of her as a great parent, only she knows that her heart is hard and cannot love, not even her children who need it very much. To her, success and happiness means getting more money.

Hester’s desire for material wealth surpasses that of other important things such as love and self-knowledge. Her desire for money is insatiable, instead, they lead to disastrous results when she confuses money with love. In her pursuit of more money, Hester loses some basic family values.

Get your 100% original paper on any topic done in as little as 3 hours Learn More Her main aim is to bring up her children in a flamboyant lifestyle, as a result, her relationship with her children and husband dies. Whenever she gets money, she overspends it. Although the family lives in a “pleasant house” complete with servants and a nurse, they take them as show off objects. Hester’s uncontrollable spending creates tensions inside the household and this is personified by the whispering sounds that seem to come out the house and say “there must be more money” (Lawrence, 1926).

Paul’s talk with his mother about luck makes him believe that her mother’s love can only be won with money and luck. She makes a strong connection with luck and money. When Paul asks her whether luck was money, she replies, “It’s what causes you to have money” (Lawrence, 1926). From this talk, Paul concludes that his luck would make her happy, and this would translate to love. In contrary, she becomes greedier and is more concerned about money than loving her son (Snodgrass, pp. 196).

Paul’s ability to identify the winning horse pulls Oscar and Bassett into the betting business. Paul would get onto a rocking boat and rock continuously, like he was part of the race, until he got into a state in which he was sure of the winning horse. At the final race, Paul drives himself harder and harder to identify the winning horse.

His mother’s insatiability and whispering house drives him to try more and more as he knew that he would achieve two important things if he identified the winning horse: make his mother happy, and win her love. Paul’s desperate actions are an attempt to win love from his hard-hearted mother.

These efforts leave him sick and weak. After Bassett tells him that he had won eighty thousand pounds from the derby race, he tells his mother, “…did I ever tell you? I am lucky!” to which the mother replies, “No, you never did” (Lawrence, 1926), this proves that Hester never loved her children, especially Paul. Paul dies that night after failing to win his mother’s love.

Works Cited Lawrence, David Herbert Richards. The Rocking-Horse Winner. In The Norton

Introduction to Literature. Alison Booth and Kelly J. Mays, eds. Portable 10th ed. New York: Norton, 2011. Print.

We will write a custom Essay on The Rocking-Horse Winner specifically for you! Get your first paper with 15% OFF Learn More Snodgrass, William de Witt. A Rocking-Horse: The Symbol, the Pattern, the Way to Live. The Hudson Review, Vol. 11, No. 2, 1958, pp. 191-200

[supanova_question]